Archives

PATIENT SAFETY: The Art of Insulin Dose Adjustments in the Setting of GLP-1 RAs and GIP/GLP-1 RAs

Learning Objectives

 

Pharmacist Educational Objectives

After completing the continuing education activity, pharmacists will be able to

  • Describe different types of insulin along with their appropriate use
  • Recall newer non-insulin medications for diabetes, along with risks vs. benefits
  • Analyze clinical information pertaining to insulin + GLP-1 or GLP-1/GIP agonist medication adjustments
  • Demonstrate medication adjustment recommendations while incorporating patient-specific data

Pharmacy Technician Educational Objectives

After completing the continuing education activity, pharmacy technicians will be able to

  • Describe different types of insulin along with their appropriate use
  • Recognize over the counter treatment options for hypoglycemia
  • Recall newer non-insulin medications for diabetes, along with risks and benefits
  • Identify when to refer patients with questions about their diabetes medications to the pharmacist

    Pharmacist holding a paint brush and palette with insulin vials and syringes surrounding her.

    Release Date:

    Release Date: November 15, 2025

    Expiration Date: November 15, 2028

    Course Fee

    Pharmacists: $7

    Pharmacy Technicians: $4

    ACPE UANs

    Pharmacist: 0009-0000-25-059-H05-P

    Pharmacy Technician: 0009-0000-25-059-H05-T

    Session Codes

    Pharmacist: 25YC59-UWT63

    Pharmacy Technician: 25YC59-WTU36

    Accreditation Hours

    2.0 hours of CE

    Accreditation Statements

    The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy is accredited by the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education as a provider of continuing pharmacy education.  Statements of credit for the online activity ACPE UAN 0009-0000-25-059-H05-P/T  will be awarded when the post test and evaluation have been completed and passed with a 70% or better. Your CE credits will be uploaded to your CPE monitor profile within 2 weeks of completion of the program.

     

    Disclosure of Discussions of Off-label and Investigational Drug Use

    The material presented here does not necessarily reflect the views of The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy or its co-sponsor affiliates. These materials may discuss uses and dosages for therapeutic products, processes, procedures and inferred diagnoses that have not been approved by the United States Food and Drug Administration. A qualified health care professional should be consulted before using any therapeutic product discussed. All readers and continuing education participants should verify all information and data before treating patients or employing any therapies described in this continuing education activity.

    Faculty

     
    Janki Shah, PharmD, BCACP, BC-ADM
    Clinical Pharmacist
    9amHealth
    Encinitas, CA

    Faculty Disclosure

    In accordance with the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education (ACPE) Criteria for Quality and Interpretive Guidelines, The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy requires that faculty disclose any relationship that the faculty may have with commercial entities whose products or services may be mentioned in the activity.

    Janki Shah, PharmD, BCACP, BC-ADM has no relationships with ineligible companies and therefore have nothing to disclose.

    ABSTRACT

    Insulin remains a cornerstone of treatment for diabetes mellitus (DM). Access to newer DM medications, which have cardiorenal benefits and a lower risk of hypoglycemia, is increasing with improved insurance coverage and lower cost options. With these newer medications having greater accessibility, the need to adjust the patient’s current medication regimen to incorporate the new medicines safely is increased. The adjustments should account for the patient’s current glycemic control, glycemic targets, planned lifestyle changes, risk of hypoglycemia or hyperglycemia, and risk of adverse drug reactions.

    CONTENT

    Content

    INTRODUCTION

    This continuing education (CE) activity aims to guide safe insulin dose adjustments when adding glucagon-like peptide 1 (GLP-1) receptor agonists (GLP-1-RAs), and dual glucose-dependent insulinotropic polypeptide (GIP)/GLP-1 RAs (GIP/GLP-1 RAs) in those with type 2 diabetes (T2D). Clinical utilization of GLP-1 RAs and GIP/GLP-1 RAs in combination with insulin has been lagging despite their benefits.1 This is due to a lack of clinician comfort with insulin adjustment despite Food and Drug Administration (FDA) approval and improved insurance coverage. Pharmacists can optimize a patient’s regimen by reducing the risk of hyperglycemia or hypoglycemia, adverse drug reactions (ADRs), and medication/injection burden.

     

    Diabetes Basics

    Diabetes is an endocrinological disorder characterized by metabolic imbalance (glucose utilization and insulin effect).2 In patients who have diabetes, hyperglycemia occurs and could lead to long-term complications such as myocardial infarction, cerebrovascular accident, peripheral artery disease, retinopathy, nephropathy, and neuropathy.2

     

    A glycated hemoglobin level (A1c) greater than or equal to 6.5% indicates a person has diabetes.3 When discussing how an A1c correlates to a patient’s self-monitored blood glucose (SMBG; home blood glucose testing using a glucometer or a continuous glucose monitor [CGM]), it can be helpful to consider an estimated average glucose (eAG).3 The complete equation and calculator can be found at https://professional.diabetes.org/glucose_calc. A simplification is remembering that an A1c of 7% equals an eAG of 154 mg/dL and that each A1c percentage represents about 30 mg/dL. Generally, for an A1c goal of less than 7%, fasting blood sugars (FBGs) should be between 80 and 130 mg/dL, and 2-hour post-prandial glucose (PPGs) values should be less than 180 mg/dL.3

     

    Previously, mainstay treatment options for glycemic control included metformin, sulfonylureas (glimepiride, glipizide, and glyburide), thiazolidinediones (pioglitazone), and dipeptidyl peptidase-4 inhibitors (alogliptin (Nesina), linagliptin (Tradjenta), saxagliptin (Onglyza), and sitagliptin (Januvia). Newer treatment options that are focused on cardiorenal benefits, weight management, and glycemic control include4

    • Sodium-glucose cotransporter 2 (SGLT-2) inhibitors: canagliflozin (Invokana), bexagliflozin (Brenzavvy), dapagliflozin (Farxiga), empagliflozin (Jardiance), and ertugliflozin (Steglatro)
    • GLP-1-RAs: dulaglutide (Trulicity), exenatide ER (Bydureon), exenatide IR (Byetta), liraglutide (Victoza), lixisenatide (Adlyxin), and semaglutide (Ozempic)
    • GIP/GLP-1 RA (tirzepatide [Mounjaro])

     

    The diabetes management landscape is changing. Even if patients have appropriate glycemic control, their medication regimen may not be optimal based on co-morbidities. Please see the following link to the American Diabetes Association’s recommendations on medication selection: https://diabetesjournals.org/view-large/figure/5311673/dc25S009f3.tif.

     

    Insulin

    Insulin has been a cornerstone of diabetes management for decades. With the advent of newer medication classes, it can appear as though insulin’s importance in current practice is diminishing. Many individuals still benefit from the use of insulin, including those with type 1 diabetes (T1D), patients with newly diagnosed T2D with an elevated A1c, and those with access/cost concerns regarding branded medications.

     

    Although treatment options for diabetes have advanced and include SGLT-2 inhibitors, GLP-1-RAs, and GIP/GLP-1 RAs, these drugs can be cost prohibitive depending on the situation.4 Insulin itself can also be cost-prohibitive depending on insurance coverage (or lack thereof) and patient-specific dosing needs. In certain situations where patients pay out-of-pocket, reducing the daily insulin dose can help reduce the cost.

     

    Insulin’s onset of action, duration of action, and concentration help to categorize it.

    • Patients use bolus insulins such as ultra rapid, short, or regular insulin prior to meals to manage blood glucose spikes. These insulin types generally help lower PPGs. Checking SMBGs two hours after a meal helps to understand the effect while checking prior to mealtimes ensures safety.
    • Patients use basal insulins, injected once or twice daily, to provide constant insulin action throughout the day and night. Options include intermediate, long-acting, and ultra-long-acting. These insulin types generally help lower FBGs and patients who use these insulins should check their SMBGs when in a fasting state as well.
    • Examples of concentrated insulins include insulin lispro U-200 (insulin lispro U-200), insulin degludec (Tresiba U-200), insulin glargine U-300 (Tuojeo U-300), and insulin regular U-500. Testing for insulin degludec U200 and insulin glargine U-300 would match basal insulin testing. Testing for insulin lispro U-200 and insulin regular U-500 would match bolus insulin testing.
    • Mixed insulins contain a mix of a bolus/regular insulin and an intermediate insulin in pre-fixed percentages to reduce the injection burden. Examples include insulin aspart protamine/insulin aspart (Novolog 70/30), insulin lispro protamine/insulin lispro (Humalog 75/25 or Humalog 50/50), and insulin isophone (NPH)/insulin regular (Humulin 70/30 or Novolin 70/30). For safety, these require fixed meal timings and portions and thus testing is recommended two hours before and after breakfast and dinner.

     

    Insulin Dosing

    In practice, clinicians usually start patients on a basal insulin rather than a bolus insulin as it involves fewer injections and provides steadier coverage throughout the day. Generally, a starting basal insulin dose is calculated using 0.1 to 0.2 units/kg/day or 10 units daily.5 When insulin needs increase beyond 0.5 units/kg/day of basal insulin, providers (such as clinical pharmacists) can consider the addition of bolus insulin.6 Using greater than 0.5 units/kg/day of basal insulin is referred to as overbasalization (see SIDEBAR).

     

     

    SIDEBAR: Overbasalization6,7

    Overbasalization describes the situation in which the patient’s bedtime glucose readings are significantly higher (greater than 50 points) than their fasting values. Ideally, bedtime and fasting readings should be in equilibrium. Overbasalization is common in patients whose basal insulins are titrated to a fasting goal without considering the patient’s end-of-day blood sugars. It also occurs if prescribers think adding a medication would increase the patient’s injection/medication burden. This generally occurs when the patient’s basal insulin dosing exceeds 0.5 units/kg/day. Ideally, the provider should consider a medication that helps lower PPGs.

     

    Using GLP-1 RAs and GIP/GLP-1 RAs has increased the ability to minimize the need for bolus insulin, reduce the risk of hypoglycemia, and lower PPG. Using a collaborative practice agreement within an interprofessional collaborative team has significantly reduced overbasalization and A1c.

     

     

    The total amount of insulin a patient takes in a day is their total daily dose (TDD). This TDD is a helpful starting point when making insulin adjustments. For example, if a patient is taking 100 units of insulin per day (this could be basal or basal + bolus) then generally 10% to 15% is a reasonable adjustment.5 This equates to an increase or decrease of 10 to 15 units. For a smaller TDD of 20 units the adjustment would be 2 to 3 units. Alternately, patients can self-adjust the dosing within specified parameters such as increasing a basal insulin by 2 units (up to a pre-specified maximum) every three days that the FBGs are above goal.5

     

    Patient/situation specific parameters that additionally need to be considered are the patient specific glycemic goal, glycemic trends (variability vs. stability), planned lifestyle changes, hypo/hyperglycemia, and ADRs. The prior recommendations only account for medication changes while everything else remains constant. Realistically, dosing changes will likely need to be made at larger percentages to accommodate multiple changing factors.

     

    If PPGs indicate a need for improvement of glycemic control, clinicians can consider either a GLP-1 RA (for T2D) or bolus insulin (T1D or T2D). Adding a GLP-1 RA can be more complex for those on a multiple daily injection (MDI) insulin regimen (basal + bolus). Guidance regarding basal + bolus insulin dose deprescribing varies.

     

    Insulin Dose Adjustment with GLP-1 RAs and GIP/GLP-1 RAs

    Three studies have reviewed the efficacy of adding liraglutide to an MDI insulin regimen in patients with T2D.8-10 They documented a significant reduction in A1c from baseline in the GLP-1 RA group compared to the MDI control groups. Two studies—one conducted by researchers at the Mountain Diabetes and Endocrine Center, Asheville, North Carolina and a second conducted in Europe and Saudi Arabia called the MDI Liraglutide Trial—showed significantly reduced insulin dosing in the liraglutide groups.8,9 In contrast, the third study (N = 71), conducted at the University of Texas Southwestern Medical Center (UTSMC), Dallas, did not show a significant reduction in insulin dosing.10

     

    The Mountain Diabetes and Endocrine Center study made insulin dose adjustments based on A1c but included only 37 participants. The study protocol indicated that researchers should reduce the basal dose by 20% for those with an A1c less than or equal to 8%.8

     

    In the MDI Liraglutide Trial (N = 124), the insulin adjustments were based on FBGs and PPGs . When fasting values were less than 90 mg/dL or participants had nocturnal hypoglycemia, the researchers reduced the basal dose by 20% to 40%. If the fasting values were 90 to 126 mg/dL, the researchers reduced the basal doses by 20% to 30%. The researchers did not adjust the basal insulin dose if fasting glucose levels were above 126 mg/dL. If they found the patient’s pre-meal glucose value to be less than 126 mg/dL, they reduced the bolus dose of the prior meal by 10% to 20%. If participants experienced daytime hypoglycemia, the researchers reduced the bolus dose of the preceding meal by more than 20%.9

     

    The UTSMC study protocol reduced insulin doses by 20% if the A1c was less than or equal to 8%. The investigators did not adjust the insulin dose if the A1c was greater than 8%. They did not define the specific bolus and basal insulin dose adjustments.10

     

    The TRANSITION2D study (N = 60) reviewed insulin deintensification with once weekly semaglutide.11 These researchers transitioned patients who were reasonably well controlled (A1c 7.5% or less) from bolus insulin to a GLP-1 RA (semaglutide) in a one-step approach. They discontinued bolus insulin upon initiating semaglutide, then titrated the semaglutide dose.11 A limitation to real-world applicability was that less than 25% of the participants were on 80 to 120 units of insulin per day.11 Concerns in the real world would be a lack of tolerance to semaglutide or lack of follow-up on the patients’ behalf, as this would lead to hyperglycemia. Also, shared decision making between the patient/provider would first need to optimize glycemic control using insulin dose adjustments to reduce the risk of hyperglycemia/diabetic ketoacidosis (DKA)/hyperosmolar hyperglycemic state (HHS).

     

    Traditional insulin dosing guidance and these studies show that insulin dose adjustments can vary widely from 10% to 40%. One path isn’t necessarily correct as adjusting insulin doses is an art of sorts.

     

    HYPOGLYCEMIA TREATMENT

    Accounting for and incorporating historical patient-specific parameters helps minimize the risk of hypoglycemia. Patient education regarding appropriate identification, treatment, and prevention of recurrence is paramount for safety. Common hypoglycemia symptoms are hunger, difficulty concentrating, headache, shakiness, sweating, and irritability. The 15-15 Rule advises patients with low blood sugar, defined as less than 70 mg/dL, to consume 15 g of carbohydrates and then wait 15 minutes to recheck the SMBG. Options to increase the blood sugar are 4 ounces of regular juice or non-diet soda, 1 tablespoon of sugar, honey, or syrup, 3 to 4 glucose tablets, or 1 dose glucose gel.12 It is important to know that glucose tablets and gel are available without a prescription. Most patients know that if they experience hypoglycemia, they should eat something sweet. However, without following the treatment/prevention steps, patients may experience additional concerns. Table 1 describes appropriate action steps.

     

    Table 1. Action Steps to Address Hypoglycemia13

    Appropriate step Assessment questions
    Patients must check initial and subsequent glucose values to have objective data What values did you see when you checked your blood sugar?
    Initial treatment should consist of 15 grams of simple carbohydrates for the quickest improvement of hypoglycemia symptoms.

    Of note, treatment with complex carbohydrates or carbohydrates + protein/fat* will delay the improvement of hypoglycemia symptoms.

    What food/drink/treatment option did you initially use to address the low blood sugar?
    Overtreatment with more than 15 grams of carbohydrates leads to overcorrection (hyperglycemia) How much of the food/drink/treatment option did you initially use to address the low blood sugar?
    After consuming a simple carbohydrate, the patient should consume a complex carbohydrate + protein pairing, to prevent hypoglycemia from recurring within two hours Once the blood sugar returned to a safe range, what did you eat to keep the blood sugar steady?

    *Examples of complex carbohydrates (wheat/corn/peas/potatoes/fruit) and carbohydrates + protein/fat (apple + peanut butter/pizza/candy bar)

     

    NEWER THERAPIES

    As this activity discusses newer therapies, new information is consistently being learned. To provide comprehensive and current or guideline-directed care, these must be a part of the patient assistance process. Some patients have strong feelings for or against newer therapies, so it is helpful to be able to provide the information in a non-biased manner.

     

    SGLT-2 Inhibitors    

    SGLT-2 inhibitors increase urinary excretion of excess glucose and thus can increase the risk of genitourinary infections such as yeast infections and urinary tract infections. This class of medications also has significant long-term cardiorenal benefits.14 Optimization of these medications would also be ideal, especially when affordable, to reduce the need for insulin.

     

    Although this CE activity’s focus is to review insulin dosing adjustments when introducing concurrent GLP-1 RA and GIP/GLP-1 RA dose adjustments, clinicians can apply some of the same practices when adjusting other medications, such as SGLT2-inhibitors.

     

    GLP-1 RAs

    The FDA approved the first GLP-1 RA, exenatide, in 2005, and patients needed to inject it twice daily.15 Now, patients can inject GLP-1 RAs daily or weekly. In 2019, the FDA approved the first non-injectable GLP-1 RA, oral semaglutide (Rybelsus).15 Additionally, this group of medications provides cardiorenal protective effects and weight loss.16 Common ADRs are gastrointestinal intolerances such as nausea, upset stomach, constipation, and vomiting.16

     

    Semaglutide is the most effective medication in this class from a glycemic management perspective.16 Dulaglutide, liraglutide, and exenatide are the most tolerated in this class; however, of these options dulaglutide is the most effective.16 Before these newer DM medications were available, the commonly utilized PPG-lowering options were metformin, sulfonylureas, bolus insulin, and mixed insulin. Of those, metformin is the only one that does not increase risk of hypoglycemia.

     

    GIP/GLP-1 RAs

    GIP/GLP-1 RAs have a dual hormonal activation that promotes satiety, slows digestion, and reduces hunger. Common ADRs are similar to that of GLP1-RAs but even though tirzepatide is more potent at improving glycemic control than semaglutide, it is also better tolerated.16 Currently, the FDA has approved tirzepatide as the only medication in this class. Additionally, despite the dual activation, patients tend to tolerate tirzepatide better than some GLP-1 RAs based on anecdotal experience. Tirzepatide also provides cardiorenal protective effects.17

     

    Combination basal insulin + GLP-1 RA medications

    Currently, the FDA has approved two fixed-ratio combinations (FRC) of basal insulin/GLP-1 RA: insulin degludec/liraglutide, also known as iDeglira (Xultophy), and insulin glargine/lixisenatide, also known as iGlarlixi (Suliqua).18 These medications have a fixed level of a basal insulin and a once daily GLP-1 RA combined into a single pre-filled pen. Insulin has no maximum daily limit but the GLP-1 RAs do. Thus (because these products are fixed ratios combinations) the maximum daily GLP-1 RA dose limits the daily insulin dose in FRCs.19 The dosing is based on units of the insulin component.

     

    For example, each unit of iDeglira contains 1 unit of insulin and 0.036 units of liraglutide.20 The maximum dose is 50 units, which contains 50 units of insulin degludec and 1.8 mg of liraglutide (liraglutide's maximum daily dose). The manufacturer advises patients who are insulin and GLP-1 RA naïve to start at 10 units daily, whereas those that are currently on basal insulin can start at 16 units daily.12

     

    IGlarlixi is available in the United States as Soliqua 100/33, indicating that there is 0.33 mg of lixisenatide for every unit of insulin glargine. The maximum dosage of iGlarlixi is 60 units; however, this is based on the lixisenatide daily maximum of 20 mcg. Those transitioning from less than 30 units of basal insulin would be started on 15 units of iGlarlixi. For those between 30 to 60 units of basal insulin, the starting dose would be 30 units of iGlarlixi.21

     

    A study completed at the Diabetes Center of the Békés County Central Hospital in Hungary (N = 62) sought to review the safety and efficacy of switching well-managed patients with T2DM (A1c less than 7.5%) from basal/bolus insulin (low TDD) to insulin degludec/liraglutide combination.20 The study defined low TDD as less than or equal to 70 units of insulin per day. The transition method was to stop the prior basal/bolus insulin regimen and to start 16 units of iDeglira. Then the FBGs were titrated to 90 to 108 mg/dL by increasing the iDeglira dose by 2 units every 3 days. The study continued or initiated metformin and titrated it up to 3000 mg (the maximum daily dose of metformin is higher in Hungary than in the United States). The intervention reduced the TDD from 43.3 units to 22.55 units, which was significant.20

     

    Theoretically, this is a wonderful way to reduce injection burden and optimize adherence.6 These medications’ clinical utility depends on the patient’s lifestyle patterns, insurance coverage, medication availability, and out-of-pocket cost. Depending on the patient, the fixed ratio dosing and once-daily dosing could be a benefit or a drawback. Patients who would like to minimize injection burden and can safely delay insulin may prefer a once weekly GLP-1 RA or GIP/GLP-1 RA injection. Having the ability to titrate basal insulin and a GLP-1 RA separately allows more dosing individualization, which leads to more patients achieving goal FBGs.22

     

    INTRODUCTION TO THE CASES

    The rest of this activity focuses on case-based learning. For these cases, learners should assume that any information not provided is within normal limits, there is no change from baseline, or any change has been addressed. These cases derive from patients in a primary care setting, but this information can help in various settings. Also, due to the focus on insulin dose adjustments, the healthcare provider does not discuss the use of GLP-1 RAs or GIP/GLP-1 RAs for an indication of obesity. As obesity can co-exist with T2D, healthcare providers should monitor weight during initiation and titration of GLP-1 RAs or GIP/GLP-1 RAs.

     

    CGMs have been more accessible in recent years, and they provide excellent graphic review of glycemic control. This learning experience uses glycemic charts. The charts depicted here would be gathered from a patient’s glucometer or SMBG log and commonly depict the last 14 days of glycemic control. Clinicians should crosscheck values from a SMBG log with the patient’s glucometer if they have concerns about inaccuracy. Each column that lists a glucose value specifies the timing with regard to meals; acB is before breakfast, acL is before lunch, acD is before dinner, and HS is at bedtime. During the initial pharmacist visit, pharmacists need to manage patients expectations and urge frequent testing because it allows for the safest insulin dose adjustments. It also ideally decreases the testing needs moving forward by limiting the patient’s insulin doses and frequency.

     

    PAUSE AND PONDER: Thought Questions

    Safety:

    • Is the patient tolerating the current regimen?
    • Is the patient experiencing any hypoglycemia?

    Efficacy:

    • Is the current regimen helping the patient achieve glycemic goals?
    • What medication adjustments would help move the current glycemic patterns towards the goal?

     

    CASE 1: Arya Brown–pronouns: he/him/his

    Arya is a patient who presents for his first pharmacist visit. First, the pharmacist reviews the electronic medical record for Arya’s recent history.

     

    Visit 1

    Arya reported that he was doing well with dulaglutide 0.75 mg weekly and his current insulin glargine dose of 18 units daily. He reported that his appetite was more controlled, and he felt more energetic since starting dulaglutide. The patient was excited to increase the dose of dulaglutide.

     

    The patient’s current SMBG log shows he checks his FBGs only sporadically, and they fall between 128 and 154 (average = 143), no hypoglycemia, and consistent values above goal. Based on the anticipated improvement of glycemic control throughout the day by increasing the dulaglutide dose to 1.5 mg weekly, the pharmacist started shared decision making to continue the current insulin glargine for now. The pharmacist asked the patient to check his blood sugars in the evening, either before dinner or at bedtime, to allow for further assessment of glycemic trends throughout the day. Arya verbalized understanding of this request, but reports that he will likely only check blood sugars once a day and therefore asked to alternate testing times.

     

    Visit 2

    Arya presented for his second pharmacist visit after his third dose of dulaglutide 1.5 mg. He said that his blood sugars were at goal and that he had slight but tolerable nausea with the current dulaglutide dose. He reported that the nausea improved since the first injection at this dose. The pharmacist and Arya discussed the option of maintaining the dulaglutide dose for the next prescription to allow additional time for tolerance. However, Arya prefers to increase it to dulaglutide 3 mg weekly with the next prescription after four doses of 1.5 mg have been taken. He indicates the symptoms have improved over time and are barely noticeable.

     

    His current SMBGs show FBGs ranging from 128 to 141 (average = 135). Since his glycemic control is now closer to goal than previously, he will need to adjust insulin glargine dosing to minimize the risk of hypoglycemia. The risk of causing temporary hypoglycemia is higher than that of causing temporary hyperglycemia. Thus, the pharmacist decides to reduce the insulin dose by 6 units. This is a 33% insulin reduction.

     

    Visit 3

    At Arya’s third visit, he reports feeling nauseous and vomiting after injecting the second dose of dulaglutide 3 mg weekly. He says he vomited after the first dose and thought it may have been related to a food choice at that time. The vomiting improved after a couple of days, but it recurred after the second dose of dulaglutide 3 mg. The patient shows his glucometer for SMBGs as noted in Table 3.

     

    Table 3. Arya Visit 3

    Date AcB      HS HS dose (insulin glargine) comment
    12 units
    134 12 units
    147 12 units
    136 12 units
    12 units
    124 149 12 units
    12 units Dulaglutide 3 mg (dose 1)
    12 units
    117 146 12 units
    12 units
    137 12 units
    120 12 units
    131 12 units
    116 12 units Dulaglutide 3 mg (dose 2)
    127 12 units
    Visit 3   12 units
    Average 125 140

     

    The SMBGs indicate improved glycemic control. The pharmacist suggested that Arya’s ADRs seem intolerable. Arya agrees. He was amenable to stopping the dulaglutide 3 mg weekly and resuming the lower 1.5 mg weekly dose when his symptoms abate (at least a week after the last dose). Now the discussion turned to what insulin dose the patient should take with the lower dose of dulaglutide.

     

    The patient’s prior glycemic control is a blueprint for patient specific response to insulin dose adjustments. Since Arya is returning to the 1.5 mg of dulaglutide weekly, and he has taken that dose before, the glycemic control information presented during visit 2 is helpful. The general takeaway is that his glycemic control was close to goal while on dulaglutide 1.5 mg weekly and insulin glargine 18 units daily. The pharmacist and the patient make a shared decision to adjust the insulin glargine to 20 units daily to move the patient’s glycemic control closer to goal.

     

    They agree to re-try dulaglutide 3 mg weekly in the future if he tolerates the 1.5 mg weekly dose better over time. They also discuss the possibility of using a different GLP-1 RA or a GIP/GLP-1 RA, as tolerance between medications can vary.

     

    CASE 2: Alex Devi–pronouns: they/them/theirs

    Visit 1

    Alex presented to their first pharmacist visit and reports that their insurance now covers tirzepatide for diabetes at a reasonable cost, so they would like to minimize MDI insulin regimen. The patient denies any contraindications to GIP/GLP-1 RA. The pharmacist tells Alex that they can adjust their insulin doses based on tolerance to tirzepatide, but there is no guarantee that insulin can be stopped.

     

    Based on the current optimized glycemic control (Table 4), starting and titrating tirzepatide will necessitate insulin dose adjustments. They are currently injecting insulin degludec 36 units daily and insulin lispro 8 units with breakfast, 10 units with lunch, and 14 units with dinner. To limit the risk of hypoglycemia, the pharmacist and Alex planned to decrease doses and assess this specific patient’s response. As tirzepatide will primarily impact post-prandial glycemic control, and the patient is on a medication (insulin lispro) that can cause post-prandial hypoglycemia, the goal was to focus on bolus insulin reduction. In this case, glycemic control appears steady throughout the day. The pharmacist planned to reduce all prandial doses equally to allow blood sugars to rise throughout the day and let the full effect of tirzepatide occur while limiting hypoglycemia due to insulin. Due to tirzepatide’s potency as a dual GIP/GLP-1 RA and Alex’s current glycemic control, they will reduce the insulin lispro dose by 4 units per meal. Thus, the patient’s total daily insulin dose was reduced by 12 units per day, an 18% reduction in TDD of insulin.

     

    Table 4. Alex Visit 1

    Date acB      acB dose (insulin lispro) acL          acL dose (insulin lispro) acD         acD dose (insulin lispro) HS HS dose (insulin degludec U100) Notes
    117 8 109 10 137 14 171 36 units
    93 8 129 10 128 14 161 36 units
    107 8 91 10 145 14 127 36 units
    126 8 79 10 141 14 152 36 units
    93 8 133 10 147 14 131 36 units
    82 8 121 10 124 14 170 36 units
    107 8 132 10 128 14 160 36 units
    112 8 125 10 111 14 165 36 units
    105 8 89 10 147 14 170 36 units
    77 8 96 10 133 14 130 36 units
    108 8 111 10 91 14 146 36 units
    92 8 103 10 113 14 164 36 units
    97 8 110 10 118 14 151 36 units
    101 8 89 10 97 14 132 36 units
    122 8 131 10 121 14 130 36 units
    Visit 1 104 8 125 10 36 units Start tirzepatide 2.5 mg
    Average 103 111 125 151

     

    Visit 2

    Table 5 summarizes Alex’s glycemic control when they returned for their second appointment. The pharmacist looks for trends and sees that the blood sugar averages appear to be lowest pre-dinner and then highest at bedtime. A potential concern is that Alex may overeat at dinnertime as a response to rapidly decreasing blood sugars between lunch and dinner. Alex denies any hypoglycemia symptoms or adverse effects from tirzepatide. They just finished the fourth dose of tirzepatide 2.5 mg and are interested in increasing the dose. To increase tirzepatide, the pharmacist used the information gathered to minimize the patient’s insulin intake. Based on the response and current SMBGs, roughly 4 units is an appropriate dose reduction per meal. Logistically, this would eliminate the breakfast insulin, reduce the lunchtime dose to 2 units, and reduce the dinnertime insulin dose to 6 units. The pharmacist needs to evaluate the lunchtime dose of 2 units further. For someone with T2D, 2 units is a minimal dose of insulin. The actual effect is questionable, especially in this individual, where another medication is being titrated up.

     

    Table 5. Alex Visit 2

    Date acB      acB dose (insulin lispro) acL          acL dose (insulin lispro) acD         acD dose (insulin lispro) HS HS dose (insulin degludec U-100) Notes
    113 4 95 6 79 10 150 36 units
    79 4 122 6 91 10 139 36 units
    107 4 107 6 113 10 162 36 units
    102 4 125 6 91 10 172 36 units
    104 4 118 6 99 10 164 36 units tirzepatide 2.5 mg (Dose 3)
    81 4 118 6 81 10 156 36 units
    120 4 102 6 101 10 158 36 units
    85 4 123 6 75 10 169 36 units
    77 4 127 6 79 10 168 36 units
    84 4 108 6 103 10 126 36 units
    111 4 89 6 79 10 139 36 units
    112 4 115 6 92 10 140 36 units tirzepatide 2.5 mg (Dose 4)
    87 4 87 6 101 10 174 36 units
    73 4 102 6 76 10 139 36 units
    85 4 127 6 98 10 163 36 units
    Visit 2 107 4 36 units
    Average 95 111 91 155

     

    Reviewing the pre-dinner glycemic values (the lowest throughout the day) and eliminating the lunchtime insulin dose would help reduce the risk of hypoglycemia. Thus, the consensus was to eliminate the breakfast and lunchtime insulin doses while reducing the dinner time dose to 6 units. Therefore, they decided to reduce the patient’s total daily insulin dose by 14 units, a 25% reduction in TDD of insulin. The pharmacist advised the patient that he can skip testing his SMBG before lunch as he is not injecting a bolus insulin at that time.

     

    Visit 3

    Alex presented for their third appointment and denies any adverse effects with tirzepatide 5 mg weekly. Alex was happy with reducing injection burden from four times a day to twice a day! They reported they have lost some weight. They have also increased activity slightly and are planning to make that a priority in the upcoming month. They would like to continue titrating tirzepatide when able. Looking at current glycemic values (Table 6), the adjustments made at the last visit stabilized control again.

     

    Table 6. Alex Visit 3

    Date acB      acB dose (insulin lispro) acD         acD dose (insulin lispro) HS HS dose (insulin degludec U100) Notes
    110 0 111 6 115 36 units
    119 0 106 6 132 36 units
    133 0 129 6 96 36 units
    126 0 100 6 99 36 units
    126 0 99 6 151 36 units tirzepatide  5 mg (Dose 2)
    118 0 111 6 97 36 units
    130 0 110 6 124 36 units
    112 0 131 6 149 36 units
    134 0 106 6 144 36 units
    99 0 105 6 103 36 units
    97 0 117 6 154 36 units
    98 0 111 6 153 36 units tirzepatide 5 mg (Dose 3)
    115 0 121 6 141 36 units
    119 0 96 6 129 36 units
    122 0 98 6 154 36 units
    Visit 3 102 0 36 units
    Average 116 110 129

     

    Based on this patient’s previous responses, it seems that the insulin dose should be reduced by about 12 to 14 units of insulin to accommodate the tirzepatide dose increase. Additionally, due to Alex’s anticipated activity change, they may need to reduce the total daily insulin dose further. The pharmacist can help reduce the injection burden by eliminating the dinnertime dose of insulin lispro. Next, the basal dose needs to be adjusted. There is room for discussion, based on the factors noted (current glycemic control, planned activity changes, and dose increase of tirzepatide). To limit the risk of hypoglycemia, they decide to reduce insulin degludec from 36 units to 26 units. This is a reduction of 16 units of insulin. They could have reduced the patient’s basal dose to accommodate everything except the activity change if it was unclear that they were planning to make a change soon.

     

    All plans must be patient-specific, and with this discussion, the patient is reliable and was waiting to change their activity once this discussion occurred. For other patients who are not as clear that they are planning a change, the pharmacist could advise reducing the basal insulin dose to approximately 30 units daily for now and then communicate with the clinic when they make the change for review of SMBGs to allow for additional adjustments.

     

    CASE 3: Zephyr Hernandez–pronouns: she/her/hers

    Visit 1

    Zephyr’s provider referred her to the pharmacist because her A1c was above goal and she was experiencing hypoglycemic episodes. From a complete assessment of the patient’s medication and lifestyle routine, it appeared that the patient’s mealtimes were inconsistent. Zephyr indicated her schedule dictates whether she can eat breakfast and/or lunch, but that she tries to eat dinner consistently. She injects insulin aspart protamine/insulin aspart 70/30 mix, 24 units in the morning and 30 units in the evening. Based on Zephyr’s readings (Table 7), she has hypoglycemia before dinner when she skips lunch. She treats the hypoglycemia with soda or candy. The patient says she skips her breakfast mixed insulin dose when she skips breakfast but then ends up with hyperglycemia pre-dinner.

     

    Table 7. Zephyr Visit 1

    Date acB      acB dose (insulin aspart protamine/insulin aspart 70/30 mix) acL          acD         acD dose (insulin aspart protamine/insulin aspart 70/30 mix) HS Notes
    123 24 122 113 30 137
    134 24 106 78 30 257 skipped lunch
    88 24 114 112 30 118
    159 24 109 76 30 188 skipped lunch
    76 24 121 111 30 123
    118 0 156 187 30 187 skipped breakfast
    123 0 164 190 30 128 skipped breakfast
    139 24 116 106 30 164
    95 24 96 68 30 196 skipped lunch
    113 24 107 102 30 141
    117 24 120 109 30 186
    159 0 145 189 30 145 skipped breakfast
    149 24 132 72 30 179 skipped lunch
    117 24 127 109 30 125
    107 24 114 79 30 212 skipped lunch
    Visit 1 96 0 163   skipped breakfast
    Average 120 126 113 166

     

    During the visit, the pharmacist and Zephyr reviewed the 15-15 Rule for identifying and treating hypoglycemia. They also discussed the fact that mixed insulin, unfortunately, does not allow mealtime flexibility due to the fixed ratio. The patient says she will try to maintain steady mealtimes and portions. She also asked to try a medication like semaglutide and has no contraindications.

     

    The pharmacist explained that the first dose of semaglutide is a tolerance dose and is not expected to have a significant clinical impact. Transitioning to an MDI insulin regimen would help stabilize blood sugars, minimize hypoglycemia, and provide insulin dosing flexibility. However, Zephyr preferred not to switch insulin to MDI insulin at this time. She stated she will focus on having consistent meals instead. Based on her preference, they adjusted the current insulin regimen to reduce the risk of hypoglycemia. The pharmacist advised her to reduce the insulin aspart protamine/insulin aspart 70/30 morning dose to 20 units, the evening dose to 26 units, and to start semaglutide 0.25 mg weekly.

     

    Visit 2

    At the second visit, Zephyr reported that she could not maintain steady meal times despite her efforts. She initially reduced her insulin doses as requested, but once she realized she couldn’t maintain steady mealtimes, she resumed her previous dosing. Therefore, her current SMBG values closely resemble her last visits' values (Table 7). The pharmacist advised Zephyr to communicate questions, concerns, and changes to the clinic in between appointments moving forward. As Zephyr was unable to maintain steady meal choices, she couldn’t safely remain on mixed insulin due to safety concerns.

     

    Consequently, the pharmacist talked with Zephyr about two options based on her goal to increase the semaglutide dose to 0.5 mg weekly. One option would be to transition to basal/bolus insulin (administered TID or QID), but the patient previously rejected this option. An alternative option (dependent on the patient’s prandial insulin dose) would be to transition the patient to basal-only insulin and eliminate prandial insulin. This option creates a risk of hyperglycemia until the semaglutide doses can be titrated. Thus, periodic clinical assessment of hyperglycemia would be critical. DKA and HHS are a concern with significantly elevated blood sugars. Still, temporary elevations in the high 100s to low 200s may be acceptable if the patient is not safe or willing to take alternate recommended options.

     

    After this review, Zephyr stated she cannot tolerate more than two insulin injections a day. They decided to transition Zephyr to once daily basal insulin and then a bolus insulin with dinner, as that is her largest and most consistent meal of the day. Based on her current regimen, she was injecting 37.8 units of basal insulin and 16.2 units of prandial insulin per day. She could transition to a bolus insulin dose of 4 to 8 units and a basal dose of 34 to 38 units with a goal of a total insulin dose of 42 units per day (~22% reduction from the prior TDD). Eliminating the prandial insulin would be risky. Dependent on Zephyr’s motivation, ability to tolerate semaglutide, and attention to portion sizes and SMBGs, she may do well without any prandial insulin.

     

    Semaglutide does not require set mealtimes or portions for safety. The pharmacist believed that with time, the patient would do well on basal insulin + semaglutide at higher doses, if tolerated. Sometimes, this interim period is the toughest for clinical decision-making.

     

    CASE 4: Sahar Kim–pronouns: they/them/theirs

    Visit 1

    Sahar presented for their first visit, reporting that despite their FBGs being at goal, their A1c has been above goal. The insurance company did not cover their CGM so the pharmacist asked Sahar to test SMBGs more frequently. They sporadically checked, when possible, at the day's beginning or end (Table 8).

     

    They were currently prescribed insulin glargine-yfgn (Semglee), which is a biosimilar to insulin glargine (Lantus), and inject 52 units once daily. The SMBG chart indicates FBGs of 80 to 100 mg/dL, and bedtime values are in the high 100s to low 200s.

     

    Table 8. Sahar Visit 1

    Date acB      HS HS insulin (insulin glargine-yfgn)
    78 198 52
    89 52
    201 52
    123 188 52
    111 52
    52
    97 187 52
    79 52
    210 52
    83 218 52
    98 52
    189 52
    109 52
    186 52
    87 199 52
    Visit 1 98 52
    Average 96 197

     

    PAUSE AND PONDER: What would be the appropriate term for this situation regarding glycemic control/treatment?

     

    Sahar declined an oral medication, as they have trouble swallowing them. They were amenable to an alternate once daily injection, as they would prefer not to have more than one injection daily. Sahar and the pharmacist deemed that an FRC would be the preferred option due to overbasalization and the patient’s preference to minimize injections. After some investigation into insurance coverage and discussion, they determined that iGlarlixi would be reasonable.

     

    The pharmacist started Sahar on 30 units of iGlarlixi daily, which equates to 30 units of insulin glargine and 10 mcg of lixisenatide. Additionally, they were previously injecting at bedtime, but the FDA-approved labeling recommends morning dosing of iGlarlixi.21 Sahar reported that they will not be able to attend the next appointment (intended to be in approximately 2 weeks) or speak on the phone for the next 6 weeks. As they have been reliable and this was a transitional period in their treatment, the pharmacist developed a self-adjustment dosing plan. The pharmacist advised Sahar to increase iGlarlixi by 2 units once a week (up to 42 units daily) for each week that all their FBGS are greater than 130 mg/dL.

     

    Visit 2

    Sahar returned 6 weeks later and indicates that they increased iGlarlixi to 42 units over time based on the guidance the pharmacist provided at the last visit. They denied any ADRs (including hypoglycemia) associated with the FRC. A review of SMBGs shows stabilization between morning and bedtime values, indicating that the bedtime values have come down and the FBGs have increased. Although the FBG average is above 136, the trend shows decreasing FBGs over the last week or so. Through shared decision-making, Sahar and the pharmacist decided to maintain the current dose. The pharmacist expects to see an improvement in the A1c based on this improved PPG control. This is because although FBG and HS readings are being tested for ease, the improvement in HS readings indicates an improvement in PPGs.

     

    TAKEAWAYS

    We’ve reviewed many situations where insulin still plays a significant role in diabetes care. The advent of newer medications and greater coverage and affordability require a balance between new and old therapies to maximize the benefits and minimize the risks of both. Many medications for diabetes or coexisting obesity and diabetes (diabesity) are in the pipeline. This balance of optimal medication management will continue to change as the FDA approves new medications for diabetes.

     

    Patient safety, especially prevention of hypoglycemia, is paramount in insulin dose adjustments, but monitoring and education regarding side effects is a close second. The pharmacist will need to adjust the dose or medication if there is a safety risk. Especially with the positive benefits associated with GLP-1 RAs, some patients may want to tolerate the adverse effects or hope they improve.

     

    While these cases are extrapolated from the ambulatory care perspective, this knowledge can be helpful in a variety of settings. For example, pharmacists can use the principles discussed here for people obtaining their medications in the retail setting or those in the process of being titrated who are then hospitalized.

    Pharmacist Post Test (for viewing only)

    The Art of Insulin Dose Adjustments in the Setting of GLP-1 RAs and GIP/GLP-1 RAs
    Pharmacist Post-test
    25-059 P

    After completing this continuing education activity, pharmacists will be able to:
    1. Describe different types of insulin along with their appropriate use
    2. Recall newer non-insulin medications for diabetes, along with risks vs. benefits
    3. Analyze patient reported data pertaining to insulin + GLP-1 RA and GIP/GLP-1 RA medication adjustments
    4. Demonstrate medication adjustment recommendations while incorporating patient-specific data

    *

    1. Which of the following situations is most appropriate for using mixed insulin?
    A. A patient who intermittently fasts and eats around lunch and dinnertime.
    B. A patient who eats three meals a day and two snacks.
    C. A patient who eats snack size portions throughout the day.

    *

    2. Austin is a 46-year-old patient who is newly diagnosed with type 2 diabetes. Their initial A1c is 11% and they are working through the diabetes self-management education and support (DSMES) classes. They are open to starting insulin to help improve glycemic control in the interim until their lifestyle changes can be implemented. Their current weight is 64 kg or 141 lbs. What would be the best medication option to initiate?
    A. 10 units of insulin glargine daily
    B. 20 units of insulin glargine daily
    C. 10 units of insulin aspart three times daily

    *

    3. Which of the following medications is most likely to cause a yeast infection?
    A. Bexagliflozin
    B. Sitagliptin
    C. Liraglutide

    *

    4. Which of the following is an oral GLP-1 RA?
    A. Semaglutide (Ozempic)
    B. Semaglutide (Rybelsus)
    C. Dulaglutide (Trulicity)

    *

    5. Which combination of medication classes should not be used together?
    A. GLP-1 RA + SGLT-2 inhibitor
    B. GLP-1 RA + DPP-4 inhibitor
    C. Basal insulin + SGLT-2 inhibitor

    *

    6. Which of the following SMBG trends could be described as overbasalization?
    A. FBG: 120s, HS: 150s
    B. FBG: 160s, HS: 180s
    C. FBG: 80s, HS: 160s

    *

    7. Autumn has been taking metformin 1000 mg BID for years and recently her A1c has increased to 8.7%. Her FBGs average 162 and her bedtime values average 210s. She has never used a GLP-1 RA or insulin. Of the options listed which would be the simplest and safest next step for the patient?
    A. IDeglira 10 units daily
    B. Glipizide 10 mg BID
    C. Insulin lispro 10 units TID with meals

    *

    8. August is a 36-year-old patient. He reports he is tolerating the side effects he is experiencing with dulaglutide 3 mg weekly but is not comfortable increasing the dose just yet. He is also taking insulin glargine 32 units daily and his FBGs average 170. Which of the following is the next best step?
    A. Increase the insulin dose
    B. Stop the insulin
    C. Reduce the insulin dose

    *

    9. April is a 59-year-old, 66 kg patient who has had more energy for the day since starting injectable semaglutide. She is currently injecting semaglutide 1 mg weekly and is excited to increase to 2 mg weekly as she has not experienced side effects. She reports that she has enough energy to begin participating in dance class twice a week. She is currently injecting insulin degludec 8 units daily and her FBGs are between 80-100. Which of the following is the next best step?
    A. Increase the insulin dose
    B. Stop the insulin
    C. Reduce the insulin dose

    *

    10. Andrew is a 42-year-old patient who is currently taking insulin glargine 50 units daily and is excited to begin tirzepatide 2.5 mg weekly. His FBGs are in the 140s. The patient will continue the current insulin dose while starting tirzepatide. A few weeks later the patient communicates that his blood sugars have decreased to the 70s and 80s, and he is feeling shaky consistently with these values. What would be the next step be?
    A. Increase the insulin dose
    B. Stop insulin
    C. Reduce the insulin dose

    Pharmacy Technician Post Test (for viewing only)

    The Art of Insulin Dose Adjustments in the Setting of GLP-1 RAs and GIP/GLP-1 RAs
    Pharmacy Technician Post-test
    25-059 T

    After completing this continuing education activity, pharmacy technicians will be able to
    1. Describe different types of insulin along with their appropriate use
    2. Recognize over the counter treatment options for hypoglycemia
    3. Recall newer non-insulin medications for diabetes, along with risks and benefits
    4. Identify when to refer patients with questions about their diabetes medications to the pharmacist

    *

    1. Which of the following is a bolus insulin?
    A. Insulin aspart
    B. Insulin glargine
    C. Insulin aspart protamine/insulin aspart

    *

    2. Which of the following is a mixed insulin?
    A. Insulin lispro
    B. Insulin lispro protamine/insulin lispro
    C. Insulin degludec

    *

    3. Which of the following insulins works at steady levels throughout the day?
    A. Insulin degludec U200
    B. Insulin lispro
    C. Insulin regular U500

    *

    4. Which of the following is an oral GLP-1 RA?
    A. Semaglutide (Ozempic)
    B. Semaglutide (Rybelsus)
    C. Dulaglutide (Trulicity)

    *

    5. How are oral glucose tablets and oral glucose gel categorized as medications?
    A. Prescription
    B. Behind the counter
    C. Over the counter

    *

    6. August comes to the pharmacy to pick up his medications regularly. As a retail pharmacy technician, you’ve noticed that he is purchasing glucose tablets more frequently than before, and he has also had medication changes recently . What would be the next best step?
    A. Mind your own business, it’s their choice to purchase what they would like.
    B. Make the pharmacist aware and ask the patient if they would be open to having a consultation with the pharmacist.
    C. Advise the patient that their medication is causing low blood sugars, and they should stop taking it.

    *

    7. You’re a medication reconciliation technician in a primary care clinic. While reviewing the patient’s medications you see they are taking antibiotics again as they were a couple months prior. With further discussion you learn that they have had multiple urinary tract infections in the last year. Which of the following medications is most likely to cause urinary tract infections?
    A. Bexagliflozin
    B. Sitagliptin
    C. Liraglutide

    *

    8. While working as a retail pharmacy technician and checking out a patient, you notice that they look nauseous. With discussion you learn that the last time they ate was yesterday morning. You see that their tirzepatide dose was increased. What would be the next best step?
    A. Advise the patient to try this new ginger supplement you’ve found to help with the nausea and then check the patient out.
    B. Assume they’ll talk about the medication with their provider, wish them well, provide them with their new prescription, and take the next patient
    C. Ask the pharmacist to complete further assessment because you have concern that the higher dose of tirzepatide warrants review.

    *

    9. You’re a medicine reconciliation technician in the emergency room, and the patient is being evaluated for significant nausea and vomiting. Which of the following medications is associated with these adverse effects?
    A. Ertugliflozin
    B. Semaglutide
    C. Insulin glargine

    *

    10. You’re a retail pharmacy technician, and a patient is picking up a new prescription for dulaglutide 3 mg weekly along with their insulin degludec 56 units daily. They were previously prescribed dulaglutide 1.5 mg weekly and insulin degludec 68 units daily. The patient tells you that they plan on continuing the insulin degludec 68 units daily despite increasing the dulaglutide dose.
    A. Advise the patient that the choice is between them and their doctor.
    B. Check the patient out.
    C. Seek consultation from the pharmacist.

    References

    Full List of References

    1. Van Dril E, Allison M, Schumacher C. Deprescribing in type 2 diabetes and cardiovascular disease: Recommendations for safe and effective initiation of glucagon-like peptide-1 receptor agonists in patients on insulin therapy. Am Heart J Plus. 2022;17:100163. doi:10.1016/j.ahjo.2022.100163
    2. ElSayed NA, McCoy RG, Aleppo G, et al. 2. Diagnosis and Classification of diabetes: Standards of Care in Diabetes—2025. Diabetes Care. 2024;48(Supplement_1):S27-S49. doi:10.2337/dc25-s002
    3. ElSayed NA, McCoy RG, Aleppo G, et al. 6. Glycemic Goals and Hypoglycemia: Standards of Care in Diabetes—2025. Diabetes Care. 2024;48(Supplement_1):S128-S145. doi:10.2337/dc25-s006
    4. ElSayed NA, McCoy RG, Aleppo G, et al. 9. Pharmacologic Approaches to Glycemic Treatment: Standards of Care in Diabetes—2025. Diabetes Care. 2024;48(Supplement_1):S181-S206. doi:10.2337/dc25-s009
    5. Chun J, Strong J, Urquhart S. Insulin Initiation and Titration in Patients With Type 2 Diabetes. Diabetes Spectr. 2019;32(2):104-111. doi:10.2337/ds18-0005
    6. Blonde L, Umpierrez GE, Reddy SS, et al. American Association of Clinical Endocrinology Clinical Practice Guideline: Developing a Diabetes Mellitus Comprehensive Care Plan-2022 Update [published correction appears in Endocr Pract. 2023 Jan;29(1):80-81. doi: 10.1016/j.eprac.2022.12.005.]. Endocr Pract. 2022;28(10):923-1049. doi:10.1016/j.eprac.2022.08.002
    7. Champion M, Wills Avila G, Garcia AE, Álvarez Delgado FM, Valdez CA. Impact of Initiating a GLP1 Agonist and/or SGLT2 Inhibitor Therapy on De-Escalation and Discontinuation of Insulin and Diabetes Control When Managed by an Interprofessional Collaborative Team. J Prim Care Community Health. 2024;15:21501319241231398. doi:10.1177/21501319241231398
    8. Lane W, Weinrib S, Rappaport J, Hale C. The effect of addition of liraglutide to high-dose intensive insulin therapy: a randomized prospective trial. Diabetes Obes Metab. 2014;16(9):827-832. doi:10.1111/dom.12286
    9. Lind M, Hirsch IB, Tuomilehto J, et al. Liraglutide in people treated for type 2 diabetes with multiple daily insulin injections: randomised clinical trial (MDI Liraglutide trial). BMJ. 2015;351:h5364. doi:10.1136/bmj.h5364
    10. Vanderheiden A, Harrison L, Warshauer J, Li X, Adams-Huet B, Lingvay I. Effect of Adding Liraglutide vs Placebo to a High-Dose Insulin Regimen in Patients With Type 2 Diabetes: A Randomized Clinical Trial. JAMA Intern Med. 2016;176(7):939-947. doi:10.1001/jamainternmed.2016.1540
    11. Rodriguez P, Breslaw N, Xiao H, et al. De-intensification of basal-bolus therapy by replacing prandial insulin with once-weekly subcutaneous semaglutide in individuals with well-controlled type 2 diabetes: A single-centre, open-label randomised trial (TRANSITION-T2D). Diabetes Obes Metab. 2025;27(2):642-651. doi:10.1111/dom.16057
    12.Online Xultophy. Novo Nordisk Inc. Accessed June 1, 2025. https://www.novo-pi.com/xultophy10036.pdf
    13. Treatment of low blood sugar (Hypoglycemia). Diabetes. Published May 15, 2024. https://www.cdc.gov/diabetes/treatment/treatment-low-blood-sugar-hypoglycemia.html
    14. Vallon V, Verma S. Effects of SGLT2 Inhibitors on Kidney and Cardiovascular Function. Annu Rev Physiol. 2021;83:503-528. doi:10.1146/annurev-physiol-031620-095920
    15. Latif W, Lambrinos KJ, Patel P, Rodriguez R. Compare and Contrast the Glucagon-Like Peptide-1 Receptor Agonists (GLP1RAs). In: StatPearls. Treasure Island (FL): StatPearls Publishing; February 25, 2024.
    16. Yao H, Zhang A, Li D, et al. Comparative effectiveness of GLP-1 receptor agonists on glycaemic control, body weight, and lipid profile for type 2 diabetes: systematic review and network meta-analysis. BMJ. 2024;384:e076410. doi:10.1136/bmj-2023-076410
    17. Nauck MA, Müller TD. Incretin hormones and type 2 diabetes. Diabetologia. 2023;66(10):1780-1795. doi:10.1007/s00125-023-05956-x
    18. McGill JB, Hirsch IB, Parkin CG, Aleppo G, Levy CJ, Gavin JR 3rd. The Current and Future Role of Insulin Therapy in the Management of Type 2 Diabetes: A Narrative Review. Diabetes Ther. 2024;15(5):1085-1098. doi:10.1007/s13300-024-01569-8
    19. Tramunt B, Disse E, Chevalier N, et al. Initiation of the Fixed Combination IDegLira in Patients with Type 2 Diabetes on Prior Injectable Therapy: Insights from the EASY French Real-World Study. Diabetes Ther. 2022;13(11-12):1947-1963. doi:10.1007/s13300-022-01327-8
    20. Taybani Z, Bótyik B, Katkó M, Gyimesi A, Várkonyi T. Simplifying Complex Insulin Regimens While Preserving Good Glycemic Control in Type 2 Diabetes. Diabetes Ther. 2019;10(5):1869-1878. doi:10.1007/s13300-019-0673-8
    22. Candido R, Nicolucci A, Larosa M, Rossi MC, Napoli R; RESTORE-G (Retrospective analysis on the therapeutic approaches after GLP-1 RA treatment in type 2 diabetes patients) Study Group. Treatment intensification following glucagon-like peptide-1 receptor agonist in type 2 diabetes: Comparative effectiveness analyses between free vs. fixed combination of GLP-1 RA and basal insulin. RESTORE-G real-world study. Nutr Metab Cardiovasc Dis. 2024;34(8):1846-1853. doi:10.1016/j.numecd.2024.03.023
    21. Online Soliqua. Prescribing Information. Sanofi-Aventis U.S. LLC. Accessed June 1, 2025. https://www.accessdata.fda.gov/drugsatfda_docs/label/2016/208673s000lbl.pdf

    SPOTTED: MEASLES CASES RISING IN THE U.S.

    Learning Objectives

     

    After completing this application-based continuing education activity, pharmacists will be able to

    •        Identify the transmission of measles, its symptoms, and patients at higher risk for complications
    •        Describe the steps healthcare providers should take if measles is suspected or confirmed
    •        Determine appropriate patients for measles vaccination
    •        Apply patient counseling techniques regarding vaccine education

    After completing this application-based continuing education activity, pharmacy technicians will be able to

    •        Identify the symptoms of measles, its transmission, and patients at higher risk for complications
    •        Describe the steps healthcare providers should take if measles is suspected or confirmed
    •        Determine which patients might need vaccine education from the pharmacist

       

      Release Date: October 20, 2025

      Expiration Date: October 20, 2028

      Course Fee

      Pharmacists & Technicians:  FREE

      There is no funding for this CE.

      ACPE UANs

      Pharmacist: 0009-0000-25-060-H06-P

      Pharmacy Technician:  0009-0000-25-060-H06-T

      Session Codes

      Pharmacist: 25YC60-BFG57

      Pharmacy Technician: 25YC60-FBG75

      Accreditation Hours

      2.0 hours of CE

      Accreditation Statements

      The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy is accredited by the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education as a provider of continuing pharmacy education.  Statements of credit for the online activity ACPE UAN 0009-0000-25-060-H06-P/T will be awarded when the post test and evaluation have been completed and passed with a 70% or better. Your CE credits will be uploaded to your CPE monitor profile within 2 weeks of completion of the program.

       

      Disclosure of Discussions of Off-label and Investigational Drug Use

      The material presented here does not necessarily reflect the views of The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy or its co-sponsor affiliates. These materials may discuss uses and dosages for therapeutic products, processes, procedures and inferred diagnoses that have not been approved by the United States Food and Drug Administration. A qualified health care professional should be consulted before using any therapeutic product discussed. All readers and continuing education participants should verify all information and data before treating patients or employing any therapies described in this continuing education activity.

      Faculty

      Monica Holmberg, PharmD, BCPS
      Medical Writer
      Phoenix, AZ

       

      Faculty Disclosure

      In accordance with the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education (ACPE) Criteria for Quality and Interpretive Guidelines, The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy requires that faculty disclose any relationship that the faculty may have with commercial entities whose products or services may be mentioned in the activity.

      Monica Holmberg has no relationships with ineligible companies.

       

      ABSTRACT

      Measles is a vaccine preventable disease, and yet its prevalence is rising. Shortly after the United States declared measles “eliminated” in 2000, measles vaccination rates began to drop. Reasons for decreased vaccination include misinformation regarding an association between measles vaccine and autism and interruption in routine care during the COVID-19 pandemic. As a result, measles cases continue to rise in unvaccinated patients. Post-exposure prophylaxis with a measles-containing vaccine or immunoglobulin may benefit some patients. Treatment for acute measles is mainly limited to supportive care and supplementation with vitamin A. Prevention with appropriate vaccination is the best method for minimizing the spread of measles. Vaccine hesitancy occurs worldwide and creates a challenge for obtaining adequate community vaccination rates for measles control. The pharmacy team can address vaccine hesitancy with education and empathy.

      CONTENT

      Content

      INTRODUCTION

      Measles is an extremely contagious viral illness caused by an enveloped RNA virus of the genus Morbillivirus and family Paramyxoviridae.1,2 Once a routine childhood disease, the development and consistent administration of a measles vaccine effectually eliminated measles in the United States (U.S.). Recent falling vaccination rates have led to the reemergence of measles.3

       

      Consider the following case: a man, Mike, and a toddler in a stroller, whose name is Bella, approach the pharmacy counter. He was shopping for nacho cheese flavored tortilla chips and saw the sign offering immunizations, which reminded him of his daughter’s recent well care visit. The pediatrician recommended routine vaccination with the measles, mumps and rubella vaccine, but Mike declined. He asks the pharmacist, someone he knows well and trusts, if the vaccine is necessary. Mike was under the impression there were no active measles cases in the U.S. Are there?

       

      PREVALENCE

      Prior to the availability of measles vaccine, almost everyone contracted measles during childhood. Approximately 90% of individuals obtained post-infection immunity by age 15.3,4

       

      The Vaccination Assistance Act provided federal funding to state and local agencies for childhood immunizations beginning in 1962.5 In 1963, two measles vaccines became available in the U.S.: a single dose of a live attenuated vaccine or three once-monthly doses of an inactivated vaccine.6 The inactivated vaccine was eventually discontinued in 1967 because it was less effective than the live vaccine.6,7 By mid-1967, the reported number of measles cases had decreased from 1000 to 200 weekly.5

       

      An increase in measles cases occurred from 1989 to 1991 due to decreased vaccination rates in young children and a rise in cases in individuals who had received only one dose of a measles vaccine. Increased vaccination awareness and rates in young children alongside the addition of a routine second dose of measles vaccine resulted in a major reduction in measles cases. The U.S. declared measles “eliminated” in 2000.1

       

      PAUSE AND PONDER: What factors influence vaccination rates?

       

      Since then, vaccine hesitancy due to misinformation regarding adverse effects and an incorrect association with autism has fueled decreasing vaccination rates. Other causes of declining measles vaccinations include missed routine vaccines during the COVID-19 pandemic and community complacency with measles’ severity and its complications. The resulting unvaccinated children are susceptible to the infection and its spread, thus propelling its resurgence.2,5

       

      As of August 2025 in the U.S., 41 states had reported 1,356 confirmed cases of measles since January of that year. Most cases occurred in unvaccinated patients8:

      • 92% were unvaccinated individuals or in people with unknown vaccination status
      • 4% had received only one dose of MMR
      • 4% had received two doses MMR.

      Among these cases, 13% were hospitalized, and three cases resulted in death.8

       

      A measles outbreak is defined as three or more related cases. From January to August 2025, the U.S. experienced 32 outbreaks, with 87% of confirmed cases related to these outbreaks. In 2024, 16 outbreaks were reported and 69% of measles cases were related to outbreaks.8

       

      Reflecting on our case, the pharmacist explains to Mike that domestic cases are rising due to declining vaccination rates worldwide, and that vaccination offers the best protection available.

       

      TRANSMISSION AND SYMPTOMS

      Transmission of measles occurs by direct contact or airborne spread through respiratory droplets and aerosols, which can stay airborne for up to two hours in enclosed areas.1,5,7 About 90% of non-immune people who are exposed to the measles virus will become infected.7

       

      The physical manifestation of measles infection begins 11 to 12 days after exposure with a prodrome of malaise, cough, coryza (runny nose and nasal congestion), and conjunctivitis.3 Approximately 50% to 70% of patients also develop Koplik spots, which are small white or grey papules in the mouth, during the prodrome phase.5

       

      After two to four days, a red, macropapular rash (a flat, red area on the skin that is covered with small bumps that may merge together) occurs, usually on the face or hairline.3,9 The rash progresses to the trunk, and then to the lower extremities.3 Patients with uncomplicated measles usually improve by the third day after the rash began, and most cases resolve within seven to 10 days. Patients are contagious from four days before until four days after the onset of the rash.9

       

      COMPLICATIONS

      Complications of measles include diarrhea, dehydration, pneumonia, encephalitis, and death.3 For every thousand cases of measles, one case may lead to encephalitis and two to three cases may lead to death. Measles-related deaths are typically due to respiratory and neurologic complications.1,3

       

      Rare complications of measles include measles inclusion body encephalitis (MIBE) and subacute sclerosing panencephalitis (SSPE). MIBE usually occurs in immunocompromised patients within one year of infection and is characterized by neurologic dysfunction, such as altered level of consciousness, seizures, loss of speech, one-sided paralysis, and lack of coordinated movements. MIBE has a mortality rate of 75%.1,10 SSPE is a degenerative central nervous system disease that results neurological decline and seizures. It usually develops seven to 11 years after infection, and it occurs most frequently in children infected with measles before age 2.1

       

      Patients at higher risk for measles infection are unvaccinated or incompletely vaccinated, have had exposure to measles, or have traveled to areas with active measles.8

       

      Severe cases of measles may require hospitalization.3 Patients who are younger than 5 or older than 20, pregnant, or immunocompromised are at the greatest risk for severe measles infections or complications.8

       

      Back to our case: Mike asks if there is medicine Bella can take to speed up her recovery if she catches measles, rather than prophylaxis with a vaccine.

       

      POST-EXPOSURE MANAGEMENT

      Confirmation of Diagnosis

      The diagnosis of measles is confirmed through laboratory findings. Positive serology for measles IgM antibodies, significant increase in IgG antibody levels, and cell culture of the measles virus can be assessed through blood assays. Evidence of measles RNA by reverse transcription polymerase chain reaction can be assessed through nasal, throat, or nasopharyngeal swab or a urine sample.5,11 Healthcare providers should obtain both a serum sample and a nasopharyngeal or throat swab or urine sample for all patients with clinical symptoms of measles.1,11 Just looking at the patient’s rash is not sufficient for diagnosis. Laboratory evidence is crucial because clinicians may incorrectly diagnose or report other febrile illnesses with rash as measles.5

       

      Reporting to Health Department

      Because measles has a significant impact on public health, it is a nationally notifiable disease. The purpose of national notification is to assess the incidence and spread of measles, with the goal of controlling outbreaks. Healthcare providers, laboratories, and hospitals should report confirmed cases of measles to local health departments. Each state has its own guidelines and requirements for reporting. The states report suspected and confirmed measles cases to the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) using the National Notifiable Diseases Surveillance System.12,13

       

      Post-Exposure Prophylaxis

      Post-exposure prophylaxis (PEP) with measles, mumps and rubella vaccine (MMR) or immunoglobin in unvaccinated or partially vaccinated people may offer some protection against the disease, allowing for milder symptoms and a briefer course of illness.9 MMR should be administered within 72 hours of exposure.

       

      Patients who are ineligible for MMR (age less than 6 months, severely immunocompromised, or pregnant) and patients ages 6 to 11 months who did not receive MMR within the initial 72 hours can receive immunoglobulin within 6 days of exposure. Patients younger than 12 months of age can receive intramuscular immunoglobulin 0.5 mL/kg of body weight, with a maximum dose of 15 mL. Patients who are severely immunocompromised, pregnant, or weigh more than 30 kg can receive intravenous immunoglobulin 400 mg/kg.1

       

      Patients should not receive both immunoglobulin and MMR because the immunoglobulin will decrease the vaccine’s efficacy.14 Patients without immunity who receive immunoglobulin should be given MMR or MMRV (MMR with a varicella component) at least 6 months after intramuscular immunoglobulin and 8 months after intravenous immunoglobulin.

       

      Patients with documented immunity do not need PEP.1

       

      Treatment of Measles

      Treatment of measles is mainly limited to supportive care. Caregivers can give acetaminophen, ibuprofen, or intravenous fluids if needed for symptom control.15 Additionally, patients should isolate for four days after the rash appears to minimize the transmission of measles.16

       

      No antivirals are currently approved by the Food and Drug Administration for the treatment of measles. Although the measles virus displays in vitro susceptibility to riboviran, this has not been studied in clinical trials and is not indicated for the treatment of measles.1

       

      Treatment with vitamin A is an option for pediatric patients with measles. Vitamin A deficiency during measles infection has been linked with increased disease severity, additional complications, and prolonged recovery.15 Administration of vitamin A in children with measles in low- and middle-income countries has been connected to decreased morbidity and mortality.1 Although vitamin A deficiency is not as prevalent in higher income countries, infection with measles can reduce vitamin A stores.15 Given the benefit of vitamin A supplementation, the World Health Organization (WHO) recommends treatment with vitamin A for all children (not adults) with severe measles that requires hospitalization.1,15

       

      Vitamin A is given once daily for two days, as described in Table 1. Additionally, a third dose of vitamin A should be given two to six weeks after the initial dose for children with signs and symptoms of vitamin A deficiency.1

       

      Table 1. Vitamin A Dosing1,15,17
      Age of child Dose: International Units (IU) Dose: retinol activity equivalent (RAE)*
      12 months or older 200,000 60,000
      6 to 11 months 100,000 30,000
      Under 6 months 50,000 15,000
      *Research at the turn of the Century found that provitamin-A carotenoid absorption is only half as much as previously believed. Consequently, the U.S. Institute of Medicine recommended a new unit, the retinol activity equivalent (RAE) in 2001. Each mcg RAE corresponds to 1 mcg retinol, 2 mcg of β-carotene in oil, 12 mcg of "dietary" β-carotene, or 24 mcg of the three other dietary provitamin-A carotenoids.

       

      Revisiting our case: the pharmacist explains to Mike that although treatment with vitamin A is an option that may ease severity and promote recovery, it will not treat the infection. Mike now shares that Bella received a single dose of MMR five months ago (at age 10 months) before a trip to Europe for his sister’s wedding. He is wondering why she would need to be vaccinated again. Doesn’t that dose offer protection?

       

      VACCINE RECOMMENDATIONS

      To be considered immune to measles, patients must have documented administration of an age-appropriate live measles containing vaccine, laboratory confirmation of either immunity or disease, or birth prior to 1957.3 Individuals born before 1957 are assumed to be immune to measles due to childhood exposure, as most people developed immunity through infection with the virus before the availability of the vaccine.5

       

      Vaccination is key to measles prevention and control. Both the CDC and the American Academy of Pediatrics recommend routine vaccination with either MMR or MMRV.1,3 Table 2 provides additional information regarding current vaccines options.

       

      Table 2. Measles Vaccines Available in the United States1,18-20
      Brand name Manufacturer Active ingredients Age of administration Administration
      M-M-R II Merck measles, mumps, and rubella vaccine, live

      (MMR)

      12 months and older* 0.5 ml subcutaneously or intramuscularly
      Priorix GlaxoSmithKline measles, mumps, and rubella vaccine, live

      (MMR)

      12 months and older* 0.5 ml subcutaneously
      ProQuad Merck measles, mumps, rubella, and varicella vaccine, live

      (MMRV)

      12 months to 12 years 0.5 ml subcutaneously or intramuscularly
      *May be administered at ages 6 to 11 months for international travel, community outbreak, or post-exposure prophylaxis

       

      The first dose is usually given between 12 and 15 months of age, and the second dose is usually given between ages 4 and 6 years. The second dose may be given earlier, at least 28 days after the first dose for MMR and 90 days for MMRV, during a community outbreak of measles, before international travel, or to individuals who did not receive the vaccine during the recommended ages for administration. The MMRV vaccine should not be given to children younger than 1 year.1,21

       

      The CDC recommends that MMR and varicella vaccines are given separately when administered as the first dose for children aged 12 to 47 months, unless the parent or caregiver prefers MMRV. Clinicians usually prefer MMRV as the second dose in children age 15 months to 12 years and for both doses in unvaccinated children age 48 months and older. The SIDEBAR explains this further.

       

      At the time of this writing, the CDC Advisory Committee on Immunization Practices (ACIP) recommends that MMR and varicella vaccine be administrated separately until age 4. This is a change from the current recommendation to administer MMRV for the second dose in children 15 months and older. The ACIP recommendation is still pending approval from the CDC acting director and is not yet official.22

       

      SIDEBAR: How to choose MMR vs. MMRV23

      Piper, age 4, and her brother Oliver, age 12 months, are both due for measles and varicella vaccines. Piper received separate MMR and varicella vaccines when she was 1 year old. Their mom, Barbara, would like to minimize injections for each child. She asks if they can each receive MMRV to limit their shots today.

       

      Although MMRV is indicated for children ages 12 months to 12 years, it has been associated with an increased risk of fever and febrile seizure when given as the first dose to children ages 12 to 47 months of age. Experts encourage healthcare providers to counsel parents and caregivers of children in this age group regarding the risks and benefits of MMRV vaccination. MMRV may be administered if the parent or caregiver prefers; however, the CDC recommends that MMR and varicella vaccines are given separately for the first dose in this age range.

       

      Approximately 15% of children aged 12 to 47 months who receive MMR and varicella vaccines separately will experience post-vaccination fever (102°F or higher up to 42 days after vaccination), compared with 22% who receive MMRV. Administering the vaccines separately in this age group also decreases the febrile seizure risk by half: four of 10,000 children experience febrile seizure five to 12 days after vaccination with MMR and varicella separately, as compared to eight of 10,000 with MMRV.

       

      For children aged 48 months and older, the risk of fever or febrile seizure with the first dose of MMRV declines and is similar to the risk when MMR and varicella vaccine are administered separately. The risk also decreases in all age groups when MMRV is administered as the second dose. Clinicians usually prefer MMRV for both doses in children aged 48 months and older and for the second dose in children ages 15 months to 12 years.

       

      MMR and varicella vaccine should be administered separately for children with a personal or family history of seizures because they are at increased risk of febrile seizure after MMRV vaccination.

       

      The pharmacist discusses the risks and benefits with Barbara, explaining that Piper received MMR and varicella vaccines separately at age 1 to reduce the risk of fever and febrile seizure. Because Piper is 4, she is an excellent candidate for MMRV. Barbara confirms that neither Oliver nor anyone in his family has a history of seizures. The pharmacist discusses the risks of MMRV at Oliver’s age (increased risk of fever and febrile seizures) and benefits (one injection rather than two). Barbara weighs the information presented to her and decides to follow the CDC recommendation of vaccinating Oliver with separate vaccines today, but will plan for MMRV for his second dose at age 4.

       

      Before Barbara leaves, she pauses at the pharmacy counter. She asks about her niece, Lucy, who is 4 and unvaccinated. She wonders if Lucy is eligible for MMRV vaccination, and if consolidating shots might encourage Lucy’s mom to consider vaccination.

       

      The pharmacist confirms that MMRV is appropriate for Lucy based on her age and vaccination status. Children aged 4 and older have not demonstrated an increased incidence of fever and febrile seizure when MMRV is administered as either the first or second dose. A decreased risk of adverse events and administration of a single injection rather than two with each dose may be preferable to Lucy and her parent. The pharmacist offers to contact Lucy’s mom and discuss vaccination options with her, explaining that Lucy could receive the first dose of MMRV now and the second dose in 90 days.

       

      The MMR vaccine may be given to children ages 6 to 11 months if a community outbreak occurs or if the child is traveling internationally. For optimal efficacy, clinicians should give the vaccine at least two weeks before travel. It is important to note that a dose given before age 1 does not count towards completing the immunization series; a total of two doses are required to be administered after age 1, and doses given at ages 12 to 15 months and 4 to 6 years are still recommended.1

       

      Reflecting back on our case: the pharmacist explains to Mike that Bella needs two doses after age 1 to ensure immunity to measles. Although Bella received a dose prior to international travel, she was younger than 12 months old, and it does not count towards completing the series.

       

      PAUSE AND PONDER: Who else would benefit from measles vaccinations?

       

      Although the guidelines are age based for routine administration, some patients may fall outside these parameters. Adults and older children, such as those in high school or college, who received a single dose after 12 months of age should receive a second dose, regardless of their current age.1

       

      Other populations that should receive two doses of MMR, at least 28 days apart, include

      • Students without immunity at educational institutions after high school, such as college or university
      • International travelers without immunity
      • Healthcare workers without immunity
      • Healthcare workers born prior to 1957 without laboratory confirmation of immunity
      • Close contacts of immunocompromised individuals who do not have documented immunity
      • Individuals older than 12 months of age with human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) infection without immunosuppression and without immunity

       

      An additional one to two doses of MMR may be required for 21

      • Recipients of the inactivated measles vaccine between 1963 and 1967
      • Individuals at risk during an outbreak as determined by a health department

       

      People who should not receive MMR or MMRV are individuals with18-20

      • Hypersensitivity to any component of a measles-containing vaccine
      • Immunodeficiency or immunosuppression due to disease or medical therapy
      • Pregnancy or those who plan to become pregnant within a month
      • Active febrile illness with fever greater than 101.3°F (38.5°C) (M-M-R II and ProQuad)
      • Active tuberculosis in those who are not receiving treatment (M-M-R II and ProQuad)

         

        Patients who may be at greater risk for a experiencing a serious adverse reaction or having a less robust immune response after vaccination are those with21

        • Acute illness, with or without fever
        • Use of blood product containing antibodies within the past 11 months
        • Thrombocytopenia or thrombocytopenic purpura
        • Indication for tuberculin skin testing or interferon gamma release assay testing
        • Seizures, either personal or family history

         

        Back to the dad in our case: he’s still hesitant. He feels that his daughter has had so many vaccines already. And he’s read online that vaccines aren’t always safe. He wonders aloud if it is it really worth the risk?

         

        VACCINE HESITANCY

        Vaccine hesitancy (VH) is complicated and multifactorial. It is formed by social, cultural, political, and personal elements.24,25 The WHO defines VH as a “delay in acceptance or refusal of vaccines despite availability of vaccination services.”26 Examples include delaying vaccines, limiting the number of vaccines administered at the same time, avoiding specific vaccines, and omitting all vaccines completely.27 Some VH individuals believe that natural immunity (immunity resulting from infection) is more beneficial to the immune system than vaccine-induced immunity. While both routes provide immunity, the risks of vaccination are usually lower than the potential complications or consequences of acquiring the infection.25,28 VH is not clear cut; VH is a spectrum that encompasses a range of beliefs, attitudes, and actions.

         

        PAUSE AND PONDER: How can pharmacy teams effectively address VH?

         

        The 3 C model describes vaccine hesitancy as a result of decreased confidence, increased complacency, and decreased convenience. Table 3 describes the components of the 3 C Model of vaccine hesitancy.29

         

        Table 3. The 3 C Model of Vaccine Hesitancy29,30
        Confidence Patient trust regarding

        •   The safety and effectiveness of vaccines

        •   The healthcare system providing vaccines

        •   The motivation of policymakers who determine vaccine guidelines

        Complacency •   The risks of vaccine preventable diseases are believed to be low

        •   May occur when the disease being prevented is no longer prevalent

        Convenience Ease in obtaining vaccination, influenced by

        •   Availability

        •   Affordability

        •   Accessibility

        •   Literacy

        •   Immunization services

        •   Comfort

         

         

        Healthcare providers might assume VH is a fairly new development, resulting from and driven by the Internet and social media. While it is true that social media often propagates vaccine misinformation, VH was first recognized more than 200 years ago with the administration of smallpox inoculation. VH evolved further in the late 1800s when smallpox vaccination requirements led to the adoption of personal belief exemption. Personal belief exemption, which is the practice of omitting a vaccination based on individual convictions, continued to gain popularity as more vaccines became available.24

         

        Sources for vaccine information abound, including healthcare providers, the Internet, social media, word of mouth, and traditional media.27 Pharmacists are strong resources to answer vaccine questions and concerns because people view pharmacists as trusted and accessible. This position of responsibiliy allows pharmacists to help patients navigate the abundance of information—and misinformation—available.31

         

        Traditionally, healthcare providers tackled individual VH through fact-based education to correct misinformation. However, a well-rounded approach focusing on individual beliefs in addition to evidence-based facts may be more effective in encouraging vaccine adoption.31

         

        An option for addressing VH is the ASPIRE framework. This method helps pharmacists interact with patients regarding vaccination beyond basic education. It encourages pharmacists to actively engage with patients to establish trust and address their specific concerns.31

         

        The ASPIRE framework consists of the following actions31:

        • Assume that people want to be vaccinated and be prepared for questions
        • Share key facts and information sources to counter misinformation
        • Present strong recommendations to vaccinate and stories about vaccination experiences
        • Initiate discussion or address questions about adverse effects proactively and share credible information sources
        • Respond to questions and listen actively
        • Empathize and understand concerns

         

        In our case, the pharmacist recognizes Mike’s concern but assures him that misinformation is rampant. The pharmacist explains with empathy that measles vaccine is both safe and effective, and that exposure to the disease often carries severe complications. The pharmacist offers to vaccinate today. Mike decides to think it over while he shops for snacks. The pharmacist will continue to offer the vaccination every time Mike and Bella visit the pharmacy.

         

        CONCLUSION

        Measles is no longer a disease of the past. The recent uptick in cases is directly related to declining vaccination rates. Unvaccinated individuals are at risk for infection and complications, which may be severe. People without immunity may also transmit the disease to other unvaccinated individuals, perpetuating the cycle. Healthcare providers, laboratories, and hospitals should confirm suspected cases of measles with laboratory findings and report to the appropriate local health department. While supportive care may offer symptom control, prevention is key to measles control; both the MMR and MMRV vaccine are safe, effective, and available. Active and empathetic counseling techniques can help pharmacists build vaccine confidence and adoption.

         

         

        Pharmacist Post Test (for viewing only)

        SPOTTED: MEASLES CASES RISING IN THE U.S.
        25-060 P
        Pharmacist post-test

        Pharmacist Learning Objectives
        After completing this continuing education activity, pharmacists will be able to
        • Identify the transmission of measles, its symptoms, and patients at higher risk for complications
        • Describe the steps healthcare providers should take if measles is suspected or confirmed
        • Determine appropriate patients for measles vaccination
        • Apply patient counseling techniques regarding vaccine education

        1. How long is a patient with measles contagious?
        A. 2 days before until 2 days after rash appears
        B. 4 days before until 4 days after rash appears
        C. 6 days before until 6 days after rash appears

        *

        2. Which individual is at greatest risk for developing complications from measles?
        A. A 2-year-old child
        B. A 6-year-old child
        C. A 15-year-old adolescent

        *

        3. A 48-year-old woman with unknown vaccination status is exposed to measles. She is not pregnant or severely immunocompromised. Which of the following may be administered within 72 hours to minimize symptoms and hasten recovery?
        A. Immunoglobulin
        B. Vitamin A
        C. MMR

        *

        4. The patient from the previous question does not obtain the first line agent during the 72-hour window. What is her next option?
        A. Immunoglobulin
        B. Vitamin A
        C. MMR

        *

        5. An 18-year-old college student approaches the pharmacy counter to ask about MMR vaccination. He is preparing to begin his freshman year in a dorm, but he can’t find his childhood immunization records. He does not have the financial resources to obtain laboratory confirmation of immunity. What should the pharmacist tell him?
        A. Administration of MMR at age 18 is fine if his immunity status is unknown
        B. Administration of MMR at age 18 is not appropriate because he is too old
        C. The student should keep looking; his records must be somewhere

        *

        6. A man without measles immunity is preparing to travel outside the U.S. His flight departs in 12 weeks. The pharmacist administers MMR today. When should the second dose be administered?
        A. Only 1 dose should be administered prior to travel
        B. After 28 days
        C. After 90 days

        *

        7. An 11-month-old child presents with her parent at the pharmacy for measles vaccination due to a community outbreak. The parent is willing to vaccinate and prefers MMRV so that the child is also protected from varicella. What should the pharmacist tell the parent?
        A. No problem, MMRV can be administered today with no problem
        B. MMRV should not be administered because measles vaccination due to an outbreak is not appropriate for a child less than 12 months old
        C. MMRV should not be administered because the child is too young, however, MMR is appropriate for a community outbreak and may be administered today

        *

        8. A patient is overheard saying that exposure to infections is more beneficial than vaccinations. He says his grandchildren are unnecessarily exposed to “who knows what” in their vaccines and they would be better off just contracting the disease.
        How could the pharmacist address his vaccine hesitancy?

        A. Give him educational material regarding vaccine safety and effectiveness
        B. Actively listen to his concerns and engage with empathy and education
        C. Ignore him; he will never change his mind

        Pharmacy Technician Post Test (for viewing only)

        SPOTTED: MEASLES CASES RISING IN THE U.S.
        25-060 T
        Pharmacy technician post-test

        Pharmacy Technician Learning Objectives
        After completing this continuing education activity, pharmacy technicians will be able to
        • Identify the symptoms of measles, its transmission, and patients at higher risk for complications
        • Describe the steps healthcare providers should take if measles is suspected or confirmed
        • Determine which patients might need vaccine education from the pharmacist

        1. When was the first measles vaccine available in the U.S.?
        A. 1962
        B. 1963
        C. 1967

        *

        2. Which individual is at greatest risk for developing complications from measles?
        A. A 2-year-old child
        B. A 6-year-old child
        C. A 15-year-old adolescent

        *

        3. When does the rash from measles appear?
        A. Immediately after exposure
        B. 2 to 4 days after exposure
        C. 11 to 12 days after exposure

        *

        4. How long should a patient isolate after the rash appears?
        A. 2 days
        B. 4 days
        C. 6 days

        *

        5. Which organization collects and analyzes the measles data from local health departments?
        A. The American Academy of Pediatrics
        B. The World Health Organization
        C. National Notifiable Diseases Surveillance System

        *

        6. A patient asks where he can find vitamin A supplements. He heard that it is good for measles and wants to take some just in case he is exposed. How should the technician address this?
        A. Direct him towards the aisle of supplements; good news, vitamins are on sale this week
        B. Refer him to the pharmacist for education regarding measles treatment and supportive care
        C. Ask him if he’s had a fever or rash recently

        *

        7. Which individual would be most likely to benefit from MMR/MMRV education?
        A. 80-year-old woman purchasing acetaminophen
        B. 75-year-old man picking up his prescription for lisinopril
        C. Parent picking up amoxicillin for a 4-year old’s ear infection

        *

        8. A patient at the pharmacy counter is complaining about routine vaccinations. He tells another patient that vaccines are a conspiracy, and he will never vaccinate his children. How could this be addressed?
        A. Pharmacy staff should discretely attach educational vaccine information to his receipt
        B. It should be ignored; there is no point in arguing
        C. Engaging with empathy and education may be effective

        References

        Full List of References

        References

           
          1. Kimberlin DW, Banerjee R, Barnett E, Lynfield R, Sawyer M. Measles in Red Book: 2024–2027 Report of the Committee on Infectious Diseases. 33rd ed. American Academy of Pediatrics; 2024. Accessed August 29, 2025. https://doi.org/10.1542/9781610027373-S3_012_002

          2. Moss WJ, Griffin DE. What's going on with measles?. J Virol. 2024;98(8):e0075824. doi:10.1128/jvi.00758-24

          3. Manual for the Surveillance of Vaccine-Preventable Diseases. Chapter 7: Measles. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Accessed August 12, 2025. https://www.cdc.gov/surv-manual/php/table-of-contents/chapter-7-measles.html

          4. Measles Vaccine. American Academy of Pediatrics. Accessed August 17, 2025. https://www.aap.org/en/patient-care/measles/measles-vaccine/?_gl=1*uk5qr9*_ga*MzgyNDg1Njk2LjE3NTUwMjgxOTY.*_ga_FD9D3XZVQQ*czE3NTUwMjgxOTUkbzEkZzEkdDE3NTUwMjgyNjYkajU3JGwwJGgw

          5. Parums DV. A Review of the Resurgence of Measles, a Vaccine-Preventable Disease, as Current Concerns Contrast with Past Hopes for Measles Elimination. Med Sci Monit. 2024;30:e944436. Published 2024 Mar 13. doi:10.12659/MSM.944436

          6. Hendriks J, Blume S. Measles vaccination before the measles-mumps-rubella vaccine. Am J Public Health. 2013;103(8):1393-1401. doi:10.2105/AJPH.2012.301075

          7. Gastanaduy P, Haber P, Rota P, Patel M. Chapter 13: Measles. Centers for Disease Control Epidemiology and Prevention of Vaccine-Preventable Diseases. Accessed August 19, 2025. https://www.cdc.gov/pinkbook/hcp/table-of-contents/chapter-13-measles.html

          8. Red Book Online Outbreaks: Measles. American Academy of Pediatrics. Accessed August 12, 2025. https://publications.aap.org/redbook/resources/15187/Red-Book-Online-Outbreaks-Measles?autologincheck=redirected

          9. Measles vaccines: WHO position paper – April 2017. World Health Organization Weekly epidemiological record. 2017;(92):205–228. Accessed August 28, 2025. https://www.who.int/publications/i/item/who-wer9217-205-227

          10. Diwan MN, Samad S, Mushtaq R, et al. Measles Induced Encephalitis: Recent Interventions to Overcome the Obstacles Encountered in the Management Amidst the COVID-19 Pandemic. Diseases. 2022;10(4):104. Published 2022 Nov 17. doi:10.3390/diseases10040104

          11. Laboratory Testing for Measles. Centers for Disease Control: Measles. Accessed September 16, 2025. https://www.cdc.gov/measles/php/laboratories/index.html

          12. Measles: for public health professionals. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Accessed August 15, 2025. https://www.cdc.gov/measles/php/guidance/index.html

          13. National Notifiable Diseases Surveillance System. Centers for Disease Control. Accessed September 7, 2025. https://www.cdc.gov/nndss/docs/NNDSS-Overview-Fact-Sheet-508.pdf

          14. Measles Vaccine Recommendations: Information for Healthcare Professionals. Centers for Disease Control. Accessed September 11, 2025. https://www.cdc.gov/measles/hcp/vaccine-considerations/index.html#cdc_generic_section_5-post-exposure-prophylaxis-for-measles

          15. Call to Action: Vitamin A for the Management of Measles in the United States. National Foundation for Infectious Diseases. Accessed August 15, 2025. https://www.nfid.org/wp-content/uploads/2023/04/Call-to-Action-Vitamin-A-for-the-Management-of-Measles-in-the-US-FINAL.pdf

          16. Clinical Overview of Measles. Centers for Disease Control. Accessed August 27, 2025. https://www.cdc.gov/measles/hcp/clinical-overview/index.html

          17. Institute of Medicine (US) Panel on Micronutrients. Dietary Reference Intakes for Vitamin A, Vitamin K, Arsenic, Boron, Chromium, Copper, Iodine, Iron, Manganese, Molybdenum, Nickel, Silicon, Vanadium, and Zinc. Washington (DC): National Academies Press (US); 2001. Accessed September 19, 2025. https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK222310/ doi: 10.17226/10026

          18. M-M-R II. Prescribing information. Merck & Co., Inc.; 1978-2024. Accessed August 15, 2025.https://www.merck.com/product/usa/pi_circulars/m/mmr_ii/mmr_ii_pi.pdf

          19. Priorix. Prescribing information. GlaxoSmithKline; 2024. Accessed August 15, 2025. Available at https://gskpro.com/content/dam/global/hcpportal/en_US/Prescribing_Information/Priorix/pdf/PRIORIX.PDF

          20. ProQuad. Prescribing information. Merck & Co., Inc.; 2005-2024. Accessed August 15, 2025. https://www.merck.com/product/usa/pi_circulars/p/proquad/proquad_pi.pdf

          21. Routine Measles, Mumps, and Rubella Vaccination. Centers for Disease Control. Accessed August 12, 2025. https://www.cdc.gov/vaccines/vpd/mmr/hcp/recommendations.html

          22. ACIP Recommends Standalone Chickenpox Vaccination in Toddlers. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. Accessed September 19, 2025. https://www.hhs.gov/press-room/acip-recommends-chickenpox-vaccine-for-toddlers.html
          23. MMR & Varicella Vaccines or MMRV Vaccine: Discussing Options with Parents. Centers for Disease Control: Vaccines and Immunizations. Accessed September 9, 2025. https://www.cdc.gov/vaccines/vpd/mmr/hcp/vacopt-factsheet-hcp.html

          24. Galagali PM, Kinikar AA, Kumar VS. Vaccine Hesitancy: Obstacles and Challenges. Curr Pediatr Rep. 2022;10(4):241-248. doi:10.1007/s40124-022-00278-9

          25. Dubé E, Laberge C, Guay M, Bramadat P, Roy R, Bettinger J. Vaccine hesitancy: an overview. Hum Vaccin Immunother. 2013;9(8):1763-1773. doi:10.4161/hv.24657

          26. World Health Organization. Summary WHO SAGE conclusions and recommendations on vaccine hesitancy. 2015. Accessed August 18, 2025. https://cdn.who.int/media/docs/default-source/immunization/demand/summary-of-sage-vaccinehesitancy-en.pdf

          27. Novilla MLB, Goates MC, Redelfs AH, et al. Why Parents Say No to Having Their Children Vaccinated against Measles: A Systematic Review of the Social Determinants of Parental Perceptions on MMR Vaccine Hesitancy. Vaccines (Basel). 2023;11(5):926. Published 2023 May 2. doi:10.3390/vaccines11050926

          28. Biggs AT, Littlejohn LF. Vaccination and natural immunity: Advantages and risks as a matter of public health policy. Lancet Reg Health Am. 2022;8:100242. doi:10.1016/j.lana.2022.100242

          29. Houle SKD, Andrew MK. RSV vaccination in older adults: Addressing vaccine hesitancy using the 3C model. Can Pharm J (Ott). 2023;157(1):39-44. Published 2023 Nov 24. doi:10.1177/17151635231210879

          30. MacDonald NE, SAGE Working Group on Vaccine Hesitancy Vaccine hesitancy: definition, scope and determinants. Vaccine. 2015;33(34):4161–4164. doi: 10.1016/j.vaccine.2015.04.036

          31. Shen AK, Tan ASL. Trust, influence, and community: Why pharmacists and pharmacies are central for addressing vaccine hesitancy. J Am Pharm Assoc (2003). 2022;62(1):305-308. doi:10.1016/j.japh.2021.10.

          Henry A. Palmer CE Finale, LIVE December 19, 2025

          Henry A. Palmer CE Finale, named for beloved professor and mentor, Dr. Henry A. Palmer, is a continuing education program offered at the end of each calendar year. Held during December, the program helps pharmacists fulfill their last-minute CE requirements. The program is an ala carte program offering a variety of presentations covering contemporary issues in pharmacy practice/therapeutics. Pharmacists may enroll in one or more [up to 8] hours of continuing education.

          Doppelgangers, Imposters, and New Kids on the Block

          A LIVE (both virtual and in-person) application and knowledge-based continuing education activity for practicing pharmacists in all settings

          LIVE Event Date: December 19, 2025

          7:30 AM - 5:00 PM Eastern Time
          Sheraton Hartford South, Rocky Hill, CT

          LIVE Encore Webinar Dates: December 22-30, 2025

          Webex Webinars, links in confirmation emails

          Activity Support:  There is no funding for this program.

           

          Activities on December 19th cost $60 for the first hour.

          Each additional activity costs $20.

          ACPE UANs

          Pharmacist: 0009-0000-25-062-L03-P      Pharmacist: 0009-0000-25-063-L99-P

          Pharmacist: 0009-0000-25-064-L01-P      Pharmacist: 0009-0000-25-065-L01-P

          Pharmacist: 0009-0000-25-066-L05-P      Pharmacist: 0009-0000-25-067-L01-P

          Pharmacist: 0009-0000-25-068-L01-P      Pharmacist: 0009-0000-25-069-L06-P

          Accreditation Hours

          Each CE is 1 hour of credit

          Registering for the entire day is 8 hours of CEs

          Accreditation Statements

          The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy is accredited by the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education as a provider of continuing pharmacy education.

          Statements of credit for the online activities:

          ACPE UAN 0009-0000-25-062-L03-P

          ACPE UAN 0009-0000-25-063-L99-P

          ACPE UAN 0009-0000-25-064-L01-P

          ACPE UAN 0009-0000-25-065-L01-P

          ACPE UAN 0009-0000-25-066-L05-P

          ACPE UAN 0009-0000-25-067-L01-P

          ACPE UAN 0009-0000-25-068-L01-P

          ACPE UAN 0009-0000-25-069-L06-P

          - will be awarded when the post test and evaluation have been completed and passed with a 70% or better. Your CE credits will be uploaded to your CPE monitor profile within 2 weeks of completion of the program.

           

          Disclosure of Discussions of Off-label and Investigational Drug Use

          The material presented here does not necessarily reflect the views of The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy or its co-sponsor affiliates. These materials may discuss uses and dosages for therapeutic products, processes, procedures and inferred diagnoses that have not been approved by the United States Food and Drug Administration. A qualified health care professional should be consulted before using any therapeutic product discussed. All readers and continuing education participants should verify all information and data before treating patients or employing any therapies described in this continuing education activity.

          Faculty 

          Jeannette Y. Wick, RPh, MBA, Director of the Office of Professional Pharmacy Development, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

          Jennifer Luciano, PharmD, Director of Office of Experiential Education, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

          William L. Baker, PharmD, FCCP, FACC, FHFSA, Clinical Professor, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

          Devra Dang, PharmD, CDCES, FNAP, Clinical Professor, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT  

          Michael White, PharmD, FCP, FCCP, FASHP, Distinguished Professor and Chair, Pharmacy Practice, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

          Kelsey Giara, PharmD, Freelance Medical Writer, Pelham, NH

          Kristin Waters, PharmD, BCPS, BCPP, Assistant Clinical Professor, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

          Jeff Aeschlimann, PharmD, University of Connecticut, Storrs, CT

          Faculty Disclosure

          In accordance with the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education (ACPE) Criteria for Quality and Interpretive Guidelines, The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy requires that faculty disclose any relationship that the faculty may have with commercial entities whose products or services may be mentioned in the activity.

          All the speakers have no relationships with ineligible companies.

           

          SCHEDULE/TOPICS/LEARNING OBJECTIVES

          7:30-8:00 a.m. - Registration and Check-In/Sign-In

          8:00-8:05 a.m. - Opening Remarks- Philip M. Hritcko, Dean and Clinical Professor, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy

          8:05-8:10 a.m.Operational Instructions- Jeannette Y. Wick, RPh, MBA, Director of the Office of   Professional Pharmacy Development, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

           

          8:10 - 9:10 a.m. – LAW: Identifying Imposters: Counterfeit Drugs in the Pharmacy Distribution Chain

          Jeannette Y. Wick, RPh, MBA, Director of the Office of Professional Pharmacy Development, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

          0009-0000-25-062-L03-P (0.1 CEU or 1 contact hour) (Application-based)

          At the conclusion of this presentation, pharmacists will be able to
          • Define the terms “counterfeit” and "spurious" drugs
          • Discuss the prevalence of counterfeiting globally and in the United States
          • List factors that contribute to drug counterfeiting
          • Discuss the Drug Supply Chain Security Act (DSCSA) and its implications for the drug supply distribution chain’s integrity
          • Identify steps that reduce the risk of suspect product being delivered to the pharmacy and to patients

           

           

          9:15 - 10:15 a.m. – Step by Step: Tackling Imposter Syndrome in Every Transition

          Jennifer Luciano, PharmD, Director of Office of Experiential Education, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

          0009-0000-25-063-L99-P  (0.1 CEU or 1 contact hour) (Application-based)

          At the conclusion of this presentation, pharmacists will be able to
          • Recognize the signs and symptoms of imposter syndrome as they commonly present in pharmacy practice and education, including during career transitions such as rotations, residency, and new professional roles
          • Examine the personal, academic, and systemic factors that contribute to imposter syndrome among pharmacists and pharmacy students, with emphasis on high-performance expectations and professional identity formation
          • Identify practical, evidence-based strategies to manage and overcome imposter syndrome, fostering resilience, confidence, and professional growth within pharmacy practice and education

           

           

          10:20-11:20 a.m. – NKOTB: 2025 Updates on Management of Hypertension in Adults

          William L. Baker, PharmD, FCCP, FACC, FHFSA, Clinical Professor, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

          0009-0000-25-064-L01-P (0.1 CEU or 1 contact hour) (Application-based)

          At the conclusion of this presentation, pharmacists will be able to
          • Review the 2025 hypertension guidelines
          • Compare the updated recommendations to the prior guidelines
          • Review the evidence supporting the guideline changes

           

           

          11:25-12:25 p.m.  - NKOTB: New and Emerging Roles for GLP-1-Based Medications

          Devra Dang, PharmD, CDCES, FNAP, Clinical Professor, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT  

          0009-0000-25-065-L01-P (0.1 CEU or 1 contact hour) (Knowledge-based)

          At the conclusion of this presentation, pharmacists will be able to
          • List recent FDA-approved indications for GLP-1-based medications
          • Recognize proposed mechanisms by which GLP-1-based medications may impact conditions beyond type 2 diabetes and adiposity-based chronic disease
          • Describe key findings from major clinical trials evaluating new therapeutic potential of GLP-1-based medications

           

           

          12:25-12:45 p.m. – BREAK. Light snacks will be served.

           

          12:45-1:45 p.m. – PATIENT SAFETY: Biosimilar Doppelgangers

          Michael White, PharmD, FCP, FCCP, FASHP, Distinguished Professor and Chair, Pharmacy Practice, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

          0009-0000-25-066-L05-P (0.1 CEU or 1 contact hour) (Application-based)

          At the conclusion of this presentation, pharmacists will be able to
          • Compare and contrast a small molecule drug from a biological drug
          • Compare and contrast how a reference biologic drug compares with its biosimilar
          • Describe where a pharmacist would identify a biosimilar product and the legal implications of a biosimilar achieving interchangeable status with a reference product
          • Describe the nocebo effect and how to prevent it from occurring
          • Apply the knowledge from the objectives above to specific patient care scenarios in the self-assessment questions

           

           

          1:50-2:50 p.m.  – Hormone Therapy’s Twin Faces: Sorting Science from Misconception

          Kelsey Giara, PharmD, Freelance Medical Writer, Pelham, NH

          0009-0000-25-067-L01-P  (0.1 CEU or 1 contact hour (Application-based)

          At the conclusion of this presentation, pharmacists will be able to
          • Discuss the clinical evidence on safety, efficacy, and patient outcomes for hormone replacement therapy (HRT), highlighting areas of misconception or confusion
          • Compare HRT options and bioidenticals, including mechanisms of action, formulations, and regulatory pathways
          • Apply guidelines and evidence-based recommendations to individualize patient counseling and therapeutic decision-making when managing HRT

           

           

          2:55-3:55 p.m.  – Breaking the Mold: Novel Mechanisms in Psychiatry’s New Kids on the Block

          Kristin Waters, PharmD, BCPS, BCPP, Assistant Clinical Professor, University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy, Storrs, CT

          0009-0000-25-068-L01-P  (0.1 CEU or 1 contact hour) (Application-based)

          At the conclusion of this presentation, pharmacists will be able to
          • Describe the unique mechanisms of action of xanomeline-trospium in the management of schizophrenia and dextromethorphan-containing medications in the management of major depressive disorder
          • Distinguish between adverse effect profiles of new psychiatric medications compared to traditional antipsychotics and antidepressants
          • Identify appropriate candidates for new psychiatric medications based on knowledge of efficacy, safety, and patient-specific factors

           

           

          4:00-5:00 p.m. – IMMUNIZATION: Mountebanks, Grifters, and Frauds (Oh My!): An Update on the Management of Vaccine-Preventable Illnesses in 2025

          Jeff Aeschlimann, PharmD, University of Connecticut, Storrs, CT

          0009-0000-25-069-L06-P (0.1 CEU or 1 contact hour) (Application-based)

          At the conclusion of this presentation, pharmacists will be able to
          • Describe at least one important change (or proposed change) in childhood and adult vaccination recommendations put forth by the CDC and/or ACIP
          • Given a patient who asks about receiving respiratory virus or bacteria vaccinations (e.g., Influenza, COVID-19, respiratory syncytial virus (RSV), pneumococcal), outline important differences between multiple products when they exist
          • Identify evidence-based pharmacotherapeutic treatments for common vaccine-preventable illnesses

           

          CE FINALE ENCORE WEBINARS AVAILABLE

          If you find you cannot make it to our LIVE EVENT on Friday, December 19th, you can participate in our ENCORE LIVE WEBINARS that will be streamed on the following dates:

          • Monday, December 22, 12:00 (Noon) - 1:00 pm – NKOTB: New and Emerging Roles for GLP-1-Based Medications
          • Monday, December 22, 7:00 pm-8:00 pm – Hormone Therapy’s Twin Faces: Sorting Science from Misconception
          • Monday, December 22, 8:10 – 9:10 pm – LAW: Identifying Imposters: Counterfeit Drugs in the Pharmacy Distribution Chain
          • Tuesday, December 23, 12:00 pm-1:00 pm – PATIENT SAFETY: Biosimilar Doppelgangers
          • Tuesday, December 23, 7 pm – 8 pm – IMMUNIZATION: Mountebanks, Grifters, and Frauds (Oh My!): An Update on the Management of Vaccine-Preventable Illnesses in 2025
          • Monday, December 29, 12:00 (Noon) – 1:00 pm - Breaking the Mold: Novel Mechanisms in Psychiatry’s New Kids on the Block
          • Monday, December 29, 7 pm – 8 pm – LAW: Identifying Imposters: Counterfeit Drugs in the Pharmacy Distribution Chain
          • Tuesday, December 30, 12:00 (Noon) – 1:00 pm - NKOTB: 2025 Updates on Management of Hypertension in Adults
          • Tuesday, December 30, 7 pm – 8 pm - Step by Step: Tackling Imposter Syndrome in Every Transition

          A continuous class schedule format will be used.  This format does not include breaks but does include a 20-minute lunch period. Activities on December 19th cost $60 for the first hour. Each additional activity costs $20. 

          Refunds and Cancellations: The registration fee, less a $75 processing fee, is refundable for those who cancel their registration three (3) days prior to the program (by December 16) After that time, no refund is available.

          Location: The Henry A. Palmer C.E. Finale will be held both virtually and in-person. You must sign in to the Webex link at the designated time using the link in your confirmation email if you decide to participate virtually.

          Continuing Education Units

          The University of Connecticut, School of Pharmacy, is accredited by the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education as a provider of continuing pharmacy education. Statements of Credit will be awarded at CE Finale based on full sessions attended and completed online evaluations. Pharmacists can earn up to 8 contact hours (0.80 CEU) one of which is a law credit, one is an Immunization Credit, and one is a Patient Safety Credit.

          Please Note: Pharmacists who wish to receive credit for the presentations MUST ACCURATELY complete the registration and online evaluations within 45 days of the live program (before February 1, 2026).  Participants are accountable for their own continuing education requirements for license renewal and are required to follow up with Heather.Kleven@uconn.edu to resolve a discrepancy in a timely manner. PLEASE CHECK YOUR CPE MONITOR PROFILE within 3 days of submission to ensure that your credits have been properly uploaded.  Requests for exceptions will be handled on a case-by-case basis and may result in denial of credit.

          Our paper check processing system is quite slow. Please contact Heather.Kleven@uconn.edu if you must pay by check.

          Registration Fees: 50% discount for UConn faculty/preceptors

          Download Event Brochure

          REGISTRATION LINK

          The Mediterranean Diet’s Effect on Health

          Learning Objectives

           

          After completing this application-based continuing education activity, pharmacists and pharmacy technicians will be able to

          ·       Review the Mediterranean diet’s history and essential components
          ·       Discuss the relationship between culture, associated foods, and proven health benefits
          ·       Describe the relationship between the Mediterranean diet and the human microbiome
          ·       Discuss the pharmacist’s role as a resource for disseminating accurate, concise information to patients about the Mediterranean diet

          Release Date:

          Release Date: October 17, 2025

          Expiration Date: October 17, 2028

          Course Fee

          FREE

          There is no grant funding for this CE activity

          ACPE UANs

          Pharmacist: 0009-0000-25-070-H99-P

          Pharmacy Technician: 0009-0000-25-070-H99-T

          Session Codes

          Pharmacist:  19YC53-HKX42

          Pharmacy Technician:  19YC53-PWK93

          Accreditation Hours

          1.5 hours of CE

          Accreditation Statements

          The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy is accredited by the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education as a provider of continuing pharmacy education.  Statements of credit for the online activity ACPE UAN 0009-0000-25-070-H99-P/T  will be awarded when the post test and evaluation have been completed and passed with a 70% or better. Your CE credits will be uploaded to your CPE monitor profile within 2 weeks of completion of the program.

           

          Disclosure of Discussions of Off-label and Investigational Drug Use

          The material presented here does not necessarily reflect the views of The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy or its co-sponsor affiliates. These materials may discuss uses and dosages for therapeutic products, processes, procedures and inferred diagnoses that have not been approved by the United States Food and Drug Administration. A qualified health care professional should be consulted before using any therapeutic product discussed. All readers and continuing education participants should verify all information and data before treating patients or employing any therapies described in this continuing education activity.

          Faculty

           Jill Fitzgerald, PharmD

          Former Director (retired) of Pharmacy Professional Development,

          University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy,

          Storrs, CT

           

          Sonya Kremenchugsky, PharmD

          Pharmacist, The Valley Hospital,

          Ridgewood, NJ

           

          Zachary McPherson, PharmD,

          Pharmacist, Walgreens, CT

           

          Morgan Miller, PharmD

          Dispensary Pharmacist

          Bluepoint Wellness

          Branford, CT       

          Faculty Disclosure

          In accordance with the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education (ACPE) Criteria for Quality and Interpretive Guidelines, The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy requires that faculty disclose any relationship that the faculty may have with commercial entities whose products or services may be mentioned in the activity.

          Drs. Fitzgerald, Kremenchugsky, McPherson, and Miller do not have any relationships with ineligible companies and therefore have nothing to disclose.

           

          ABSTRACT

          Pharmacists are the most accessible health care professionals, and have several opportunities to promote healthy lifestyles with all of their patients. Diet can be described as empiric (what people actually eat) or normative (what they should eat). The Mediterranean Diet is a normative concept. Its unique food pyramid has been proven to contribute to improved overall health and cardio- vascular health in particular. It influences the human microbiome positively.
          Many healthcare programs and providers recommend this diet for patients with chronic disease. A good understanding of its principles can help pharmacists shape their discussions with patients to guide them on a path to overall better health.

          CONTENT

          Content

          INTRODUCTION

          Humans’ overall health is derived in part from our diets and physical activity. Diet plays a significant role in cardiovascular disease, gastrointestinal diseases, hypertension, and obesity.1,2 In November 2018, The University of Connecticut hosted a conference in Florence, Italy, called “The Mediterranean Diet from an Italian Perspective.” Historians, scientists, and nutrition experts with diverse backgrounds who were primarily from Italy presented comprehensive information about the Mediterranean diet to U.S. pharmacists and dietitians. This continuing education activity reviews information covered in that conference and provides pharmacy teams with a better understanding of the term, “Mediterranean diet.” Educated and accessible health professionals can potentially minimize the incidence of diet-related diseases.

          The human diet has changed with time. Humans started as hunter-gatherers (also called foragers by proponents of the currently popular Paleo diet), which entailed considerable physical activity coupled with a high protein, low carbohydrate diet.

          Some subsets of the human population shifted to an agricultural lifestyle about 11,000 years ago; this is a relatively recent change if one considers that humans have roamed the earth for roughly 2 million years. The change tended to localize groups of people, galvanize population growth, and eventually, allow the development of urban centers. In the last two centuries, these changes supported and encouraged global industrialization and urbanization.3,4

          Many researchers have blamed the current epidemic of certain diseases on the change from whole foods to a high carbohydrate, processed diet associated with industrialization. They also cite relationship between the industrial revolution and the availability of (and perception that we “need”) processed foods, artificial sweeteners, and preservatives. Most people’s diets are completely different from either the hunter-gatherer or agricultural diet consumed by people who farmed. The combination of today’s diet coupled with sedentary lifestyle has led to unforeseeable, clearly preventable health consequences.3,4 Anthropologists have always looked for links between food and diet, human biological and cultural evolution, and population health. In the last 50 years, medical researchers have joined them.

          Hippocrates once said, “Let food be thy medicine and medicine be thy food.” Today, the Western diet is generally high in saturated fat and sucrose, and contains insufficient fiber. This diet increases the risk of obesity, asthma, diabetes, and inflammatory bowel disease.5 Our society has evolved from older and seemingly healthier diets to less healthy diets replete with processed foods.

          This continuing education activity focuses on the Mediterranean diet and its potential to impact health. Researcher Ancel Keys coined the phrase “The Mediterranean diet” to describe a diet he observed near Naples, Italy in the 1950s. The term does not actually describe how people of the Mediterranean currently eat, and its definition is imprecise and somewhat fluid today. The Mediterranean diet is based on a different food pyramid (discussed below) than the traditional pyramid seen in Westernized countries. The activity will cover Ancel Keys and his discoveries from the Seven Country Study alongside his cholesterol hypothesis. The diet, which is rich in fiber and fermented food and drinks, like wines and cheeses, can improve health by nourishing our gut microbiome (the microorganisms that comprise our gut ecosystem and are necessary to digest food, synthesize vitamins, metabolize drugs, and detoxify carcinogens; see SIDEBAR, page 3).

           

          SIDEBAR

          What is the Human Microbiome?

          The human microbiome is the composition of microbes in the human gastrointestinal tract, their genes, and the environment they occupy. In other words, the microbiome is a freestanding ecosystem in each individual’s gut. Of the trillions of microbes that live in or on our bodies, about 90% live within the gastrointestinal tract. The microbiota genome vastly outnumbers the human genome.

          Humans are born with a set of DNA and are germ-free. But over time, different organisms from the outside environment or from foods we consume begin to change our intestinal composition. These elements tend to shape the microbiota all over the body, and the microbes on the skin vary widely from the microbes in the gut. Microbial diversity helps our body function correctly and no two areas on our bodies host the same bacterial composition.

          Recently, researchers have discovered that the microbiome plays a much larger role in health than originally believed. From infancy to death, humans feed their gut microbiome continuously. Each body adapts constantly based on diet. Disruption of the microbiome through poor eating habits and antibiotic use can contribute to the progression of diseases like irritable bowel syndrome, obesity, and cardiovascular disorders. The typical American diet—a diet that often depends on processed or ultra- processed foods—has deteriorated the typical individual’s microbiome.

          The Mediterranean diet contains fermented foods, such as wines and cheeses and an ample portion of fiber, that maintain and nourish the microbiome and promote overall health. The Mediterranean diet contributes to a diverse group of gastrointestinal microbes.12 It provides prebiotics and probiotics. Patients may ask about prebiotics and probiotics, which are available as over-the- counter supplements. It’s important to know the difference, and to know that a good diet can provide both naturally.

          A strong microbiome aids in vitamin synthesis, immune system function, and xenobiotic (chemical compounds [drugs, pesticides, or carcinogens] that are foreign to a living organism) metabolism. It also fortifies the intestine’s impermeability. Some xenobiotics affect health negatively, but others, like supplements and antibiotics, have health benefits. Other functions include biosynthesis of neuro-active metabolites and neurotransmitters like GABA, dopamine, and acetylcholine.

          Nourishing the gut microbiome helps strengthen our body’s anti-tumor response. However, the microbiome is unable to take part in these functions without microbial diversity. More than 20% of our microbiome variability is associated with diet, drugs or supplements consumed, and overall body composition.

           

          Prebiotics Probiotics
          What’s the difference?

           

           

           

           

           

          Substances that

          come mainly from

          fiber to feed the

          beneficial

          gastrointestinal

          bacteria

          Live bacteria found

          in food and/or

          supplements

           

           

           

          Why do we use them?

           

           

           

           

           

          To bolster beneficial

          bacteria that can be

          converted into

          products with anti-

          inflammatory

          properties

          To increase the

          amount of

          beneficial bacteria

          in the gut

           

           

          What are some examples?

           

           

           

           

           

          Legumes, beans,

          peas, oats, bananas,

          berries, asparagus,

          garlic

           

           

          Sauerkraut, kimchi,

          fermented cheeses,

          fermented

          vegetables,

          Lactobacillus and

          Bifidobacterium

           

          Ancel Keys: Linking Health to Blood Cholesterol Ancel Keys (1904-2004) was an American scientist who spent much of his postgraduate career at the University of Minnesota. He studied diet’s influence on health with a particular interest in cholesterol and coronary heart disease. His contributions to understanding diet’s effects on cardiovascular disease made him an icon in cardiovascular nutrition.14 Keys’ interest in cholesterol peaked after World War II (WWII) when he noticed a significant increase in heart disease mortality with the evolution of the American diet.15 Diets are often based on beliefs or perceptions, and at that time, the American people believed that protein from animal sources was the key to a strong nation.

          Dinner always included meat.16 Following WWII, the American diet increasingly included convenience foods—casseroles, Spam, and meatloaf, among other high-calorie or highly processed meals—that allowed men and women to work and still have the family-style dinner they desired with little effort.16

          In the early 1950s, Keys traveled to Europe and observed

          • Italy and Spain had remarkably low rates of heart disease
          • In both Italy and Spain, the wealthy had high rates of cardiovascular disease, but the working class poor had almost no cardiovascular disease
          • People in Mediterranean countries consumed a diet starkly different than that consumed in the United

          Keys commented on the diet of working class families in the Naples, Italy area, writing “Homemade minestrone or vegetable soup, pasta of endless variety, freshly cooked, with tomato sauce, and a sprinkle of cheese, only occasionally enriched with some bits of meat, or served with a little local seafood, a hearty dish of beans (...) red wine and fresh fruit always.”17 He appropriately described the basis of the Mediterranean diet. After noting how American and Mediterranean diets diverged, Keys gathered anecdotal evidence and speculated that dietary habits explained the differences in cardiovascular disease rates be- tween countries. Keys presented his ideas at the 1955 World Health Organization (WHO) meeting, only to be laughed at by senior scientists in attendance.18

           

          Seven Countries Study & Cholesterol Hypothesis Motivated to dig for answers, Keys began the first multi-country epidemiological study to look for a causal relationship between low-density lipoprotein (LDL) cholesterol and coronary heart disease in 1958. This five-year study enrolled nearly 12,000 men aged 40 to 59 in Finland, Greece, Italy, Japan, the Netherlands, the United States, and Yugoslavia.19

          Keys’ findings, translated into his cholesterol hypothesis, were controversial. The original hypothesis of simply “good fats vs. bad fats” consumption in relation to serum cholesterol unexpectedly needed to include other factors. These factors included the influences of the food and drug industries; level of sugar consumption; and the varying lifestyles of different cultures around the world. This posed a further question: “Is there a diet that is universally healthy for all?” It should be noted that the studies Keys performed were observational, and lacked randomization and control groups. Therefore causation cannot be confirmed. Keys’ critics tended to point out that he “cherry picked” his data to produce the results he desired.

          By 1975, Keys—eager to disseminate his findings—published cookbooks and coined the term “Mediterranean diet.” (Copies of his original cookbook, How to Eat Well and Stay Well the Mediterranean Way, are still available at a price of about $500.00.) With the newly popular Mediterranean diet notion came two different concepts of diet: empiric and normative.

          • The empiric concept of diet is objective, simple, and factual (i.e. what people eat is considered their diet).
          • The normative concept of diet is subjective and “what ought to be” (i.e. people should or should not eat certain ways.”

          Keys’ dietary recommendations, according to his research, are based on the normative concept, and he wanted to make dietary change attractive.14 Keys hoped that adults who adopted a Mediterranean diet lifestyle could reduce their chronic disease burden. Some of the disease states Keys anticipated would be improved by the Mediterranean diet included cardiovascular disease, diabetes, hypertension, and kidney disease.20

          The Mediterranean diet, as Key’s described, mainly consists of fresh fruits and vegetables, beans and legumes, whole grains, bread, and pasta, with small amounts of animal-based proteins consumed less frequently.

          Food marks people’s cultural, religious, personal, and social class identity. Food production not only shapes landscapes and environments, but it also shapes our health. Consuming food is traditionally considered to be a social act, as it brings people together. In many cultures, food is symbolic. So, what do we learn from our food culture? It begins with a socialization process, starting at birth—first with family and friends, then in school and at work. Socialization influences what is “normal” to eat, the acquisition of food itself, and what is available, based on region.

          The Mediterranean Diet pyramid (Figure 1) varies significantly from most food pyramids. Starting at the figure’s base and working upward, conviviality (eating while enjoying good company) and physical activity are essential elements. Thus, the Mediterranean Diet is not only a diet, but a lifestyle. The diet is high in grains, legumes, and fresh produce consumed daily. Bread is served at most meals (see Sidebar on page 4), while meat is consumed less frequently. Olive oil, beans, nuts, legumes, seeds, herbs, and spices provide essential flavor to most meals. Fish or seafood is consumed at least twice weekly and wine is allowed in moderation (no more than five ounces of wine for women and ten ounces for men under the age of 65) daily.21

          The Mediterranean diet is listed as a United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization (UNESCO) Intangible Cultural Heritage of Humanity. An Intangible Cultural Heritage encompasses the oral traditions, performing arts, social practices, rituals, festive events, knowledge and practices concerning nature and the universe, or the knowledge and skills to produce traditional crafts.24 As described by UNESCO25: “The Mediterranean diet involves a set of skills, knowledge, rituals, symbols and traditions concerning crops, harvesting, fishing, animal husbandry, conservation, processing, cooking and particularly the sharing and consumption of food. Eating together is the foundation of the cultural identity and continuity of communities throughout the Mediterranean basin. It is a moment of social exchange and communication, an affirmation and renewal of family, group or community identity."

          The diet’s intangible and cultural aspects make it unique; adherence to the diet is based on more than intake of specific foods. The conviviality and social aspect of eating together is an essential part of Mediterranean culture and is included as part of the food pyramid. Investigators have conducted trials to review how the Mediterranean diet affects health outcomes. The PREDIMED study conducted recently compared those who follow the Mediterranean diet to those who do not and their cardiovascular outcomes.

           

          PAUSE AND PONDER: What does bread symbolize in your religion or culture?

          Does it appear on the table at every meal?

           

          SIDEBAR

          BREAD

          In the Mediterranean Diet, carbohydrates account for 45% to 55% of daily calories. This is because bread (among other grains) is the most important food in the Mediterranean and many other cultures; it is a symbol of sustenance and livelihood. Bread requires few ingredients, is inexpensive and easy to make, and provides nourishment. Each region of the world has its own way of making bread, from differences in ingredients to the techniques involved in the bread-making process itself.

          The history of bread dates to the Ancient Egyptians in 8000 BC when they invented the first grinding stone, called a quern. The earliest breads more closely resembled porridge or a flat cake. Between 5000 and 3700 BC, bread became a staple food in Egypt and was also used for trade and bartering. Trading bread introduced it to other regions and cultures, expanding its production around the world. Over time, different types of grains and bread-making techniques emerged.

          Greeks, Mexicans, Persians, and many others jumped on the bread bandwagon in the next several centuries. Each population created something unique. By 1000 BC, yeasted breads had become popular in Rome. Bread has always been a form of sustenance; for many centuries the type of bread one ate also represented status. Bread quickly became a symbol of Roman status. White breads were more expensive, and exclusively for the wealthy, while common people generally consumed darker whole wheat breads. The British adopted this same societal structure during medieval times.23

          In many cultures “breaking bread” means bringing family and friends together for just a small meal or even a big holiday celebration.

          In the Italian culture bread is revered for its symbolization of love and nurturing. Bread is never discarded but rather turned into an additional dish or crumbled in soup (ribollita). Consider the Italian tradition of sweeping breadcrumbs from the table into your fist and kissing them; it’s a symbol of the bread’s cultural importance.

          Source: Reference 23

           

          The PREDIMED Trial

          Published by the New England Journal of Medicine in 2013 and again with corrections in 2018, the PREDIMED study assessed the Mediterranean diet in Spain from 2003 to 2011 and included 7447 men and women at high cardiovascular disease risk with a mean age of 67 years.26,27 The study was a multicenter, randomized, nutrition-intervention, primary prevention trial to test the efficacy of the Mediterranean Diet on the composite endpoint of death from cardiovascular cause, stroke and myocardial infarction. The researchers randomized subjects to one of three groups:

          • Mediterranean diet supplemented with one liter per family per week of extra virgin olive oil
          • Mediterranean diet supplemented with mixed nuts (1 oz/day) or
          • A standard low fat control diet

          While the intervention was originally intended to last six years, the researchers discontinued the trial early and advised all participants to follow a Mediterranean diet. The recommendation came after the study’s data and safety monitoring board realized that participants in either Mediterranean diet arm had significantly improved health statuses. After an average follow up of about 4.8 years, both Mediterranean Diet groups had a significant (30%) reduction in major cardiovascular events compared to the low fat control diet.27

          However, after the 2013 publication, researchers raised questions about the study’s randomization and data analysis, indicating that errors in randomization introduced unintentional bias that made the results/data unreliable. The New England Journal of Medicine retracted the trial.26,28 The specific issue related to randomization was this: Randomization was not conducted consistently and correctly across all sites. For example, at some sites, if more than one participant per house enrolled, investigators would assign both individuals to the same diet. At other sites the research staff randomized entire clinics to a single treatment group instead of each participant.26,28

          The authors reanalyzed and statistically corrected for correlations within families or clinics. The authors also reanalyzed the data and omitted 1588 participants whose trial group assignments were known or suspected to have deviated from the randomization protocol. After reanalysis of he remaining 5859 subjects, the authors found no significant changes from the original study. Reanalysis confirmed a 30% relative difference in major cardiovascular events in those randomized to the Mediterranean diet groups.26

          Despite the controversy over the PREDIMED study, many studies have confirmed the Mediterranean diet’s benefits.29-31 The best time to internalize the elements of good diet is early in life, and in Italy, school systems follow and reinforce the Mediterranean diet’s general principles in their school lunch programs.

          The program used in Florence, Italy is a good example.

           

          PAUSE AND PONDER: How does the Mediterranean diet differ from what is perceived to be a healthy diet in the US? What factors other than food may play a role in its supposed health benefits?

          School Lunch Program in Florence, Italy

          While many children may learn the practices of the Mediterranean diet at home, the ideals of the normative Mediterranean diet are further ingrained in school through Italian school lunch programs. In the city of Florence, Italy, school staff prepares 24,000 lunches daily in 16 different kitchens. They deliver the meals to different primary schools. Menus rotate every four weeks and the menu changes three times annually to provide seasonally fresh foods. Pediatricians and dietitians develop the menu. Dietitians calculate protein, carbohydrates, fat, and calories for each meal to ensure that they are at national average. However, parents, chefs, and children have significant input as well. Parents are welcome to eat lunch with their children to try a school lunch. Dietary staff rarely serves canned or frozen food with the exception of peas and spinach in the winter. Menus indicate whether the food is organic, local, or both and about 90% of the food falls into these categories.32

          Food from home is generally not allowed, and the school has no vending machines so all food originates from the kitchen. Fresh fruit is provided at around 10 AM in the classroom as a snack. Teachers eat with students during lunch. The lunch room accommodates about 20 students; children set tables, serve, or clear plates. At the end of each month, parents pay for their child’s lunch. The cost is income-based. The highest income level pays 4.90 Euros ($5.60 as of December 2018) per meal, and the lowest income level pays 1.00 Euro ($1.14 as of December 2018) per meal. Certain low-income groups do not pay.32 The main point is that Italy makes a healthy diet affordable for everyone, not just the wealthy.

          Special meals are available to accommodate people who have a variety of food allergies. (Approximately 6% to 8% of the Italian population has allergies, yet roughly 20% of American children suffer from allergies.33 ) There are also Kosher, Halal, and vegetarian options. While chefs prepare these meals differently, they appear visually similar so students do not feel uncomfortable if they receive a different meal.32

          Once children leave primary school, they no longer receive meals in school and it is up to the students and their parents to select foods they eat. The Mediterranean diet is instilled in the everyday lives of children who live in Florence through the school lunch program and these ideals many times continue into adulthood.32 If children continue these habits, evidence suggests health outcomes of interest to pharmacists and other healthcare providers (better cardiovascular health and less chronic illness).

          Aging, Adherence to the Mediterranean Diet, and the Microbiome

          Recently, researchers conducted a study to understand how adherence to the Mediterranean diet in an aging population can be a simple way for people to reduce cardiovascular risk.34 In a study of 476 adults aged 50 to 89 living in Italy, these researchers looked for a link between adherence to the Mediterranean Diet, cardiometabolic disorders and polypharmacy (defined as five or more medications). Using patient self-report, they found that patients who had medium-low adherence to the Mediterranean diet over the years took an average of five medications. Participants in the medium-low adherence group also had a higher body mass index, and a higher prevalence of arterial hypertension, previous coronary and cerebrovascular events, diabetes, and dyslipidemia on average compared to those in the high adherence group.

          Those whose diet most closely resembled the ideal Mediterranean diet, however, took an average of three medications.

          Their conclusion was that adherence to the Mediterranean Diet may decrease polypharmacy and cardiometabolic disorders in elderly, and have a positive preventive effects on health deterioration.34 Using the results of this study, pharmacists can explain to patients how diet changes can potentially affect their pill burden. Polypharmacy can lead to issues such as side effects and drug interactions that can be avoided with simple dietary changes. Dietary changes can also eventually lead to beneficial changes to the human microbiome.

          The industrial revolution changed the American diet. Greater accessibility to a wide variety of foods and mass produced, convenient meals lead to microbiome degradation and dysfunction.35 Most of the food in American grocery stores does not nourish the microbiota, lacking the component key to feeding the microbiome: fiber. Studies have shown an increase in beneficial bacteria, like Bifidobacterium and Lactobacillus, in groups with high fiber diets compared to groups with placebo or low fiber diets.36 Fiber promotes a higher microbial diversity and microbiome resilience. Fruits and vegetables provide a variety of external microbes and probiotics. The combination of fiber and microbes contribute to a healthy gut microbiome. The shift from a non-Western diet to a Western diet has had drastic effects, including a loss of native bacteria strains and a fiber deficit. A Western lifestyle lacks essential components that contribute to a diverse microbiome that leads to long- and short- term health effects.37

          The Relationship with the Mediterranean Diet

          The Mediterranean diet is not a high carbohydrate diet that contains simply breads and pasta. The diet is composed of fresh fruit, vegetables, fish, whole meal cereals, beans and pulses (edible seeds of plants in the legume family), unsalted nuts and seeds, small amounts of lean meat and low fat dairy, olive oil, fresh herbs and wine.7 Food is not the only component of the diet. Conviviality, or the social aspect of eating, is an essential part alongside physical activity and a relaxed lifestyle. The Mediterranean diet contributes to improved metabolic health through the reduction of circulating bacterial endotoxins and diversity of the microbiota. Increasing levels of bacterial endotoxins have been proposed as a cause of inflammation during metabolic dysfunction.37

          Numerous studies have confirmed the Mediterranean diet diversifies the gut microbiome. One study concluded that the diet increases the probiotic bacteria, Lactobacillus, when compared to the control group that was on a Western diet.13 Researchers replicated these findings in a study of Spanish men who ate a traditional Mediterranean-style diet. Study subjects had increased populations of Bifidobacterium and Lactobacillus. These bacterial species also had the ability to stimulate the growth of other beneficial bacterial species involved in methane and butyrate production.38

          Feeding the human microbiota effectively requires microbiota- accessible carbohydrates (MACs). MACs are a primary source of energy for the microbiome and come from a fiber-rich diet. A MAC-rich diet has few simple sugars, unlike the typical Western diet, and its main contributor to the host metabolism is through small chain fatty acid fermentation of end products of the microbiota. The Western diet is low in MACs which results in a low microbiota diversity and metabolic output.12 Increases in mucus-utilizing microbes, slow gut motility, and increased calories from fat and sugars all contribute to cardiovascular diseases, obesity, and the deterioration of health.12

          Dysbiosis, or microbial imbalance, contributes to the pathogenesis of intestinal and extra-intestinal disease. Inflammatory bowel disease can manifest within our intestinal tract due to dysbiosis.8 Allergies, asthma, metabolic syndrome, cardiovascular disease, and obesity occur outside of our intestines partly due to microbial imbalance.7 Avoiding dysbiosis can help to prevent some of these ailments. Hunter-gatherer diets promote a diverse microbiome since the diet is primarily based on fruits, vegetables, and high fiber content. The microbiome can ferment soluble fibers into short-chain fatty acids that are health- promoting and can help with metabolic syndrome.7

          IMPLICATIONS FOR PHARMACY STAFF

          Today, many healthcare providers steer patients toward a Mediterranean diet to improve cardio-metabolic issues. The American Heart Association devotes a page to the Mediterranean diet, noting that “Mediterranean diet” is a generic term for the typical eating habits in the countries that border the Mediterranean Sea.39 Healthcare organizations and advocacy groups use many different definitions, but often explain that this diet is based on whole or minimally processed foods. It includes many health-protective foods (fruits, vegetables, legumes, whole grains, fish and olive oil) and encourages patients to avoid adverse dietary factors (fast food, sugar-sweetened beverages, refined grain products, and processed or energy-dense foods). It also guides patients to limit red meat and alcohol intake, indulging moderately if at all.39,40

          Pharmacy staff can be a resource for information about the diet, referring patients to local cooking classes or lectures that are given by health clinics. Most healthcare systems offer such classes to their patients and the community, and adult education programs often do, too. They can also target patients who have cardiovascular disease, diabetes, or renal failure for counseling, and steer them to discuss the Mediterranean diet with their health care professionals.

          Table 1. Resources for the Mediterranean Diet
          Oldways Cultural Food Traditions

          https://oldwayspt.org/traditional-diets/mediterranean-diet

          ●   Describes the Mediterranean diet, and also covers the principles and components of African, Asian, Latin, veg- an, and vegetarian diets

          ●   Includes numerous recipes

          ●   Provides links to advocacy groups and related programs

          Mediterranean Diet 101: A Meal Plan and Beginner's Guide

          https://pharmacy.media.uconn.edu/wp-content/uploads/sites/2740/2025/10/MediterraneanDiet-PDF-link-in-the-doc.pdf

          ●   Provides lists of foods, sample menus, and shopping lists

          ●   Offers useful tips on eating out

          What is the Mediterranean Diet?

          https://www.cookinglight.com/eating-smart/nutrition- 101/what-is-the-Mediterranean-diet

          ●   Includes sample meal plans, recipe ideas, shopping lists

          ●   Offers suggestions to add variety to meals

          22 Mediterranean Diet Recipes

          https://www.eatingwell.com/easy-mediterranean-diet-dinnerrecipes-for-weight-loss-11748517https://www.health.com/health/gallery/0,,20718485,00.html

          ●   A slideshow of recipes that incorporate the elements of an Italian or Greek diet

          Pharmacists and technicians should understand the diet and be able to answer questions about its health benefits. Hamilton Family Health Team offers a Mediterranean Diet Scorecard for free that emphasizes important points (https://hamiltonfht.ca/wp-content/uploads/Medi-Diet-Scoring-Tool.pdf) and is a handy tool for pharmacy staff.  Pharmacies can also promote this diet annually in May, which is National Mediterranean Diet Month, with poster campaigns and information sheets.41 Table 1 provides additional resources.

          CONCLUSION

          It’s clear that diet has serious health implications. Astute readers probably noticed several things as they read. First, the Mediterranean diet emanates from food that the poor, working class people ate traditionally. It is based on healthy foods. Second, it’s highly probable that if researchers look at similar diets from other regions of the world, they would find similar health implications. (The authors assume you saw sauerkraut and kimchi listed in the fermented foods list in the Probiotics Sidebar, and reference to other old world diets in the Resources table.) Third, many readers may examine their own eating habits and see room for improvement.

           

          Especially in occupations where long days, missed lunches, and consuming fast food quickly are the norm (do these things sound familiar?), convenience and processed foods may wiggle their way into many meals. Making good choices from foods included in the Mediterranean diet can improve overall health for patients and for pharmacists and technicians, too.

          Pharmacist Post Test (for viewing only)


          The Mediterranean Diet's Effect on Health
          Pharmacist Post-Test
          25-070

          Learning Objectives:
          After participating in this activity, pharmacists and pharmacy technicians will be able to
          Review the Mediterranean diet’s history and essential components
          Discuss the relationship between culture, associated foods, and proven health benefits
          Describe the relationship between the Mediterranean diet and the human microbiome
          Discuss the pharmacist’s role as a resource for disseminating accurate, concise information to patients about the Mediterranean diet.

          1. Ancel Keys was considered an icon in:
          a. Coronary heart disease
          b. Cardiovascular nutrition
          c. Influencing diet

          *

          2. Why did Ancel Keys become interested in studying cholesterol?
          a. He was a vegetarian, which is notoriously a low-cholesterol diet
          b. He was Italian and thought everyone should eat like Italians do
          c. He noticed a significant increase in heart disease mortality

          *

          3. What did Ancel Keys observe while traveling to Europe in the 1950s?
          a. Individuals born and raised in France or Germany experienced almost no cardiovascular disease or dyslipidemia
          b. There was a stark difference in the foods consumed and the health in Mediterranean countries compared to the United States
          c. In both France and Germany, the wealthy had high rates of cardiovascular disease, but the working class poor people had almost no cardiovascular problems

          *

          4. At what meeting did Keys present his ideas?
          a. World Health Organization
          b. UNESCO
          c. PREDIMED

          *

          5. What percentage of calories come from a carbohydrate source for the Mediterranean diet?
          a. 20%-30%
          b. 45%-55%
          c. 60%-70%

          *

          6. What disease states can benefit from the Mediterranean diet?
          a. Kidney disease, diabetes, asthma, Crohn’s, ulcerative colitis
          b. Ulcerative colitis , cardiovascular disease, GERD, asthma
          c. Cardiovascular disease, diabetes, hypertension, kidney disease

          *

          7. What is the human microbiome?
          a. The human microbiome is the complete population of all microbial organisms in and on our body
          b. The human microbiome is the microbial composition in our gastrointestinal tract, their genes and the environment that they live in within our bodies
          c. The human microbiome is the complete species list of all organisms that could pose a potential threat to our bodies

          *

          8. Which disease states are likely to benefit from the microbiome?
          a. Kidney disease, diabetes, asthma, Crohn’s
          b. Ulcerative colitis , cardiovascular disease, GERD, migraines
          c. Cardiovascular disease, celiacs disease, obesity

          *

          9. Which of the following is NOT a function of the microbiome?
          a. The microbiome strengthens the impermeability of the intestine
          b. The microbiome helps produce sex hormones to provide optimal fertility
          c. The microbiome contributes to immune system function

          *

          10. Which of the following food groups provides the most amount of microbes to our bodies?
          a. Grains and cereals
          b. Meats
          c. Fruits and vegetables

          *

          11. What is the effect of Bifidobacterium and Lactobacillus in the microbiome?
          a. They create the perfect environment for bacteria to grow by enhancing the pH and water saturation throughout the GI tract
          b. They defend the intestines against opportunistic pathogens
          c. They stimulate the growth of other beneficial species

          *

          12. Which of the following is a major factor contributing to intestinal and extra intestinal diseases?
          a. Inadequate fluid intake
          b. Dysbiosis
          c. High sugar intake

          *

          13. What is the effect of re-diversifying a dysbiotic microbiome?
          a. New disease states will occur
          b. Loss of function in the microbiome
          c. Prevention of intestinal diseases

          *

          14. Which of the following best describes the Mediterranean Diet?
          a. Low carbohydrate, low fat, high animal protein diet
          b. High carbohydrate, high fat, low animal protein diet
          c. Low carbohydrate, high fat, high animal protein diet

          *

          15. The Historic Centre of Florence is an example of a ____________________.
          a. UNESCO Intangible Cultural Heritage
          b. UNESCO Cultural Heritage
          c. UNESCO Natural Heritage

          *

          16. What was the purpose of the PREDIMED trial?
          a. To test the efficacy of the Mediterranean diet on decreasing all-cause mortality
          b. To test the efficacy of the Mediterranean diet on cardiovascular health
          c. To test the efficacy of the Mediterranean diet on the composite endpoint

          *

          17. What did the Aging and Adherence to the Mediterranean Diet find?
          a. An association between adherence to the Mediterranean Diet and adherence to medication
          b. An inverse association between adherence to the Mediterranean Diet and adherence to medication
          c. An inverse association between adherence to the Mediterranean Diet, polypharmacy and cardiometabolic disorders

          *

          18. Which of the following is an example of a typical meal based on the normative Mediterranean diet?
          a. Bread with olive oil, charcuterie, cheese, a glass of wine
          b. Bread with olive oil, lentil salad, a glass of wine
          c. Bread with olive oil, grilled chicken, lentil salad

          *

          19. Which of the following can help pharmacists and pharmacy technicians analyze a patient’s diet?
          a. The Cardiac Rehabilitation UK Mediterranean Diet Scorecard
          b. The Oldways Diet online site
          c. The Mayo Clinic’s webpage on eating

          *

          20. Select the statement that is TRUE:
          a. The Mediterranean diet builds on inexpensive food that the poor, working class people ate traditionally.
          b. If researchers look at other regions of the world, no similar diets or health implications exist.
          c. Most pharmacists and techs instinctively follow a Mediterranean diet and can explain it to patients.

          Pharmacy Technician Post Test (for viewing only)


          The Mediterranean Diet's Effect on Health
          Pharmacist Post-Test
          25-070

          Learning Objectives:
          After participating in this activity, pharmacists and pharmacy technicians will be able to
          Review the Mediterranean diet’s history and essential components
          Discuss the relationship between culture, associated foods, and proven health benefits
          Describe the relationship between the Mediterranean diet and the human microbiome
          Discuss the pharmacist’s role as a resource for disseminating accurate, concise information to patients about the Mediterranean diet.

          1. Ancel Keys was considered an icon in:
          a. Coronary heart disease
          b. Cardiovascular nutrition
          c. Influencing diet

          *

          2. Why did Ancel Keys become interested in studying cholesterol?
          a. He was a vegetarian, which is notoriously a low-cholesterol diet
          b. He was Italian and thought everyone should eat like Italians do
          c. He noticed a significant increase in heart disease mortality

          *

          3. What did Ancel Keys observe while traveling to Europe in the 1950s?
          a. Individuals born and raised in France or Germany experienced almost no cardiovascular disease or dyslipidemia
          b. There was a stark difference in the foods consumed and the health in Mediterranean countries compared to the United States
          c. In both France and Germany, the wealthy had high rates of cardiovascular disease, but the working class poor people had almost no cardiovascular problems

          *

          4. At what meeting did Keys present his ideas?
          a. World Health Organization
          b. UNESCO
          c. PREDIMED

          *

          5. What percentage of calories come from a carbohydrate source for the Mediterranean diet?
          a. 20%-30%
          b. 45%-55%
          c. 60%-70%

          *

          6. What disease states can benefit from the Mediterranean diet?
          a. Kidney disease, diabetes, asthma, Crohn’s, ulcerative colitis
          b. Ulcerative colitis , cardiovascular disease, GERD, asthma
          c. Cardiovascular disease, diabetes, hypertension, kidney disease

          *

          7. What is the human microbiome?
          a. The human microbiome is the complete population of all microbial organisms in and on our body
          b. The human microbiome is the microbial composition in our gastrointestinal tract, their genes and the environment that they live in within our bodies
          c. The human microbiome is the complete species list of all organisms that could pose a potential threat to our bodies

          *

          8. Which disease states are likely to benefit from the microbiome?
          a. Kidney disease, diabetes, asthma, Crohn’s
          b. Ulcerative colitis , cardiovascular disease, GERD, migraines
          c. Cardiovascular disease, celiacs disease, obesity

          *

          9. Which of the following is NOT a function of the microbiome?
          a. The microbiome strengthens the impermeability of the intestine
          b. The microbiome helps produce sex hormones to provide optimal fertility
          c. The microbiome contributes to immune system function

          *

          10. Which of the following food groups provides the most amount of microbes to our bodies?
          a. Grains and cereals
          b. Meats
          c. Fruits and vegetables

          *

          11. What is the effect of Bifidobacterium and Lactobacillus in the microbiome?
          a. They create the perfect environment for bacteria to grow by enhancing the pH and water saturation throughout the GI tract
          b. They defend the intestines against opportunistic pathogens
          c. They stimulate the growth of other beneficial species

          *

          12. Which of the following is a major factor contributing to intestinal and extra intestinal diseases?
          a. Inadequate fluid intake
          b. Dysbiosis
          c. High sugar intake

          *

          13. What is the effect of re-diversifying a dysbiotic microbiome?
          a. New disease states will occur
          b. Loss of function in the microbiome
          c. Prevention of intestinal diseases

          *

          14. Which of the following best describes the Mediterranean Diet?
          a. Low carbohydrate, low fat, high animal protein diet
          b. High carbohydrate, high fat, low animal protein diet
          c. Low carbohydrate, high fat, high animal protein diet

          *

          15. The Historic Centre of Florence is an example of a ____________________.
          a. UNESCO Intangible Cultural Heritage
          b. UNESCO Cultural Heritage
          c. UNESCO Natural Heritage

          *

          16. What was the purpose of the PREDIMED trial?
          a. To test the efficacy of the Mediterranean diet on decreasing all-cause mortality
          b. To test the efficacy of the Mediterranean diet on cardiovascular health
          c. To test the efficacy of the Mediterranean diet on the composite endpoint

          *

          17. What did the Aging and Adherence to the Mediterranean Diet find?
          a. An association between adherence to the Mediterranean Diet and adherence to medication
          b. An inverse association between adherence to the Mediterranean Diet and adherence to medication
          c. An inverse association between adherence to the Mediterranean Diet, polypharmacy and cardiometabolic disorders

          *

          18. Which of the following is an example of a typical meal based on the normative Mediterranean diet?
          a. Bread with olive oil, charcuterie, cheese, a glass of wine
          b. Bread with olive oil, lentil salad, a glass of wine
          c. Bread with olive oil, grilled chicken, lentil salad

          *

          19. Which of the following can help pharmacists and pharmacy technicians analyze a patient’s diet?
          a. The Cardiac Rehabilitation UK Mediterranean Diet Scorecard
          b. The Oldways Diet online site
          c. The Mayo Clinic’s webpage on eating

          *

          20. Select the statement that is TRUE:
          a. The Mediterranean diet builds on inexpensive food that the poor, working class people ate traditionally.
          b. If researchers look at other regions of the world, no similar diets or health implications exist.
          c. Most pharmacists and techs instinctively follow a Mediterranean diet and can explain it to patients.

          References

          Full List of References

          1. Statovci D, Aguilera M, MacSharry J, Melgar S. The impact of Western diet and nutrients on the microbiota and immune response at mucosal interfaces. Front Immunol. 2017;8:838.
          2. Mozaffarian D, Hao T, Rimm EB, Willett WC, Hu FB. Changes in diet and lifestyle and long-term weight gain in men and women. N Engl J Med. 2011;364(25):2392-404.
          3. Crittenden AN, Schnorr SL. Current views on hunter-gatherer nutrition and the evolution of the human diet. Am J Phys Anthropol. 2017;162(Suppl 63):84-109.
          4. Veile A. Hunter-gatherer diets and human behavioral evolution. Physiol Behav. 2018;193(Pt B):190-195.
          5. de Silva PS, Luben R, Shrestha SS, Khaw KT, Hart AR. Dietary arachidonic and oleic acid intake in ulcerative colitis etiology: a prospective cohort using 7-day food diaries. Eur J Gastroenterol Hepatol. 2014; 26(1):11-18.
          6. Knight R, McDonald D. Our second genome. Imagine. 2013;1:26-29.
          7. Piccini, F. (2018). Diet-Microbiota Interactions. November, 2018. Florence, Italy.
          8. Menees S, Chey W. The gut microbiome and irritable bowel syndrome. F1000Res. 2018;7:F1000.
          9. Tang WH, Hazen SL. The Gut Microbiome and Its Role in Cardiovascular Diseases. Circulation. 2017;135(11):1008–1010.
          10. Lone JB, Koh WY, Parray HA, et al. Gut Microbiome: Microflora Association with obesity and obesity-related comorbidities. Microbial Pathogenesis. 2018;124:266-271.
          11. Lewis S. Probiotics and Prebiotics: What’s the Difference? Healthline Newsletter. June 3, 2017. https://www.healthline.com/nutrition/probiotics-and-prebiotics. Accessed April 5, 2019.
          12. Turroni, S. (2018). Our ever changing gut microbiota and our health. November, 2018. Florence, Italy.
          13. Soucek P. (2011) Xenobiotics. In: Schwab M. (eds) Encyclopedia of Cancer. Springer, Berlin, Heidelberg.
          14. National Lipid Association. Ancel Keys, PhD (1904-2004). Available at www.lipid.org/sites/default/files/images/mwall/Ancel_Keys.pdf. Accessed April 5, 2019.
          15. Keys A, Taylor HL, Blackburn H, Brozek J, Anderson JT, Simonson E. Coronary heart disease among Minnesota business and professional men followed fifteen years. Circulation. 1963;28:381-395.
          16. Larsen CS. Animal source foods and human health during evolution. J Nutr. 2003;133(11 Suppl 2):3893S-3897S. 17. Keys, Ancel, and Margaret Keys. 1975. How to eat well and stay well the Mediterranean way. Doubleday, Garden City, NY.p4
          18. Yerushalmy J, Hilleboe H. Fat in the diet and mortality from heart disease; a methodologic note. N Y State J Med. 1957;57(14):2343-2354.
          19. Keys A, Menotti A, Aravanis C, et al. The seven countries study: 2,289 deaths in 15 years. Prev Med. 1984;13(2):141-154.
          20. Shreiner AB, Kao JY, Young VB. The gut microbiome in health and in disease. Curr Opin Gastroenterol. 2015;31(1):69-75. 21. Mayo Clinic. (2019). Mediterranean diet: A heart-healthy eating plan. [online] Available at: https://www.mayoclinic.org/healthy-lifestyle/nutrition-andhealthy-eating/in-depth/mediterranean-diet/art-20047801. Accessed April 2, 2019.
          22. Mendelson, Scott D. “Diets for Weight Loss and Metabolic Syndrome.” ScienceDirect, Academic Press, 20 May 2008, www.sciencedirect.com/topics/medicine-anddentistry/mediterranean-diet. Accessed April 5, 2019.
          23. [No author.] Bread. The Columbia Encyclopedia, 6th Ed, Encyclopedia.com, 2018, www.encyclopedia.com/sports-andeveryday-life/food-and-drink/food-and-cooking/bread. Accessed April 5, 2019.
          24. United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization. What is Intangible Cultural Heritage? (n.d.). Available at https://ich.unesco.org/en/what-is-intangible-heritage-00003. Accessed April 2, 2019.
          25. UNESCO - Mediterranean diet. (n.d.). Retrieved from https://ich.unesco.org/en/RL/mediterranean-diet-00884. Accessed April 2, 2019.
          26. Estruch R, Ros E, Salas-Salvadó J, et al; PREDIMED Study Investigators. Primary prevention of cardiovascular disease with a Mediterranean diet supplemented with extra-virgin olive oil or nuts. N Engl J Med. 2018;378(25):e34.
          27. Estruch R, Ros E, Salas-Salvadó J, et al. Primary prevention of cardiovascular disease with a Mediterranean diet. N Engl J Med. 2013;368:1279-1290.
          28. Staff, A. (2018, June 22). PREDIMED Study Retraction and Republication. Retrieved from https://www.hsph.harvard.edu/nutritionsource/2018/06/22/predimed-retraction-republication/. Accessed April 5, 2019.
          29. Dernini S, Berry EM, Serra-Majem L, et al. Med Diet 4.0: the Mediterranean diet with four sustainable benefits. Public Health Nutr. 2017;20(7):1322-1330.
          30. Esposito K, Maiorino MI, Bellastella G, Panagiotakos DB, Giugliano D. Mediterranean diet for type 2 diabetes: cardiometabolic benefits. Endocrine. 2017;56(1):27-32.
          31. Tosti V, Bertozzi B, Fontana L. Health benefits of the Mediterranean Diet: metabolic and molecular mechanisms. J Gerontol A Biol Sci Med Sci. 2018;73(3):318-326.
          32 Kerstetter, J., Pizzighelli,E., Serena, G. (2018). Florence School Lunch: A Unique and Delicious Lunch Experience for Children. November, 2018. Florence, Italy.
          33. Allergy Statistics. http://barbfeick.com/vaccinations/allergy/403-statistics.htm#Italy. Accessed April 26, 2019.
          34. Relationship with cardiometabolic disorders and polypharmacy. J Nutr Health Aging. 2018;22(1):73-81.
          35. Zinöcker MK, Lindseth IA. The western diet-microbiomehost interaction and its role in metabolic disease. Nutrients. 2018;10(3):365.
          36. So D, Whelan K, Rossi M, et al. Dietary fiber intervention on gut microbiota composition in healthy adults: a systematic review and meta-analysis, Am J Clin Nutr. 2018;107(6):965-983.
          37. Bull MJ, Plummer NT. Part 1: The human gut microbiome in health and disease. Integr Med (Encinitas). 2014;13(6):17-22.
          38. Haro C, Garcia-Carpintero S, Alcala-Diaz JF, et al. The gut microbial community in metabolic syndrome patients is modified by diet. J Nutr Biochem. 2016;27:27-31.
          39. American Heart Association. What is the "Mediterranean" diet? Available at https://www.heart.org/en/healthyliving/healthy-eating/eat-smart/nutrition-basics/mediterraneandiet. Accessed July 23, 2019..
          40. Cardiac Rehabilitation UK. Mediterranen diet score card. Available at http://www.cardiacrehabilitation.org.uk/docs/Mediterranean-Diet-Score.pdf. Accessed July 23, 2019.
          41. Gleeson JR. Fish, fruit, healthy fats: What should heart disease patients eat? May 29, 2019. Available at https://healthblog.uofmhealth.org/heart-health/fish-fruithealthy-fats-what-should-heart-disease-patients-eat. Accessed July 23, 2019.

          Sugar, You’re Going Down: Recognition and Management of Hyperglycemic Crises

          Learning Objectives

          After completing this continuing education activity, pharmacists will be able to

          • REVIEW the definition and causes of hyperglycemic crises, including diabetic ketoacidosis (DKA) and hyperosmolar hyperglycemic state (HHS)
          • DISCUSS the pathophysiology and presentation of DKA and HHS
          • OUTLINE treatment recommendations for DKA and HHS
          • APPLY strategies for optimizing DKA and HHS management

          After completing this continuing education activity, pharmacy technicians will be able to

          • REVIEW the definition and causes of hyperglycemic crises, including diabetic ketoacidosis (DKA) and hyperosmolar hyperglycemic state (HHS)
          • DISCUSS the pathophysiology and presentation of DKA and HHS
          • OUTLINE treatment recommendations for DKA and HHS
          • RECOGNIZE when patients require pharmacist intervention for DKA and HHS

            Release Date:

            Release Date: October 15, 2025

            Expiration Date: October 15, 2028

            Course Fee

            Pharmacists: $7

            Pharmacy Technicians: $4

            ACPE UANs

            Pharmacist: 0009-0000-25-061-H01-P

            Pharmacy Technician: 0009-0000-25-061-H01-T

            Session Codes

            Pharmacist: 25YC61-TFG98

            Pharmacy Technician: 25YC61-FGT89

            Accreditation Hours

            2.0 hours of CE

            Accreditation Statements

            The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy is accredited by the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education as a provider of continuing pharmacy education.  Statements of credit for the online activity ACPE UAN 0009-0000-25-061-H01-P/T  will be awarded when the post test and evaluation have been completed and passed with a 70% or better. Your CE credits will be uploaded to your CPE monitor profile within 2 weeks of completion of the program.

             

            Disclosure of Discussions of Off-label and Investigational Drug Use

            The material presented here does not necessarily reflect the views of The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy or its co-sponsor affiliates. These materials may discuss uses and dosages for therapeutic products, processes, procedures and inferred diagnoses that have not been approved by the United States Food and Drug Administration. A qualified health care professional should be consulted before using any therapeutic product discussed. All readers and continuing education participants should verify all information and data before treating patients or employing any therapies described in this continuing education activity.

            Faculty

            Amy Nieto, BS
            PharmD Candidate 2026
            University of Connecticut
            Storrs, CT
             
            Jeannette Y. Wick RPh, FBA, FASCP
            Director Office of Professional Pharmacy Development
            UConn School of Pharmacy
            Storrs, CT
             

            Faculty Disclosure

            In accordance with the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education (ACPE) Criteria for Quality and Interpretive Guidelines, The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy requires that faculty disclose any relationship that the faculty may have with commercial entities whose products or services may be mentioned in the activity.

            Amy Nieto BS, PharmD Candidate 2026 has no relationships with ineligible companies and therefore have nothing to disclose.

            Jeannette Y. Wick RPh, FBA, FASCP  has no relationships with ineligible companies and therefore have nothing to disclose.

            ABSTRACT

            Hyperglycemic crises—including diabetic ketoacidosis (DKA) and hyperosmolar hyperglycemic state (HHS)—are becoming an increasingly common complication of diabetes mellitus. Over the last decade, admission rates for hyperglycemic crises have increased more than 55%. Knowledge of these crises is critical due to their high prevalence. DKA and HHS occur due to irregularities of glucose, ketones, the acid-base balance, and more. These abnormalities can result in typical signs of hyperglycemia (e.g., polydipsia, polyuria) or more aggressive symptoms or complications, such as a cognitive dysfunction or cerebral edema, respectively. Pharmacologic treatment options for DKA and HHS include fluid resuscitation, insulin infusion, and replacement of electrolytes. Managing DKA and HHS requires continuous monitoring. Clinicians adjust ongoing treatment based on the results of laboratory markers; these markers can also be used to determine resolution. Pharmacists are well-positioned to aid in recommending treatment options or adjustments and counselling patients during discharge. Pharmacy technicians can recognize medication-related issues and escalate concerns to the pharmacist, helping the team determine possible precipitating events.

            CONTENT

            Content

            INTRODUCTION

            It’s been a stressful week for Lance. Lance Sugarman, a 49-year-old male with a history of poorly-controlled type 2 diabetes (T2D), arrives at the emergency department (ED) with complaints of abdominal pain, pain and burning while urinating, and severe dehydration. Connie—his wife—shares with staff that he has become increasingly confused and disoriented over the last three days. In the ED, Lance discloses that he recently lost his health insurance coverage. As a result, he began to ration his insulin glargine by taking less than his prescribed amount (10 units once daily). His last dose was four days ago. Paramedics report that the patient has a peculiar, fruity smell. Point-of-care (POC) testing also notes several laboratory abnormalities (see Table 1). Based on these laboratory results and the patient’s presentation, Lance is admitted to the intensive care unit (ICU). Most importantly, the team has a diagnosis in mind and is prepared to initiate therapy.

             

            Table 1. Lance Sugarman’s (MR1234567) Laboratory Findings
            Test Results (normal range)
            Blood glucose 442 mg/dL (70-110 mg/dL)
            Venous pH 6.72 (7.31-7.41)
            Urine ketone strip 4+ (< 2+)*
            β-hydroxybutyrate 5.2 mmol/L (< 0.5 mmol/L)
            Serum bicarbonate 12 mmol/L (21-28 mmol/L)
            Serum osmolality 282 mOsm/kg (275-295 mOsm/kg)
            Serum potassium 3.1 mmol/L (3.5-5.0 mmol/L)
            *A urine ketone of less than 2+ is consistent with the absence of ketosis or the presence of mild ketosis, which is considered normal.

             

            PAUSE AND PONDER: What laboratory markers are you concerned about? What would be a part of your differential diagnosis?

             

            Clearly, Lance’s blood glucose (BG) is dangerously elevated. Hyperglycemic crises—an umbrella term for diabetic ketoacidosis (DKA) and hyperosmolar hyperglycemic state (HHS)—are life-threatening medical emergencies associated with uncontrolled diabetes mellitus (DM).1 Since 2009, hospital admission rates in the United States (U.S.) for DKA and HHS have increased, and this trend is present globally as well.2,3 Increasing rates of DKA and HHS can be attributed to higher medication costs, particularly insulin, and the rise in DM incidence, which increased from 200 million cases in 1990 to 830 million cases in 2021.3,4

             

            Patients with DKA and HHS present with severe hyperglycemia (elevated BG).5 HHS has markedly higher BG levels than DKA; BG levels can reach 600 mg/dL in DKA compared to 1,000 mg/dL in HHS.5,6 Each diabetic emergency has specific defining criteria outside of hyperglycemia. DKA is characterized by an increased concentration of ketone bodies (metabolites of fatty acids) in the blood or urine and metabolic acidosis (a buildup of acid in the body).5,7 HHS, on the other hand, is defined by hyperosmolarity (a higher than normal concentration of dissolved substances in the blood or other bodily fluid) and the absence of ketoacidosis (a buildup of ketones in the body).6

             

            Many signs and symptoms of DKA and HHS overlap, such as dehydration in the setting of an elevated BG, making the clinical work-up and distinction difficult.6 To make matters more difficult, 27% of hospital admissions for hyperglycemic crises are for a mixed DKA-HHS presentation.5 Patients with a mixed DKA-HHS presentation have both ketoacidosis and hyperosmolarity.8 For the sake of simplicity, this continuing education will focus on DKA and HHS as separate entities. The interdisciplinary team should, however, be aware that mixed DKA-HHS exists. It is critical that the healthcare team—including pharmacists and pharmacy technicians—possesses the knowledge to differentiate between DKA and HHS to appropriately treat and manage patients.

             

            BACKGROUND

            Prevalence and Risk Factors

            DKA and HHS make up approximately 1% of all hospitalizations in people with DM; hospital admission rates have increased by 55% over the last decade. 5,9 DKA and HHS are complications of DM, but they do not occur at the same rate in both type 1 diabetes (T1D) and T2D. Prevalence of hyperglycemic crises in the U.S. is higher in patients with T1D (44.5 per 1,000 person-years) compared to patients with T2D (3.2 per 1,000 person-years).10 Moreover, DKA occurs most often in those aged 18 to 44 years with T1D compared to HHS, which commonly impacts an older subset of patients aged 45 to 64 years with T2D.5  Interestingly, DKA is the initial presentation—the clue that an undiagnosed patient has T1D—for around 6% to 21% of patients with T1D.5

            Increasing technological advancements for monitoring BG and managing insulin regimens may be associated with decreased incidence or prompt recognition of hyperglycemic crises.5 Additionally, accurate monitoring helps prevent recurrent episodes.5 However, real-world data to corroborate this idea is still needed. The SIDEBAR discusses options for BG monitoring.

             

             

            SIDEBAR: Sweet Surveillance5,11-17

            Early detection of DKA and HHS—via warning signs and urine or blood checks—allows patients or clinicians to start preventive measures or treatment promptly. The American Diabetes Association and European Association for the Study of Diabetes (ADA/EASD) recommend patients with T1D use a continuous glucose monitor (CGM) as the monitoring method of choice; patients with T2D may also use CGM.

             

            CGMs are automated devices that can continuously estimate a patient’s glucose level at any time. With three parts—a small sensor inserted into the skin, a transmitter, and a receiver (which is often a SmartPhone)—a CGM provides real-time updates, allowing patients to take preventive measures for hypo- or hyper-glycemia. A blood glucose meter (BGM), on the other hand, is not inserted into the skin. Instead, a BGM uses blood samples collected from fingerstick devices (known as lancing devices or lancets) to calculate BG. CGMs, however, are often preferred due to portability and, thus, convenience.

             

            Other tests to consider for DKA, specifically, are ketone concentration tests. Ketones can be measured by urine dipsticks (which measure acetoacetic acid) or blood samples (which measure β-hydroxybutyrate, the predominant ketone in DKA). Blood ketones provide real-time measurements. Urine ketones, instead, lag the concentration of blood ketones due to the shift of acetoacetic acid to β-hydroxybutyrate that occurs during early DKA. Thus, urine ketones may underestimate a patient’s current level of ketonemia (presence of ketone bodies in the blood) and are not preferred for diagnosing or monitoring DKA.

             

            Testing for BG and/or ketones allows patients to contact their providers or an emergency call service in a timely manner; this, according to the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention and ADA/EASD, can reduce DKA or HHS admissions.

             

             

            Mortality is higher among those with HHS compared to DKA (5% to 20% compared to less than 1%, respectively).18,19 Several factors are attributed to HHS’s higher degree of mortality, including precipitating factors, age, and complications. Vascular complications, such as stroke or peripheral arterial and venous thrombosis, contribute to HHS’s high mortality rate.20

             

            Pathophysiology

            In the U.S., 38 million (or one in 10) adults have DM, a group of metabolic diseases resulting from defects in insulin’s action, secretion, or both.21,22 Insulin’s major action is reducing BG levels by driving glucose into cells.23 When insulin becomes dysregulated (i.e., in DM), a patient’s blood sugar may rise. An elevated blood glucose is referred to as hyperglycemia. Though both T1D and T2D can lead to hyperglycemia, the preceding mechanism is different. To explain simply24,25

            • T1D is caused by the autoimmune destruction of β cells in the pancreas, leading to insufficient insulin secretion or absolute insulin deficiency.
            • T2D is caused by a non-immune mediated process resulting in insulin resistance (or the body’s lack of response to insulin) which, over several years, may lead to relative insulin deficiency.

            Insulin dysregulation leads not only to the development of diabetes, but to the development of hyperglycemic crises.

             

            Insulin insufficiency and an increase in counterregulatory hormones—including cortisol, epinephrine, glucagon, growth hormone—are hallmarks of both types of hyperglycemic crises. The degree of the insulin deficit, however, plays a role in distinguishing between DKA and HHS; DKA is characterized by severe insulin deficiency compared to HHS, where less severe insulin deficiency is present.5

             

            Glucagon is the primary counterregulatory hormone in DKA. It should be known, however, glucagon alteration is not essential for DKA to develop.5,7 In DKA, changes to the glucagon-to-insulin ratio can lead to alterations in glucose synthesis, regulation, and utilization, resulting in hyperglycemia.5 Simultaneously, the severe insulin deficiency in DKA, along with the irregular counterregulatory hormones, results in release of free fatty acids (FFAs). Excess FFAs are oxidized to ketone bodies—acetone, acetoacetate, and β-hydroxybutyrate—leading to ketonemia and metabolic acidosis.5,7,19

             

            Ketoacidosis does not occur in HHS. Unlike DKA, sufficient insulin is present in patients with HHS, which prevents ketoacidosis from developing.5 Glucose production and use in the patient’s body, however, is still impacted, leading to hyperglycemia.5 HHS is also characterized by osmotic diuresis. Osmotic diuresis is increased urination due to the presence of certain substances (i.e., glucose) in the fluid filtered by the kidneys, creating a pressure imbalance between solutes and water in the kidneys. This process prevents water reabsorption and, instead, promotes water excretion in the form of urine. Osmotic diuresis occurs from reduced fluid intake (often caused by a precipitating event) and leads to HHS’s characteristic hyperosmolar state alongside severe dehydration and cognitive impairment.5,7,18

             

            PAUSE AND PONDER: What risk factors might you consider red flags for identifying these hyperglycemic crises in your pharmacy setting?

             

            Precipitating Events and Risk Factors

            Patients with DM present with hyperglycemic crises for several reasons, including5,7

            • difficulties in managing insulin therapy, such as omission or non-adherence
            • metabolic stress
            • intercurrent illness (a disease that occurs during the course of another disease) or infection

            Challenges with therapy management is the most common cause of a hyperglycemic crisis in the U.S. (41% to 59.6% of patients). Worldwide, however, the predominant precipitating factor of a hyperglycemic crisis (occurring in 14% to 58% of cases) is intercurrent illness or infection. Common infectious causes include pneumonia and urinary tract infections (UTIs).7,26

             

            Several clinical and non-clinical factors put patients at risk for hyperglycemic crises. General risk factors for both DKA and HHS include5,9,26

            • socioeconomic status (e.g., low income, low educational achievement)
            • history of previous hypo- or hyper-glycemic crises
            • comorbid chronic health or behavioral health conditions, such as DM-related conditions (e.g., neuropathy), kidney disease, eating disorders, and depression
            • alcohol and/or substance use
            • certain medications, such as sodium-glucose cotransporter-2 inhibitors (SGLT2i; e.g., canagliflozin, dapagliflozin, empagliflozin) and anti-psychotics (e.g., clozapine, olanzapine, quetiapine, risperidone)
            • elevated hemoglobin A1c (HbA1c)

             

            Understanding risk factors and events that may trigger hyperglycemic crises is important for preventing both DKA and HHS. Counseling is important in these patient populations, specifically regarding monitoring (e.g., signs, symptoms, ketones, and BG) and self-management.9

             

            CLINICAL PRESENTATION AND DIAGNOSIS

            Signs and Symptoms of DKA and HHS

            With both crises, patients may present with a variety of symptoms, with some overlapping. The differences in presentation, outlined in Table 2, can help pharmacy technicians determine when an individual may require pharmacist intervention and guide pharmacists to recommend appropriate treatment.

             

            Table 2. Characteristic Features of DKA and HHS5,7,20,27,28
              DKA HHS
            Epidemiology ·       T1D

            ·       Younger

            ·       T2D

            ·       Older

            Onset ·       Rapid, hours to days ·       Slow, days to a week
            Cognitive function ·       Mild-to-moderate confusion ·       Severe confusion, seizures, or coma
            Compensation ·       Kussmaul respirations ·       None
            Symptoms ·       Abdominal pain

            ·       Mild dehydration

            ·       Mild weight loss

            ·       Nausea

            ·       Polydipsia

            ·       Polyuria

            ·       Vomiting

            ·       Higher degree of dehydration

            ·       Higher degree of weight loss

            ·       Polydipsia

            ·       Polyuria

            Additional signs ·       Tachycardia

            ·       Tachypnea

            ·       Poor skin turgor
            ABBREVIATIONS: DKA, diabetic ketoacidosis; HHS, hyperosmolar hyperglycemic state; T1D, type 1 diabetes; T2D, type 2 diabetes

             

            When any patient presents with typical symptoms of hyperglycemia, such as polydipsia (excessive thirst), polyuria (excessive urination), and a change in cognitive state, clinicians should consider DKA or HHS in their differential diagnosis.9 However, it is important to be aware that not all patients present with these common signs; for example, patients with euglycemic DKA secondary to SGLT2i therapy often present with less polyuria and polydipsia.7 The SIDEBAR provides more information on euglycemic DKA.

             

            Kussmaul respirations—a pattern of deep breathing and hyperventilation accompanied by a fruity odor—is a manifestation specific to DKA.5,29 As previously discussed, patients with DKA have ketoacidosis, unlike HHS. Kussmaul respirations are the body’s compensatory response to the metabolic acidosis present during DKA as an attempt to normalize the disrupted acid-base balance.30

             

             

            SIDEBAR: Sweet Lies: Euglycemic DKA5,9,31,32

            DKA is a common complication of DM characterized by ketonemia, metabolic acidosis, and hyperglycemia (serum glucose at or exceeding 200 mg/dL [11.1 mmol/L]). However, 10% of patients present with an uncommon complication of DM and presentation of DKA—euglycemic DKA. Euglycemic DKA occurs without hyperglycemia but rather euglycemia (normal serum glucose of 200 mg/dL [11.1 mmol/L] or less). (PRO TIP: the prefix “eu-” means good or well, and in medicine is often used to mean “normal.”) Patients with euglycemic DKA, like DKA and HHS, have an insulin deficiency.

             

            Without clear signs of hyperglycemia present (e.g., polydipsia, polyuria), diagnosis or treatment may be delayed. Patients presenting with euglycemic DKA, therefore, are at risk of increased mortality and morbidity. Common causes of euglycemic DKA include

            • alcohol use
            • exogenous insulin injection
            • liver failure
            • pregnancy
            • SGLT2i therapy
            • starvation

             

            Of these, SGLT2i therapy accounts for the greatest number of euglycemic DKA cases. Cases of euglycemic DKA have continued to increase over the last couple of years. This has resulted in changes to the guideline recommendations for diagnosing DKA. The ADA/EASD, Joint British Diabetes Societies for Inpatient Care (JBDS), American Association of Clinical Endocrinology (AACE), and Diabetes Technology Society (DTS) recommend diagnosing DKA with either a blood glucose of greater than 200 mg/dL (11.1 mmol/L; previously 250 mg/dL [13.9 mmol/L]) or any BG level in a patient who presents with a history of DM.

             

             

            DKA and HHS Diagnosis

            Hiding is not their forte; DKA and HHS give their diagnostic criteria away immediately! Literally. It’s in their names. According to the ADA/EASD/JBDS/AACE/DTS Hyperglycemic Crises in Adults with Diabetes Consensus Report, clinicians diagnose DKA based on the presence of all three of the following criteria5,9:

            1. Diabetes/Hyperglycemia: an elevated BG level OR a prior history of DM regardless of BG level
            2. Ketonemia: an elevated ketone body concentration in the blood OR urine
            3. Acidosis: a diminished venous pH AND/OR reduced serum bicarbonate level

             

            Clinicians diagnose HHS based on the presence of all three of the following criteria:

            1. Hyperosmolality: an elevated calculated effective or total serum osmolality
            2. Hyperglycemia: an elevated BG level
            3. AbSence of ketonemia (ketone body concentration is not elevated in the blood OR urine) AND acidosis (venous pH AND serum bicarbonate are within normal limits)

             

            Table 3 lists laboratory markers mentioned in the diagnostic criteria for DKA and HHS. Upon reviewing Table 3, revisit Lance’s laboratory findings (see Table 1) and his clinical picture to determine his diagnosis. His BG clearly demonstrates a hyperglycemic crisis, and these two types are related but not the same.

             

            Table 3. Laboratory Markers for Diagnosis of DKA and HHS5
            Laboratory marker DKA HHS
            Glucose ≥ 200 mg/dL (11.1 mmol/L)

            OR

            history of DM

            ≥ 600 mg/dL (33.3 mmol/L)
            BHB concentration

             

            ≥ 3.0 mmol/L

            OR

            urine ketone strip ≥ 2+

            < 3.0 mmol/L

            OR

            urine ketone strip < 2+

            Urine ketone strip
            Venous pH pH < 7.3

            AND/OR

            < 18 mmol/L

            pH ≥ 7.3

            AND

            ≥ 15 mmol/L

            Serum bicarbonate
            Serum osmolality NA > 300 mOsm/kg (calculated effective)

            OR

            > 320 mOsm/kg (total)

            ABBREVIATIONS: BHB, β-hydroxybutyrate; DKA, diabetic ketoacidosis; DM, diabetes mellitus; HHS, hyperosmolar hyperglycemic state

             

            Patients and clinicians can measure ketone body concentrations using several methods, including urine, serum, and blood testing. Urine and serum testing measures concentration of acetoacetic acid while blood testing quantifies the concentration of β-hydroxybutyrate, which is preferred due to higher specificity for DKA.5 The patient care team should also acknowledge the potential overlaps in presentation. Clinicians diagnose HHS based on the absence of metabolic acidosis, indicated by normal venous pH and bicarbonate levels, and the absence of ketonemia, shown by low β-hydroxybutyrate or negative urine ketones. However, patients with HHS may have mild ketonemia due to modest ketone production, though ketone levels are generally much lower than in DKA.18 Similarly, patients with HHS may have mild metabolic acidosis resulting from dehydration secondary to the hyperosmolar state, as reduced volume promotes lactic acid production that disrupts the acid-base balance.18

             

            Given his combination of laboratory abnormalities and clinical presentation (i.e., signs and symptoms), Lance from the patient case presented is experiencing a classic episode of DKA.

             

            Patients suspected of having DKA or HHS must be referred for emergency evaluation, treatment, and a thorough work-up.7 All work-ups should evaluate vital signs and laboratory findings to not only confirm a hyperglycemic crises, but also to narrow down a precipitating event and anticipate complications.5,18,26 Outside of the parameters listed in Table 3, clinicians must measure blood electrolyte levels and perform an electrocardiogram.5 If an infection is the suspected precipitating cause, the ADA/EASD/JBDS/AACE/DTS recommends a urinalysis (urine test) and/or chest X-ray to identify and/or diagnose a UTI or pneumonia, respectively.5,18 Based on lab results, patient history, and final diagnosis, clinicians initiate disease-specific therapy.

             

            Remember the pain and burning sensation Lance reported in the ED? His physician ordered a urinalysis, which found elevated bacteriuria (bacteria in the urine), and a urine culture, which was found to be positive and growing Escherichia coli. Turns out he has a UTI! With this information, the team is prepared to initiate appropriate antibiotics and prepare for complications of UTIs or DKA. This infection is what likely exacerbated his DM and led to this episode of DKA.

             

            TREATMENT OF DKA AND HHS

            Goals of Therapy

            DKA and HHS share several features, including some aspects of treatment and therapeutic goals. Successfully treating hyperglycemic crises requires the following5,33:

            • correction of dehydration
            • correction of hyperglycemia
            • correction of electrolyte imbalance(s)
            • identification and treatment of precipitating event(s)

             

            PAUSE AND PONDER: What medications can be used to lower blood sugar? Which should you use first in a hyperglycemic crisis?

             

            Dehydration

            Intravenous (IV) fluids are first-line therapy for DKA and HHS.7,34 Treatment with IV fluids restores intravascular volume to perfuse organs and tissue, correct electrolyte abnormalities, and resolve metabolic acidosis and ketogenesis.5,7,35 Correcting the fluid deficit aids in decreasing BG and regulating counterregulatory hormone levels.34

             

            The ADA/EASD/JBDS/AACE/DTS recommend isotonic saline—also known as 0.9% sodium chloride (NaCl) or normal saline (NS)—as the fluid of choice for patients without renal or cardiac compromise.5 Use of a balanced crystalloid (e.g., lactated ringers [LR]), however, is an acceptable choice.5 During the first two to four hours, the administration rate is 500 to 1,000 mL/hour.5 Subsequent fluid replacement (i.e., 0.45% or 0.9% NS) and administration rate is based on hemodynamic stability and the patient’s fluid status.5,7

             

            Balanced crystalloids contain sodium, potassium, and chloride content resembling that of normal extracellular fluid and cause fewer adverse effects on acid-base balance compared to NS.5,36 A recent systematic review and meta-analysis of eight randomized controlled trials involving 482 patients found that LR shortened the time to DKA resolution and length of hospital stay.36 Patients treated with NS required 3.51 additional hours to recover from DKA and remained hospitalized for nearly an additional day (specifically, 0.89 days).36 LR may decrease costs for patients but may increase costs for hospitals. One liter of LR typically costs more than twice that of one liter of NS, with one source indicating they cost $4.50 and $2, respectively.37 While research suggests LR resolves hyperglycemic emergencies faster, the patient-care team and hospital’s procurement team must weigh the potential increase in clinical benefits against the increase in cost. Therefore, the ADA/EASD/JBDS/AACE/DTS guidelines recommend physicians choose IV fluids based on availability, cost, and patient-specific information.5

             

            Fluid therapy decreases BG—slowly, but surely. In DKA, for example, a patient’s BG can fall to less than 250 mg/dL in four to eight hours.5 Using concomitant insulin compounds the reduction. If not closely monitored, patients become at risk of having a hypoglycemic (low BG) episode. As a result, 5% or 10% dextrose is a recommended addition to the fluid regimen once BG falls to less than 250 mg/dL to maintain BG and allow for ketoacidosis to resolve.5,38

             

            Hyperglycemia

            Acute Management

            Insulin, like fluid management, decreases BG and regulates ketogenesis.35 However, patients undergoing hyperglycemic crises should never receive insulin in place of or before fluid therapy. Insulin administration shifts fluids from the intravascular space into the cells, which can exacerbate hypovolemia (decreased blood volume) and lead to severe hypotension (decreased blood pressure).39 For this reason, insulin is recommended following initial fluid resusicitation.39

             

            Short-acting, IV insulin (e.g., insulin regular [Humulin R, Novolin R]) is the cornerstone of DKA and HHS management and prescribers should start IV insulin as soon as a patient is diagnosed and adequately hydrated.5 Rapid-acting insulin (e.g., insulin lispro [Humalog]) is considered for the treatment of mild or moderate DKA but not HHS.5,19

             

            The continuous insulin infusion rate used in DKA depends on a facility’s protocols and the severity of the patient’s condition. Preferred options include a fixed-rate starting at 0.1 units/kg/hour or a nurse-driven protocol (variable rates).5 Nurse-driven protocols and algorithms allow nurses to adjust treatment based on laboratory results. Different providers might choose different rates or fluids to treat patients, while a nurse-driven protocol makes sure all patients receive all the same guideline-driven medications, unless otherwise contraindicated.40 If obtaining venous access is delayed for any reason, it is recommended to initiate an intramuscular (IM) bolus dose (0.1 units/kg) of insulin.33

             

            HHS treatment depends on the presence of ketosis (metabolic state in which the body burns fat for energy), ketonemia, and acidosis. The ADA/EASD/JBDS/AACE/DTS recommends initiating insulin at 0.05 units/kg/hour in patients with HHS, no ketosis or mild-to-moderate ketonemia, and no acidosis.5

             

            Regardless of the crisis or regimen chosen, the insulin rate requires adjustment—like with fluid replacement—once BG falls below 250 mg/dL.5,34  Insulin’s rate should be corrected (based on institution specific protocols) to maintain BG at 150 to 200 mg/dL in DKA or 200 to 250 mg/dL in HHS until resolution (to be discussed later) of either crisis.5

             

            Maintenance Insulin Therapy

            Following resolution of DKA or HHS and when patients can tolerate food and drink, they should transition from IV to subcutaneous insulin. During this transition period, patients are at an increased risk of hyperglycemia, ketoacidosis, and recurrent DKA or HHS.5,18 IV insulin’s half-life is short, around less than 10 minutes.41 Thus, to prevent these complications, an overlap between discontinuation of IV insulin and the initiation of subcutaneous insulin must occur over one to two hours.5,33

             

            The treatment team designs the patient’s subcutaneous insulin regimen based on current clinical situation, previous insulin use, and assessment of insulin requirements.41 The ADA/EASD/JBDS/AACE/DTS recommends that patients with known DM and previous insulin use receive their at-home regimen.5 For patients without known DM or prior insulin use, various methods are available to estimate total daily dose (TDD) of insulin. No consensus on a preferred method is available, but approaches often used include5,41

            1. Weight-based calculation: 0.5 to 0.6 units/kg/day for insulin-naive patients; 0.3 units/kg/day for patients with risk factors for hypoglycemia, such as kidney failure
            2. Pre-admission insulin requirements: for patients with history of insulin use prior to hospital admission, consider previous TDD of insulin and evaluate outpatient HbA1c levels
            3. Hourly inpatient IV insulin requirements: uses the patient’s current in-hospital summation of hourly IV insulin requirements; evaluate a several-hour period (typically six-to-eight hours) during which the patient’s BG remains at goal and the IV insulin rate is stable

             

            With TDD calculated, it is time to choose an appropriate insulin regimen. Insulin regimens should be dosed properly to ensure 24-hour coverage.5,41 Additionally, certain insulin types are preferred over others. The ADA/EASD/JBDS/AACE/DTS recommended therapy is a basal-bolus (basal and rapid-acting) insulin regimen, as it is closely mimics physiologic state and reduces hypoglycemia risk.5 Short-acting insulin regimens are an acceptable alternative, but they may require a change in frequency (i.e., from once daily to twice daily) to ensure adequate coverage.5 SGLT2is should not be initiated or continued in a hospitalized patient.5 Non-insulin agents—excluding SGLT2is—may be considered in a patient with T2D undergoing insulin therapy or if they are ketosis-prone. Non-insulin agents are contraindicated in patients with T1D.5

             

            Electrolyte Imbalances

            Electrolyte disorders—most commonly of potassium—occur in both DKA and HHS. Potassium-associated disorders may result from osmotic diuresis (in HHS) or metabolic acidosis (in DKA).5,18 Patients may present with low potassium (hypokalemia), normal potassium, or high potassium (hyperkalemia). One-third of patients arrive to the hospital in a hyperkalemic state, while the remaining patients typically present with normal potassium levels.42 (Potassium will decline within 48 hours of initiating treatment for DKA or HHS, like insulin therapy, so additional treatments for hyperkalemia are not required.5)

             

            A small proportion of patients—5% to 10%—have low potassium (less than 3.5 mmol/L) at admission.5 In this population, insulin initiation should be delayed. Insulin’s purpose in DKA and HHS management is to decrease BG. However, insulin also stimulates the movement of potassium into the cells, which may result in hypokalemia during infusion.5,18 Potassium replacement is initiated at 10 mmol/hour in individuals with hypokalemia.5 Once serum potassium is greater than 3.5 mmol/L, insulin infusion can begin.

             

            During DKA or HHS management, potassium serum levels are maintained at a goal level of 4 to 5 mmol/L.5 (Potassium is often presented in mEq/L; 1 mmol/L of potassium is equal to 1 mEq/L of potassium.) If not monitored and maintained at goal, hypokalemia may develop in 55% of patients undergoing insulin and fluid therapy.5,43 Without replenishment, patients are at risk of life-threatening arrythmias, myocardial infarction, and respiratory muscle weakness.18,42

             

            Upon treatment initiation with fluids and insulin, potassium levels will begin to decrease.5 If the team fails to monitor hyperkalemic patients closely, they may develop hypokalemia. Potassium replacement (20 to 30 mmol/L of potassium) is appropriate to add to IV fluids if the serum potassium level falls to 5 mmol/L or less.5,18

             

            Other electrolyte disorders—such as hypomagnesemia (low magnesium), hypophosphatemia (low phosphates), bicarbonate irregularities—are not regularly monitored or treated. It is important, however, to know when repletion is indicated and the available treatment options.5,18,39,42

             

            Hypophosphatemia results from an extracellular shift of phosphate. Severe hypophosphatemia may lead to decreased cardiac function, respiratory failure, rhabdomyolysis, and more.5,26 Phosphate therapy, however, is not indicated in all patients due to risk of hypocalcemia (low calcium) and hypomagnesmia.18,26 Patients with DKA and a phosphate level of less than 1 mg/dL or with evidence of muscle weakness (i.e., respiratory or cardiac compromise) are indicated for phosphate replacement.5,18 Information concerning phosphate replacement for patients with HHS is limited and often extrapolated from data for DKA. The ADA/EASD/JBDS/AACE/DTS recommends using a similar approach in patients with both DKA and HHS.5,18 If indicated, replacement fluids may be enhanced with 20 to 30 mmol of potassium phosphate.5

             

            Low serum levels of bicarbonate are a root cause of metabolic acidosis in DKA. Bicarbonate administration is not typically recommended, however, unless the patient develops severe metabolic acidosis or severe hyperkalemia with a decrease in cardiac function.5,26 Severe metabolic acidosis is defined as a venous pH less than 7.0.5 Clinicians may administer 100 mmol of sodium bicarbonate (8.4% solution) in 400 mL of sterile water every 2 hours to replenish bicarbonate until pH is greater than 7.0.5

             

            Magnesium abnormalities may appear in DKA and HHS but are not commonly treated. Hypomagnesemia may result in arrythmias, which can lead to Torsade’s de Pointes (a life-threatening rapid, abnormal heart rhythm), muscle weakness, and convulsions.18,39 The ADA/EASD/JBDS/AACE/DTS do not provide a recommendation for magnesium replacement initiation or regimen. The American Academy of Family Physicians recommends starting replacement therapy if magnesium levels are less than 1.2 mg/dL, but they do not provide a treatment regimen.26

             

            Returning to the case, Lance’s care team ordered an initial bolus of 1,000 mL/hour of 0.9% NS. After two hours, the team decides to reorder a POC glucose and electrolyte panel, resulting in a glucose drop to 309 mg/dL. Though this is a great initial reduction, Lance is still not at goal. Lance’s physician orders 9.38 units/hour of insulin regular. The pharmacist, however, denies the order. At first the physician believes the order is wrong (it is not; to check yourself, use the patient weight: 93.8 kg). But the pharmacist explains that insulin is currently not indicated since the patient’s electrolyte panel still shows hypokalemia (3.1 mmol/L). Grateful to the pharmacist for a great catch, the physician, instead, orders a potassium replacement regimen. The physician will add insulin to Lance’s regimen once indicated.

             

            ONGOING MANAGEMENT OF DKA AND HHS

            Monitoring

            Patients undergoing treatment for DKA or HHS require continuous monitoring until either crisis is resolved.5 Monitoring allows clinicians to assess treatment responses, adjust treatment regimens, and prevent possible complications.

             

            Monitoring parameters to be reviewed during the treatment of DKA and HHS include5,18,26

            • serum BG, every hour
            • electrolytes (i.e., potassium, sodium), β-hydroxybutyrate, phosphate, renal function (serum creatinine), and venous pH, every two to four hours
            • serum osmolality (only in HHS), every two to four hours

             

            Resolution

            The criteria for determining resolution of DKA and HHS differ, except for serum glucose; even then, the preferred glucose ranges are not the same. Table 4 provides details on the specific metabolic parameters assessed when determining resolution of DKA or HHS.

             

            Table 4. Criteria for Resolution of DKA and HHS5,18
              DKA HHS
            Serum glucose < 200 mg/dL (11.1 mmol/L) < 250 mg/dL (13.9 mmol/L)
            Plasma ketones < 0.6 mmol/L NA
            Serum bicarbonate ≥ 18 mmol/L NA
            Venous pH ≥ 7.3 NA
            Serum osmolality NA < 300 mOsm/kg
            Urine output NA > 0.5 mL/kg/hour
            Cognitive status NA Improved, return to normal

             

            Understanding which parameters indicate DKA resolution is important. Equally as important is knowing which values should not be used. The following parameters are used for DKA diagnosis but not to identify crisis resolution5,26,16:

            • Anion gap: Patients undergoing treatment with large volumes of 0.9% NS (which contains a high chloride content) are at risk of hyperchloremic metabolic acidosis. The excess chloride in 0.9% NS displaces bicarbonate which can offset the acid-base balance leading to a seemingly normal anion gap. This may be misleading in assessing resolution of DKA.
            • Urine ketones: These are unreliable in determining resolution due to conversion of β-hydroxybutyrate to acetoacetate (a ketone body excreted in the urine) as acidosis improves, resulting in an increase in urine ketone readings. This may be viewed as DKA worsening when, in reality, blood ketone levels are declining and DKA is resolving.

             

            PAUSE AND PONDER: What complications may you expect to see in DKA or HHS? Which are related to treatment options?

             

            Complications

            Patients with DKA and HHS are at risk for several complications, including

            • acute kidney injury (rapid decline in kidney function)
            • cerebral edema (increased fluid content in the brain tissue)
            • hyperchloremic non-anion gap
            • hypoglycemia
            • hypokalemia
            • metabolic acidosis
            • osmotic demyelinating syndrome (neurologic disorder caused by a rapid increase in sodium)
            • thrombosis (blood clot)

             

            Hypoglycemia and hypokalemia are common, and previous sections discussed their treatments.

             

            Several complications may occur during a hyperglycemic crisis and its management; cerebral edema is the most life-threatening.7 Cerebral edema may occur in DKA and HHS within 12 hours of treatment initiation.19 Though rare in adults, it has a mortality rate of around 30%.5,26

             

            The exact mechanism of development is unknown. In HHS, for example, elevated BG and rapid decrease in BG (from fluid and insulin therapy) can both lead to this complication.18 Rapid BG decline causes an osmotic gradient (a difference in liquid pressure between different compartments) in the brain, causing water to shift into the brain.18

             

            The treatment team must not delay treatment for cerebral edema, even if results of imaging studies are not yet available.5,19 Thus, prompt recognition of signs and symptoms is necessary, which may include26,7

            • altered level of consciousness
            • altered respiration and heart rate
            • incontinence (especially if inappropriate for age)
            • new onset or worsening headache
            • recurrent vomiting

             

            Recommended treatment includes a mannitol infusion with concomitant mechanical ventilation or hypertonic (3%) saline infusion.5,18,19 Specific regimens vary based on the guideline. Both infusion options result in the shift of water from the intracellular compartment to the vascular compartment.19 Slow correction of hyperglycemia and hyperosmolality in patients with HHS prevents cerebral edema.5,18 The decline of hyperglycemia and hyperosmolality should not exceed 90 to 120 mg/dL/hour and 3.0 to 8.0 mOsm/kg/hour, respectively.5 Prompt treatment can prevent neurologic deterioration.7

             

            PHARMACY TEAM IMPACT ON PREVENTION AND MANAGEMENT

            Pharmacists and pharmacy technicians are vital members of the interdisciplinary team. Their roles include collaborating with providers to prevent and manage glycemic crises or recognize signs of a crisis.15,44

             

            In the inpatient setting, pharmacists can improve outcomes for patients with DKA and HHS by ensuring clinicians order fluid, insulin, and electrolyte regimens (dose and rate) correctly.44 Admission medication reconciliations, acquired by a medication history technician, can help the patient care team determine possible medication use issues at home.44 Concerns may include actual medication use, non-adherence, and barriers to adherence.44 These details are important for determining a precipitating event and/or preparing a patient-centered discharge plan to avoid future occurrences. Technicians should escalate their concerns to the pharmacist.

             

            Community and ambulatory care pharmacists can also assist with management and prevention of hyperglycemic crises. In these settings, pharmacists can detect patients at high risk of DKA or HHS. Pharmacists can review and determine adherence patterns (i.e., missing refills or needing refills too soon), insurance coverage, or other social determinants of health.15 Community pharmacists can help patients with limited or no insurance coverage acquire insulin and help insured patients navigate their prescription plan coverage.45

             

            Pharmacists and pharmacy technicians can also leverage their knowledge of hyperglycemic crises to identify at-risk patients in the community setting, acting as an added layer of protection for the community. By recognizing warning signs (“red flags”), technicians can escalate concerns to the pharmacist and pharmacists can recommend immediate referral to the ED. The following signs should prompt immediate medical attention, especially in the setting of a DM diagnosis9,12,13:

            • fruity-smelling deep respirations or hyperventilation
            • decreased cognitive function and/or increasing confusion
            • elevated BG levels
            • elevated urine or blood ketone levels
            • inability to tolerate oral hydration
            • polydipsia or polyuria
            • signs and symptoms of worsening illness

             

            All pharmacists—with or without Certified Diabetes Educator credentials—are well positioned to provide medication counseling and patient education at discharge. This includes guidance on new medication and equipment or adjustments to existing at-home regimens.44-46 Specifically, pharmacists can emphasize the importance of proper medication use, adherence to the prescribed regimen, and consistent monitoring of BG or ketones.45 These interventions support safer recovery and can reduce the risk of complications and future admissions.46

             

            CONCLUSION

            DKA and HHS are complications of DM, although their specific prevalence depends on the type of DM and the patient’s age, both are becoming increasingly common. Goals of treating hyperglycemic crises include correction of dehydration, hyperglycemia, and electrolyte imbalances. Fluid resuscitation, insulin infusion, and, potentially, potassium replacement can treat DKA and HHS. Though these goals and treatments appear straightforward, patient care teams—including pharmacists and pharmacy technicians—must pay close attention to the results of continual monitoring. Without attention to detail, patients may receive inappropriate treatment and be at risk of life-threatening complications. Through verifying or correcting orders (like Lance’s pharmacist) and counseling on new medications or BG monitoring at discharge, pharmacists can help treat a hyperglycemic crisis and prevent future episodes. Pharmacy technicians can assist in determining a precipitating event (e.g., non-adherence) and escalate symptom-related or medicinal concerns to pharmacists.

             

            Returning to Lance one last time, after his potassium was corrected, he was initiated on the previously ordered insulin NPH dose. Guideline recommended treatment adjustments were followed thereafter (i.e., reducing insulin dose, addition of dextrose). Two days after ICU admission, Lance’s DKA fully resolved. At discharge, a social worker helps Lance enroll in a patient assistance program and the pharmacist counsels him on appropriate treatment and monitoring. Feeling more confident in managing his T2D, Lance is ready continue enjoying his sweet life with Connie by his side.

            Pharmacist Post Test (for viewing only)

            Pharmacist Post-test
            25-061

            LEARNING OBJECTIVES
            After completing this continuing education activity, pharmacists will be able to

            1. REVIEW the definition and causes of hyperglycemic crises, including diabetic ketoacidosis (DKA) and hyperosmolar hyperglycemic state (HHS)
            2. DISCUSS the pathophysiology and presentation of DKA and HHS
            3. OUTLINE treatment recommendations for DKA and HHS
            4. APPLY strategies for optimizing DKA and HHS management

            *

            1. The treatment team is considering therapy with an intravenous insulin infusion following initial fluid resuscitation in DKA and HHS. In which situation should the treatment team delay this therapy?
            A. Hypomagnesemia
            B. Hypophosphatemia
            C. Hypokalemia

            *

            2. Which laboratory marker is specific to diagnosis of hyperosmolar hyperglycemic state?
            A. Serum osmolality
            B. Serum bicarbonate
            C. Urine ketones

            *

            3. Hyperglycemic crises are complications of diabetes. However, there are other non-diabetes related factors that may precipitate DKA or HHS. Which of the following is the most common precipitating cause of DKA or HHS worldwide?
            A. Insulin non-adherence
            B. Intercurrent infection
            C. Alcohol use

            *

            4. Several clinical and non-clinical risk factors exist for DKA and HHS development. Which of the following medications is associated with increased risk of a hyperglycemic crisis?
            A. Clonazepam
            B. Canagliflozin
            C. Liraglutide

            *

            5. What complication can result if serum osmolality is corrected at a rapid pace in a patient with hyperosmolar hyperglycemic state?
            A. Hypoglycemia
            B. Cerebral edema
            C. Thrombosis

            *

            6. Hugh arrives to the emergency department with an episode of DKA. His blood glucose at admission is 309 mg/dL. The team orders fluid resuscitation with 1,000 mL/hour of 0.9% NS and a fixed-rate 0.1 unit/kg/hour intravenous insulin infusion at 0800. Gloria—his nurse—draws his hourly blood glucose lab at 0900. His blood glucose returns at 232 mg/dL. Gloria reaches out to you, the pharmacist, to receive your input on next steps. Which of the following changes would you recommend the team and Gloria to do next?
            A. Maintain current fluid resuscitation; decrease insulin infusion rate to 0.05 units/kg/hour
            B. Add 10% dextrose to fluid resuscitation; maintain current insulin infusion rate
            C. Add 10% dextrose to fluid resuscitation; decrease insulin infusion rate to 0.05 units/kg/hour

            *

            7. Beatrice is currently admitted for a DKA episode. At therapy initiation, the team retrieves labs to determine treatment options: potassium = 3.7 mmol/L; phosphate = 0.6 mg/dL; magnesium = 1.4 mg/dL. Based on these results alone (do not consider signs and symptoms), which electrolyte should be replenished?
            A. Potassium
            B. Magnesium
            C. Phosphate

            *

            8. Which of the following is first-line treatment for a hyperglycemic crisis?
            A. Fluid resuscitation
            B. Insulin infusion
            C. Mannitol infusion

            Pharmacy Technician Post Test (for viewing only)

            Pharmacy Technician Post-test
            25-061

            LEARNING OBJECTIVES
            After completing this continuing education activity, pharmacists will be able to

            1. REVIEW the definition and causes of hyperglycemic crises, including diabetic ketoacidosis (DKA) and hyperosmolar hyperglycemic state (HHS)
            2. DISCUSS the pathophysiology and presentation of DKA and HHS
            3. OUTLINE treatment recommendations for DKA and HHS
            4. RECOGNIZE when patients require pharmacist intervention for DKA and HHS

            *

            1. The treatment team is considering therapy with an intravenous insulin infusion following initial fluid resuscitation in DKA and HHS. In which situation should the treatment team delay this therapy?
            A. Hypomagnesemia
            B. Hypophosphatemia
            C. Hypokalemia

            *

            2. Which laboratory marker is specific to diagnosis of hyperosmolar hyperglycemic state?
            A. Serum osmolality
            B. Serum bicarbonate
            C. Urine ketones

            *

            3. Hyperglycemic crises are complications of diabetes. However, there are other non-diabetes related factors that may precipitate DKA or HHS. Which of the following is the most common precipitating cause of DKA or HHS worldwide?
            A. Insulin non-adherence
            B. Intercurrent infection
            C. Alcohol use

            *

            4. There are several clinical and non-clinical risk factors for DKA and HHS development. Which of the following medications is associated with increased risk of a hyperglycemic crisis?
            A. Clonazepam
            B. Canagliflozin
            C. Liraglutide

            *

            5. What complication of DKA and HHS is the most life-threatening?
            A. Hypoglycemia
            B. Cerebral edema
            C. Thrombosis

            *

            6. Which of the following patients with diabetes should you refer to the pharmacist for additional evaluation?
            A. A febrile patient with a fruity odor on their breath
            B. An attentive patient with increased thirst
            C. An afebrile patient tolerating oral rehydration

            *

            7. Electrolyte disorders can occur at the time of DKA or HHS presentation or during treatment. What electrolytes are commonly replenished in DKA or HHS, if indicated by serum levels?
            A. Bicarbonate, chloride, phosphate
            B. Magnesium, bicarbonate, sodium
            C. Potassium, phosphate, magnesium

            *

            8. Which of the following is first-line treatment for a hyperglycemic crisis?
            A. Fluid resuscitation
            B. Insulin infusion
            C. Mannitol infusion

            References

            Full List of References

            1. Van Ness-Otunnu R, Hack JB. Hyperglycemic crisis. J Emerg Med. 2013;45(5):797-805. doi:10.1016/j.jemermed.2013.03.040
            2. Benoit SR, Zhang Y, Geiss LS, Gregg EW, Albright A. Trends in Diabetic Ketoacidosis Hospitalizations and In-Hospital Mortality - United States, 2000-2014. MMWR Morb Mortal Wkly Rep. 2018;67(12):362-365. Published 2018 Mar 30. doi:10.15585/mmwr.mm6712a3
            3. Buchert LK. Diabetic ketoacidosis and hyperglycemic hyperosmolar state. American Nurses Association. September 14, 2021. Accessed July 23, 2025. https://www.myamericannurse.com/dka-and-hhs/.
            4. World Health Organization. Diabetes. November 14, 2024. Accessed July 23, 2025. https://www.who.int/news-room/fact-sheets/detail/diabetes
            5. Umpierrez GE, Davis GM, ElSayed NA, et al. Hyperglycemic Crises in Adults With Diabetes: A Consensus Report. Diabetes Care. 2024;47(8):1257-1275. doi:10.2337/dci24-0032
            6. Dingle HE, Slovis C. Diabetic ketoacidosis and hyperosmolar hyperglycemic syndrome management. Emergency Medicine. 2018;50(8):161-171. doi:10.12788/emed.2018.0100
            7. Karslioglu French E, Donihi AC, Korytkowski MT. Diabetic ketoacidosis and hyperosmolar hyperglycemic syndrome: review of acute decompensated diabetes in adult patients. BMJ. 2019;365:l1114. Published 2019 May 29. doi:10.1136/bmj.l1114
            8. Mustafa OG, Haq M, Dashora U, Castro E, Dhatariya KK; Joint British Diabetes Societies (JBDS) for Inpatient Care Group. Management of Hyperosmolar Hyperglycaemic State (HHS) in Adults: An updated guideline from the Joint British Diabetes Societies (JBDS) for Inpatient Care Group. Diabet Med. 2023;40(3):e15005. doi:10.1111/dme.15005
            9. American Diabetes Association Professional Practice Committee. 6. Glycemic Goals and Hypoglycemia: Standards of Care in Diabetes-2025. Diabetes Care. 2025;48(1 Suppl 1):S128-S145. doi:10.2337/dc25-S006
            10. McCoy RG, Herrin J, Galindo RJ, et al. Rates of Hypoglycemic and Hyperglycemic Emergencies Among U.S. Adults With Diabetes, 2011-2020. Diabetes Care. 2023;46(2):e69-e71. doi:10.2337/dc22-1673
            11. American Diabetes Association. Diabetes Devices & Technology. Accessed July 20, 2025. https://diabetes.org/about-diabetes/devices-technology
            12. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Diabetic Ketoacidosis. May 15, 2024. Accessed July 20, 2025. https://www.cdc.gov/diabetes/about/diabetic-ketoacidosis.html
            13. Diabetes & DKA (ketoacidosis). Diabetic Ketoacidosis (DKA) – Warning Signs, Causes & Prevention. Accessed July 20, 2025. https://diabetes.org/about-diabetes/complications/ketoacidosis-dka/dka-ketoacidosis-ketones
            14. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Considerations for Blood Glucose Monitoring and Insulin Administration. August 7, 2024. Accessed July 20, 2025. https://www.cdc.gov/injection-safety/hcp/infection-control/index.html
            15. Lee C-S, Rickard J. Review of Diabetic Ketoacidosis Management. November 20, 2018. Accessed July 2, 2025. https://www.uspharmacist.com/article/review-of-diabetic-ketoacidosis-management
            16. Nguyen KT, Xu NY, Zhang JY, et al. Continuous Ketone Monitoring Consensus Report 2021. J Diabetes Sci Technol. 2022;16(3):689-715. doi:10.1177/19322968211042656
            17. Holt RIG, DeVries JH, Hess-Fischl A, et al. The Management of Type 1 Diabetes in Adults. A Consensus Report by the American Diabetes Association (ADA) and the European Association for the Study of Diabetes (EASD). Diabetes Care. 2021;44(11):2589-2625. doi:10.2337/dci21-0043
            18. Lovegrove SS, Dubbs SB. Hyperosmolar Hyperglycemic State. Emerg Med Clin North Am. 2023;41(4):687-696. doi:10.1016/j.emc.2023.07.001
            19. Dhatariya KK, Glaser NS, Codner E, Umpierrez GE. Diabetic ketoacidosis. Nat Rev Dis Primers. 2020;6(1):40. Published 2020 May 14. doi:10.1038/s41572-020-0165-1
            20. Dhatariya K, Mustafa O, Stathi D. Hyperglycemic Crises. Endotext [Internet]. June 10, 2025. Accessed July 10, 2025. https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK279052/
            21. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Diabetes Basics. May 15, 2024. Accessed July 7, 2025. https://www.cdc.gov/diabetes/about/index.html
            22. American Diabetes Association. Diagnosis and classification of diabetes mellitus. Diabetes Care. 2014;37 Suppl 1:S81-S90. doi:10.2337/dc14-S081
            23. Thota S, Akbar A. Insulin. StatPearls [Internet]. July 10, 2023. Accessed July 10, 2025. https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK560688/
            24. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Type 1 Diabetes. May 15, 2024. Accessed July 7, 2025. https://www.cdc.gov/diabetes/about/about-type-1-diabetes.html
            25. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Type 2 Diabetes. May 15, 2024. Accessed July 7, 2025. https://www.cdc.gov/diabetes/about/about-type-2-diabetes.html
            26. Veauthier B, Levy-Grau B. Diabetic Ketoacidosis: Evaluation and Treatment. Am Fam Physician. 2024;110(5):476-486.
            27. Adeyinka A, Kondamudi NP. Hyperosmolar Hyperglycemic Syndrome. StatPearls [Internet]. August 12, 2023. Accessed July 10, 2025. https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK482142/
            28. Lizzo JM, Goyal A, Gupta V. Adult Diabetic Ketoacidosis. StatPearls [Internet]. July 10, 2023. Accessed July 10, 2025. https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK560723/
            29. Elendu C, David JA, Udoyen AO, et al. Comprehensive review of diabetic ketoacidosis: an update. Ann Med Surg (Lond). 2023;85(6):2802-2807. Published 2023 May 23. doi:10.1097/MS9.0000000000000894
            30. Gallo de Moraes A, Surani S. Effects of diabetic ketoacidosis in the respiratory system. World J Diabetes. 2019;10(1):16-22. doi:10.4239/wjd.v10.i1.16
            31. Modi A, Agrawal A, Morgan F. Euglycemic Diabetic Ketoacidosis: A Review. Curr Diabetes Rev. 2017;13(3):315-321. doi:10.2174/1573399812666160421121307
            32. Peters AL, Buschur EO, Buse JB, Cohan P, Diner JC, Hirsch IB. Euglycemic Diabetic Ketoacidosis: A Potential Complication of Treatment With Sodium-Glucose Cotransporter 2 Inhibition. Diabetes Care. 2015;38(9):1687-1693. doi:10.2337/dc15-0843
            33. Kitabchi AE, Umpierrez GE, Miles JM, Fisher JN. Hyperglycemic crises in adult patients with diabetes. Diabetes Care. 2009;32(7):1335-1343. doi:10.2337/dc09-9032
            34. Kitabchi AE, Umpierrez GE, Murphy MB, et al. Management of hyperglycemic crises in patients with diabetes. Diabetes Care. 2001;24(1):131-153. doi:10.2337/diacare.24.1.131
            35. Evans K. Diabetic ketoacidosis: update on management. Clin Med (Lond). 2019;19(5):396-398. doi:10.7861/clinmed.2019-0284
            36. Alghamdi NA, Major P, Chaudhuri D, et al. Saline Compared to Balanced Crystalloid in Patients With Diabetic Ketoacidosis: A Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis of Randomized Controlled Trials. Crit Care Explor. 2022;4(1):e0613. Published 2022 Jan 6. doi:10.1097/CCE.0000000000000613
            37. Kwong YD, Liu KD. Selection of Intravenous Fluids. Am J Kidney Dis. 2018;72(6):900-902. doi:10.1053/j.ajkd.2018.05.007
            38. Hassan EM, Mushtaq H, Mahmoud EE, et al. Overlap of diabetic ketoacidosis and hyperosmolar hyperglycemic state. World J Clin Cases. 2022;10(32):11702-11711. doi:10.12998/wjcc.v10.i32.11702
            39. Stoner GD. Hyperosmolar Hyperglycemic State. Am Fam Physician. 2017;96(11):729-736.
            40. Day H. Treatment of Ketoacidosis Related to Diabetes (DKA): Leveraging Guidelines and Protocols to Avoid Pitfalls. Glytec. October 26, 2023. Accessed on July 23, 2025. https://glytec.com/videos/optimizing-dka-management-a-comprehensive-approach-to-order-sets-guidelines/
            41. Kreider KE, Lien LF. Transitioning safely from intravenous to subcutaneous insulin. Curr Diab Rep. 2015;15(5):23. doi:10.1007/s11892-015-0595-4
            42. Liamis G, Liberopoulos E, Barkas F, Elisaf M. Diabetes mellitus and electrolyte disorders. World J Clin Cases. 2014;2(10):488-496. doi:10.12998/wjcc.v2.i10.488
            43. Dhatariya KK, Nunney I, Higgins K, Sampson MJ, Iceton G. National survey of the management of Diabetic Ketoacidosis (DKA) in the UK in 2014. Diabet Med. 2016;33(2):252-260. doi:10.1111/dme.12875
            44. Donihi AC, Moorman JM, Abla A, Hanania R, Carneal D, MacMaster HW. Pharmacists’ role in glycemic management in the inpatient setting: an opinion of the endocrine and metabolism practice and research network of the American College of Clinical Pharmacy. J Am Coll Clin Pharm. 2019;2:167-176.
            45. Algarni A. Treatment Considerations and Pharmacist Collaborative Care in Diabetic Ketoacidosis Management. Journal of Pharmacology and Pharmacotherapeutics. 2022;13(3):215-221. doi:10.1177/0976500X221128643
            46. Knezevich JT, Donihi AC, Drincic AT. Pharmacist Role in Providing Inpatient Diabetes Management. Curr Diab Rep. 2022;22(9):441-449. doi:10.1007/s11892-022-01487-8

            Patient Safety: Strength in Scoops: A Primer in Creatine, Protein Powder, and Pre-workout Supplementation

            Learning Objectives

             

            After completing this application-based continuing education activity, the pharmacist will be able to:

            • Identify differences in composition and health benefits associated with creatine, protein powder, and pre-workout supplements
            • Describe creatine dosing, common adverse effects, contraindications, and differences in available formulations
            • Determine dietary preferences, digestion tolerance, and patient's individual health goals when selecting protein powders
            • Provide timing and dosing for protein powder supplementation to maximize exercise recovery and muscle support

            After completing this application-based continuing education activity, the pharmacy technician will be able to:

            • Identify differences in composition and health benefits associated with creatine, protein powder, and pre-workout supplements
            • Explain common misunderstandings about the use and safety of creatine, protein powder, and pre-workout supplements
            • Discuss nutrition labels to help patients select appropriate supplements based on patient's individual health needs
            • Infer when to refer individuals' questions to the pharmacist

              A blue scooper, which contains protein powder, sits in front of a purple container with a grey lid.

              Release Date:

              Release Date: September 20, 2025

              Expiration Date: September 20, 2028

              Course Fee

              Pharmacists: $7

              Pharmacy Technicians: $4

              ACPE UANs

              Pharmacist: 0009-0000-25-033-H05-P

              Pharmacy Technician: 0009-0000-25-033-H05-T

              Session Codes

              Pharmacist: 25YC33-HGJ14

              Pharmacy Technician: 25YC33-JHG41

              Accreditation Hours

              2.0 hours of CE

              Accreditation Statements

              The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy is accredited by the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education as a provider of continuing pharmacy education.  Statements of credit for the online activity ACPE UAN 0009-0000-25-033-H05-P/T  will be awarded when the post test and evaluation have been completed and passed with a 70% or better. Your CE credits will be uploaded to your CPE monitor profile within 2 weeks of completion of the program.

               

              Disclosure of Discussions of Off-label and Investigational Drug Use

              The material presented here does not necessarily reflect the views of The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy or its co-sponsor affiliates. These materials may discuss uses and dosages for therapeutic products, processes, procedures and inferred diagnoses that have not been approved by the United States Food and Drug Administration. A qualified health care professional should be consulted before using any therapeutic product discussed. All readers and continuing education participants should verify all information and data before treating patients or employing any therapies described in this continuing education activity.

              Faculty

              Sydney A. Feeney
              PharmD Candidate 2027
              University of Connecticut
              Storrs, CT
               
              Madison C. Righi
              PharmD Candidate 2027
              University of Connecticut
              Storrs, CT
               
              Ava E. Vecchi
              PharmD Candidate 2027
              University of Connecticut
              Storrs, CT
               
              Valentina L. Maturi
              PharmD Candidate 2027
              University of Connecticut
              Storrs, CT
               
              Marissa C. Salvo, PharmD, BCACP, FCPA, FCCP
              Clinical Professor of Pharmacy Practice
              University of Connecticut
              Storrs, CT

              Faculty Disclosure

              In accordance with the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education (ACPE) Criteria for Quality and Interpretive Guidelines, The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy requires that faculty disclose any relationship that the faculty may have with commercial entities whose products or services may be mentioned in the activity.

              Sydney A. Feeney, PharmD Candidate 2027 has no relationships with ineligible companies and therefore have nothing to disclose.

              Madison C. Righi, PharmD Candidate 2027 has no relationships with ineligible companies and therefore have nothing to disclose.

              Ava E. Vecchi, PharmD Candidate 2027 has no relationships with ineligible companies and therefore have nothing to disclose.

              Valentina L. Maturi, PharmD Candidate 2027 has no relationships with ineligible companies and therefore have nothing to disclose.

              Marissa C. Salvo, PharmD, BCACP, FCPA, FCCP has no relationships with ineligible companies and therefore have nothing to disclose.

              ABSTRACT

              Dietary supplements such as creatine, protein powder, and pre-workout supplements have gained significant popularity recently, especially among those seeking to enhance physical performance and physique. Many consumers use these products without a full understanding of safe and effective use. Patients frequently ask pharmacists and pharmacy technicians questions about these supplements and pharmacy staff may be limited in providing evidence-based recommendations with full confidence. This continuing education activity covers the basic essential information regarding creatine, protein powder, and pre-workout supplementation. It addresses safe and effective use, potential risks, and common misconceptions associated with these products. Finally, it provides practical counseling points for pharmacists and pharmacy technicians to better educate patients who are seeking guidance on these supplements.

              CONTENT

              Content

              INTRODUCTION

              The increasing prevalence of dietary supplement use among individuals who engage in regular physical activity has raised a variety of important health concerns.1 Manufacturers often market commonly used products—including creatine, protein powder, and pre-workout supplements—as products that enhance athletic performance, promote muscle growth, and reduce recovery time. Recovery time refers to the period of time the body needs to repair and restore itself after physical activity, in particular after intense exercise or strength training (see SIDEBAR).2 These features attract many customers in pursuit of their fitness goals; however, the increase in consumption of these supplements is not always accompanied by accurate knowledge or professional guidance. This raises an array of concerns regarding the efficacy, safety, and long-term health implications of creatine, protein powder, and pre-workout supplements.1 Given the increasing number of patients who use dietary supplements, it is imperative that pharmacy teams understand this topic to provide guidance and counseling and care.3

               

              SIDEBAR: Recovery Time and Physical Activity4

              • To stay healthy and avoid injury, the body needs time to rest and recover after physical activity.
              • Muscle fatigue depends on how much and how hard an individual exercises, and it varies from person to person.
              • Physical activity puts stress on the muscles to build strength and improve performance.

               

              Supplements can help the body recover faster by supporting muscle repair and reducing the risk of overuse injuries.

               

              OVERVIEW OF DIETARY SUPPLEMENTS

              The Dietary Supplement Health and Education Act (DSHEA) of 1994 defines a dietary supplement as a product intended for oral consumption that contains one or more dietary ingredients intended to supplement the diet. These dietary ingredients may include vitamins, minerals, herbs, botanicals, amino acids, or other substances found in the food supply, such as enzymes and live microorganisms.5 As the use of dietary supplements continues to grow, individuals turn to them for various reasons, most commonly to address nutrient or vitamin deficiencies, boost energy levels, and/or meet specific nutritional needs that may be difficult to achieve through a regular diet.6

               

              A widely used supplement, creatine, supports the rapid regeneration of adenosine triphosphate (ATP) during high-intensity, anaerobic exercise, contributing to improved strength, sprinting performance, and muscle mass.7 Protein powders are also commonly used particularly for their role in supporting and maintaining skeletal muscle mass.8 Pre-workout supplements—multi-nutrient products designed to enhance physical performance—have gained popularity for their potential to improve training capacity, accelerate recovery, and increase energy during workouts.9 Overall, creatine, protein powders, and pre-workout supplements are dietary supplements commonly used to boost physical performance, promote muscle growth, and support recovery. However, their effectiveness can vary based on the specific ingredients and formulations of each product.

               

              How Dietary Supplements are Regulated

              The Food and Drug Administration’s (FDA) Center for Food Safety and Applied Nutrition (CFSAN) is the division responsible for overseeing dietary supplements, as these products are regulated as food under United States (U.S.) law.5 The FDA’s role includes5

              • Inspecting manufacturing facilities
              • Reviewing new dietary ingredient (NDI) notifications and related submissions
              • Investigating consumer complaints
              • Monitoring adverse event reports related to supplements on the market

              While the FDA has specific and critical regulatory responsibilities, it does not approve dietary supplements or their labeling before they reach the market.5

               

              Over the past few decades, hundreds of dietary supplements have entered the market. This has limited the FDA’s ability to fulfill its responsibilities in comprehensively monitoring the supplement market.10 Because the FDA’s resources and capacity are limited, they have primarily acted only when significant quality concerns have emerged, including microbial and/or heavy metal contamination, adulteration with synthetic drugs, and inaccurate or incomplete ingredient labeling.10 When evaluating dietary supplements such as creatine, protein powder, and pre-workout supplements, pharmacy team members can be essential consultants. They should recommend products that have been verified by third-party laboratories, such as the U.S. Pharmacopeia (USP), NSF International, or ConsumerLab.com. In addition, they should educate patients about potential quality and safety concerns.10

               

              Common Misconceptions About Dietary Supplements

              Numerous misconceptions surround dietary supplements, and the growing influence of social media has accelerated their spread. One common belief is that the FDA tests and approves all dietary supplements before they reach consumers. However, the FDA does not have the capacity to evaluate these products for safety and efficacy prior to their sale.5 Another widespread misconception is that dietary supplements are safe for everyone; however, just because a product is classified as a supplement does not mean it is harmless. For example, even commonly used supplements, like creatine, are not suitable for everyone and may pose risks for certain populations who should avoid their use.

               

              CREATINE

              Creatine is an endogenous substance made in the liver, pancreas, and kidney from L-arginine, glycine, and methionine by L-glycine-arginine aminotransferase (AGAT) and guanidinoacetate methyltransferase (GAMT) enzymes.11 Once it has been synthesized, creatine travels through the bloodstream via sodium- and chloride-dependent creatine transporters to reach its target tissues, like skeletal muscle and brain.12 Inside the cell, creatine kinase converts 65% of creatine into phosphocreatine.12 Phosphocreatine stores high-energy phosphate groups that can be used quickly by skeletal muscle to make ATP, the main energy source for cells, by donating phosphate groups to turn adenosine diphosphate (ADP) back into ATP.11 Muscles rely on this conversion into ATP for energy during short-duration and high-intensity exercise.12

               

              Creatine supplementation increases the rate of phosphocreatine synthesis during recovery periods. This enhances muscle performance, recovery, and overall training outcomes, which is why many individuals are inclined to use creatine.12 Creatine also helps increase muscle mass and reduce body fat percentage, and it has been shown to enhance performance in short, high-intensity exercise.11,13

               

              Dose

              Individuals can begin using creatine with a total of 20 grams daily for up to seven days; this is described as a loading phase.14 Most creatine powder products contain 3 to 5 grams per scoop (it is important to read the product’s label), so achieving this dose typically requires using four to five scoops per day, consumed throughout the day. Mixing one scoop into a beverage of choice with each meal or snack can make it easier to incorporate into one’s routine.

               

              After the loading phase, individuals continue with the maintenance phase of 2.25 to 10 grams daily for up to 16 weeks.14 This typically equates to 1 to 2 scoops per day. While individuals may choose to continue supplementation beyond this 16-week period, most studies have been limited to around 16 weeks. Long-term data is limited, but the available studies have not reported any serious adverse effects.

               

              Of note, a loading or induction phase is not strictly necessary; alternatively, research shows that smaller, consistent daily doses are also effective if the loading phase is not desired.15 Some individuals prefer to skip the loading phase because consuming 20 grams per day (approximately four to five scoops) can be difficult to incorporate into their routine. Also, patients who experience mild adverse effects (described below) should divide their creatine consumption into smaller doses taken throughout the day.16

               

              PAUSE AND PONDER: How might a patient’s daily routine influence the recommendation between a creatine loading phase and a lower daily dose?

               

              Selecting a Product

              Creatine is available in a wide range of commercial products (see Table 1), most commonly as a powder formulation.13 It can be found in both solid and liquid dosage forms. The liquid formulation is thought to improve creatine solubility, which may allow patients to consume less. However, it has limitations in shelf life, as creatine is not stable in liquid form over extended periods.17 The solid dosage form includes powders and capsules.16

               

              The most popular form is creatine monohydrate.14 Creatine monohydrate has been used extensively without resulting in major adverse events.17 While researchers have conducted studies to evaluate different forms of creatine, creatine monohydrate remains the most researched and superior available form.11,14,17

               

              Table 1. Available Creatine Products11,14

              Type of Creatine Description Clinical Pearls
              Creatine monohydrate The most common form of creatine.

               

              Stored in muscle for quick energy.

              ·       Widely studied

              ·       Proven safe and effective

              ·       Affordable

              Creatine nitrate Creatine bound to nitrate Claims of better absorption, but this is not strongly supported by studies.
              Di-creatine malate Creatine bound to malate Claims to have increased water solubility, but research is limited.
              Creatine ethyl ester Creatine bound to esterified ethanol Claims better absorption due to increased uptake across the membrane, but evidence does not support superior efficacy over creatine monohydrate.
              Creatine gluconate Creatine bound to a glucose molecule Claims improved absorption and transport of creatine into muscle cells, but the research is limited.

               

              Should be avoided with diabetes because it could impact blood sugar levels.

              Creatine citrate Creatine bound to citric acid Claims to improve creatine solubility and absorption but has not proven superior over monohydrate
              Creatine magnesium chelate Creatine bound to magnesium Claims to enhance stability, absorption, and overall effectiveness of creatine supplementation, but further research is necessary to support these claims.

               

              Based on currently available data, creatine monohydrate is recommended when helping a patient select a creatine product. Creatine monohydrate has the strongest evidence supporting its use, primarily due to its high bioavailability and well-documented effectiveness in enhancing muscle strength and power. While formulation type is generally not a critical factor, powder is the most commonly used and widely available form.11 As mentioned earlier, when recommending dietary supplements like creatine, choosing a product that has undergone third-party testing is the safest option. For example, a creatine monohydrate supplement which has a USP or NSF seal is a reliable choice.14

               

              Safety

              Creatine is overall well tolerated with minimal adverse effects.14 The most common adverse effects associated with oral creatine include14,16

              • Dehydration
              • Diarrhea
              • Gastrointestinal upset
              • Muscle cramps
              • Water retention leading to weight gain

               

              It is rare to experience severe adverse effects when taking creatine, however, the following may occur14

              • Interstitial nephritis
              • Renal insufficiency
              • Rhabdomyolysis
              • Venous thrombosis

               

              Prior to beginning creatine supplementation, individuals with the following conditions should avoid its use until first discussed with their physician:16

              • Bipolar disease (may increase mania)
              • Diabetes
              • Kidney disease
              • Liver disease
              • Parkinson’s disease, especially in combination with caffeine (may accelerate progression of disease)
              • Pregnant or breastfeeding

               

              A pharmacy technician should refer to the pharmacist if the patient14,16

              • Has a disease state or condition listed above
              • Asks for a recommendation on which creatine supplement to use
              • Has questions or concerns regarding possible drug interactions or adverse effects
              • Has specific questions about dosing based on their condition, disease state, or current medications or use of other supplements

               

              Common Misconceptions

              People share a considerable amount of information about dietary supplements like creatine online and on other platforms, but some of this information can be inaccurate or misleading. Misinformation may discourage individuals from using a supplement that could offer benefit. Therefore, it is essential for pharmacy team members to understand key facts about creatine in order to provide accurate information and help prevent the spread of false claims. Table 2 describes many common misperceptions and provide the evidence needed to respond.

               

              Table 2. Common Misconceptions and Evidence-based Facts11,15,18

              Common Misconceptions Evidence-Based Facts
              Creatine supplementation results in weight gain. Creatine supplementation may sometimes cause water retention, particularly during the initial stages of use. However, this effect is not universal, and creatine can actually offer benefits, such as improved intracellular hydration, which may enhance muscular strength and reduce fatigue.
              Creatine is safe for everyone. Some studies have reported potential liver or kidney complications, which is why individuals with these conditions, as well as the other exclusion groups mentioned in the text, are advised to avoid creatine supplementation or need to consult with a physician prior to use.
              A loading phase is required for creatine supplementation to be effective. Creatine supplementation at lower daily doses has also been shown to be effective, making the loading phase optional.
              Creatine has the same effects as anabolic steroids. Creatine supplementation does not stimulate muscle growth via hormonal mechanisms, as anabolic steroids do.
              Creatine causes hair loss. No direct evidence indicates creatine supplementation causes hair loss or baldness. Most research attributes hair loss in individuals taking creatine to genetics and hormonal factors rather than the supplement itself.
              Creatine causes dehydration and cramping. Creatine does not increase the risk of dehydration or muscle cramping. Maintaining proper hydration during exercise is important whether or not an individual is using creatine.
              Creatine only improves lower body strength. A 2021 meta-analysis demonstrated that creatine supplementation significantly improves upper limb strength performance during short-duration exercises. These effects were observed regardless of age, sex, training protocol, or dosage.

               

              PROTEIN POWDER

              Protein is a fundamental component of a balanced diet and plays a critical role in a healthy lifestyle. It is found in both animal- and plant-based sources and is essential for biological functions, such as tissue-building and maintaining optimal health.19 However, many individuals struggle to meet their daily protein requirements, particularly when the goal is to enhance their physical appearance or athletic performance. Protein powder offers a convenient solution to help individuals reach these goals.20 Medically, it can also benefit patients who have difficulty consuming adequate daily protein intake due to chewing or swallowing limitations.21

               

              Dose

              The recommended dietary protein intake in healthy adults is based on their body mass, lean body mass, and level of physical activity.22 The Recommended Dietary Allowance (RDA) and Acceptable Macronutrient Distribution Range (AMDR) are both used as guidance on the recommended amount of protein to consume each day.22 The RDA for protein is a minimum of 0.8 grams per kilogram per day (g/kg/day) to support healthy individuals’ nutritional needs.22 It should be noted that the RDA is the minimum requirement; therefore, individuals should aim to intake 1.2 to 1.7 g/kg/day to benefit from the effects of efficient protein intake.23 When this range is achieved, older adults are at less risk of muscle loss and frailty, and athletes can see significant changes in muscle and performance.23 This can be incorporated as 0.4 g/kg/meal or about 20 g per meal depending on weight.20 In addition, the AMDR states that 10% to 35% of an individual’s energy intake (calories) should be from protein.22

               

              For active individuals who want to maximize their muscle support, the Academy of Nutrition and Dietetics, Dieticians of Canada, and the American College of Sports Medicine recommend doubling the RDA of protein.24 For example, individuals who are in resistance training may wish to consume 1.2 to 2 g/kg/day.22 In addition, to aid in recovery, active individuals may wish to consume 15 to 20 gs of protein within one to two hours after exercising. Older adults, who want to reduce their risk of muscle loss, may also consume a higher amount of protein per day.23

               

              Insufficient amounts of protein can result in adverse consequences for one’s health, including decreased protein synthesis.22 When protein synthesis is affected, it negatively influences other processes in the body including22

              • Muscle mass density and function
              • Bone and calcium homeostasis
              • The immune system
              • Fluid and electrolyte balance
              • Enzyme production and activity

               

              By consuming protein above the RDA and within the AMDR, individuals can improve muscle preservation, reduce age-related muscle loss, maintain body composition and metabolic health, and increase muscle mass and strength.22

               

              Selecting a Product

              Meeting daily protein intake goals is important for overall health and performance; however, it can be challenging through diet alone. In such cases, protein supplements, such as protein powder, can help to achieve those goals effectively.20 Selecting the appropriate type of protein powder is essential to optimize the benefits of adequate protein intake. Protein powder should be tailored to the individual’s specific needs and goals.

               

              For example, a study involving 18 women with bulimia nervosa or binge eating disorder found that consuming high-protein supplements three times daily significantly reduced the frequency of binge eating episodes. The participants reported feeling less hungry and fuller, which led to a reduction in overall food intake. This study suggests that protein supplementation may help manage disordered eating patterns in individuals with bulimia nervosa or binge eating disorder.25

               

              In contrast, protein supplements are also used in the treatment of anorexia nervosa, but to promote healthy weight gain. Registered dietitians recognize that the use of dietary supplements, including protein powders, which are often part of the standard of care in treating patients who struggle to meet their nutritional needs through food alone due to psychological or physical barriers.26 A case study reported protein supplementation helped to increase caloric intake, preserve lean body mass, and support gradual weight restoration.27

               

              Table 3 provides guidance to tailor protein powder selection.20

               

              Table 3. Types of Protein Powders20

              Whey Concentrate ·       Vary in lactose and fat content

              ·       In many protein drinks, bars, and nutritional products

              ·       Used in infant formula

              ·       Do not use if allergic to milk

              Hydrolysate ·       Hydrolyzed whey protein

              ·       Easiest to digest because its long protein chains are pre-broken down

              ·       Used in specialized infant formulas and in medical supplements for nutritional deficiencies

              ·       Do not use if allergic to milk

              Isolate ·       High in protein, low in fat or lactose

              ·       In protein bars and drinks

              ·       Suitable for lactose intolerance

              ·       Do not use if allergic to milk

              Milk protein ·       Supports immune system

              ·       Enhances muscle growth

              ·       Do not use if allergic to milk

              Egg protein ·       Released more slowly than whey

              ·       Taken throughout the day

              ·       Do not use if allergic to eggs

              Plant-based Brown rice protein ·       Suitable for vegetarians or individuals who do not consume dairy

              ·       Gluten-free

              Pea protein ·       Highly digestible

              ·       Hypo-allergenic (not likely to cause an allergy)

              Hemp protein ·       Good source of omega-3 fatty acids

               

              As described in Table 3, protein powders are available in different formulations and can be selected based on an individual’s dietary needs, allergies, or fitness goals. Milk-derived proteins, such as whey (including concentrate, isolate, or hydrolysate forms) are commonly recommended for those aiming to promote muscle growth due to their rapid absorption and high biological value.

               

              However, it is important to note that whey protein is produced during the cheese-making process. Enzymes are added to milk to separate the solid curds from the liquid whey. The liquid whey is then pasteurized and dried to create protein powder.20 Because whey is derived from milk, it should not be used in individuals with a milk allergy.20 Similarly, milk protein powders, which contain both whey and casein (milk protein), may also enhance muscle growth but should not be used in those with milk allergies. These are important factors to consider when selecting a protein, as milk allergy is one of the most common allergies in the U.S., affecting over 4.7 million adults.28

               

              For those with lactose intolerance or dietary restrictions, whey protein isolate (which is low in lactose) or plant-based proteins (including brown rice, pea, and hemp protein) may be tolerated better.20

               

              PAUSE AND PONDER: When choosing a protein powder, how might an individual’s health conditions, allergies, or fitness goals influence the type of protein powder suitable for them?

               

              Safety

              Protein is classified as a dietary supplement, and it is essential for patients to inform their healthcare providers about any supplements they are taking. Factors such as food intake, meal timing, and nutritional status can influence the pharmacokinetics of medications. The drug’s ability to be properly absorbed can be influenced by a high consumption of protein from meals and supplements. Medications such as levodopa, used in Parkinson’s disease, and beta-lactam antibiotics (such as penicillin, amoxicillin, and cephalexin) rely on transporter proteins for absorption, and their uptake may be reduced with a high protein intake. Additionally, a high-protein, low-carbohydrate diet can significantly increase the clearance of the beta-blocker propranolol and moderately increase the clearance of theophylline, potentially impacting the therapeutic efficacy of both medications. A high-protein meal can also increase the absorption of certain drugs, such as the immunosuppressant tacrolimus.29

               

              Protein supplementation for patients on anticoagulation is also a major concern because of vitamin K concentrations in protein supplements. It is important that patients, especially those on warfarin, notify their anticoagulation healthcare team about protein supplement use. Plant-based protein powders, such as those containing soy, may contain vitamin K; thus, decreasing the effect of warfarin.30 It is important to check the ingredient list in the Nutrition Facts labeled on protein supplements and look for Vitamin K. For example, protein supplement drinks such as Boost High Protein Nutritional Drink contains Vitamin K1 as an ingredient. In this situation, it is critical to select another protein powder formulation.

               

              Protein powder supplements may contain ingredients that can contribute to gastrointestinal discomfort, weight gain, or elevated blood glucose levels. Patients should review product ingredients carefully when experiencing adverse reactions. Since protein powder is a dietary supplement, the FDA does not evaluate it for safety or efficacy prior to marketing. Therefore, consumers cannot be certain that the product contains what is claimed on the label.31

               

              Furthermore, some products may contain added sugars or dextrin, maltodextrin, or sweeteners that can contribute to weight gain, which may not be ideal for individuals who want to lose or maintain weight.20 Patients with diabetes should also pay close attention to protein powders with sugar listed as one of the first three ingredients and verify that the product is low in carbohydrates.20 Patients with kidney disease may not be able to tolerate more than the recommended daily allowance of protein at one time because they can’t efficiently remove waste products during the metabolism of protein. These patients may need a product that is lower than average in protein. For example, they should select a protein powder with a lower-range protein content such as 10 to 15 g per serving.20 If patients have irritable bowel syndrome or are lactose intolerant, a protein powder without lactose sugars, artificial sweeteners, dextrin, or maltodextrin is recommended.20 It is also important to check and avoid ingredients containing gluten in patients with a gluten allergy or sensitivity.20

               

              The pharmacy technician should refer the patient to the pharmacist if the patient

              • has diabetes, kidney, or liver disease, gastrointestinal problems, or any chronic illness that require dietary oversight
              • takes prescription medications because timing of supplements may be considered
              • is a child, teen, pregnant, or breastfeeding
              • complains about adverse effects from a protein supplement
              • takes multiple protein supplements, as they are at risk of overconsumption

               

              Common Misconceptions

              Similar to other dietary supplements, information about protein used as a supplement may be inaccurate or misleading. Protein is a commonly used supplement, and it is important to address misconceptions about usage, concerns, and key information related to its use. Misinformation may come from peer influence, social media, and seemingly credible sources. It is essential for pharmacy team members to understand the uses of protein supplementation to provide accurate information and help prevent the spread of false claims.

               

              Protein powder can be used in those that need to meet their nutritional requirements and in those looking to build muscle. While it is commonly believed that only athletes require protein supplementation, individuals of all activity levels may benefit depending on their dietary needs. The RDA reflects the minimum daily protein intake needed, but it is mistaken as the target for everyone to follow.22 In contrast, the AMDR recommends that protein intake accounts for 10% to 35% of daily energy intake, measured in kilocalories.32 For example, people who consume 1,300 calories per day should aim to consume 33 to 114 grams of protein daily, based on individual needs and health goals.

               

              Some individuals may be hesitant to increase their protein intake due to concerns about its potential impact on comorbid conditions, although current evidence does not support their concerns. Table 4 clarifies misleading information to encourage individuals to use protein supplements knowledgeably and confidently as part of a healthy lifestyle.22

               

              Table 4. Common Misconceptions and Evidence-based Facts33-35

              Common Misconceptions Evidence-Based Facts
              High-protein diets weaken bones and increase the risk of osteoporosis. A high protein diet along with eating more dairy, calcium, and exercising daily can help protect the bones.
              Consuming high amounts of protein will damage kidneys, even if the individual is healthy. The National Health and Nutrition Examination Survey found that even with very high protein intake from all sources, blood urea nitrogen levels remained within the normal range, indicating that there is no risk of developing chronic kidney disease or harming the kidneys.
              High protein diets, especially from animal sources, increase the risk of heart disease and type 2 diabetes. An analysis of the Framingham Heart Study Offspring Cohort showed an inverse relationship between inflammation and dietary protein intake, showing that there was a beneficial effect for higher animal- and plant-based protein intake. No data demonstrates a relationship between dietary protein and cardiovascular disease or type 2 diabetes mellitus.

               

              PRE-WORKOUT

              “Pre-workout” is a term used to describe supplements composed of multiple ingredients, intended to be taken before a workout.36 Manufacturers of these supplements propose pre-workout supplements enhance performance, energy, endurance, and focus during a workout; however, limited research supports these claims.37

               

              Common Ingredients

              Pre-workout supplements can include countless combinations of ingredients, but most multi-nutrient formulas feature a core set of commonly used components, including9,36

              • Caffeine
              • Beta-alanine
              • Creatine
              • Citrulline
              • Taurine
              • Tyrosine
              • B vitamins (B-6, B-12)

               

              While many pre-workout supplements share a core group of commonly used ingredients, their formulations can vary significantly.36 Unfortunately, many companies do not list all included ingredients and their specific quantities on the label; this variability makes it difficult for pharmacists to recommend or evaluate products.2 Much of the existing research on pre-workout supplements focuses on caffeine as the primary stimulant.37 It has been found that many products containing caffeine do not have accurate amounts listed on their label.2 Use of products with unreliable labeling can put patients at risk for adverse effects.2

               

              Selecting a Product

              Since pre-workout supplements contain ingredients similar to those found in energy drinks, it is important to distinguish between the two. Pre-workout supplements are designed to enhance both short-term exercise performance and long-term training outcomes.37 In contrast, energy drinks and shots typically consist of caffeine along with a few vitamins or amino acids, aiming primarily to increase energy and alertness. They are intended for use at any time throughout the day.37 Because of the variability in composition and unreliability of the labeling on pre-workout supplement products, it is recommended to avoid their use and rather focus on eating a balanced diet to support energy needs.2

               

              Safety

              Caffeine and beta-alanine are the most widely used ingredients included in pre-workout supplements found in 86% and 87% of products, respectively.36

               

              Beta-alanine is included because it enhances exercise capacity and performance by elevating muscle carnosine levels, which buffer the accumulation of lactic acid in muscles.38 This buffering effect helps delay fatigue during high-intensity exercise, making it especially beneficial for short bursts of activity such as weightlifting or sprinting.38 While both are generally well tolerated, long-term doses of beta-alanine that exceed 6.4 g per day or caffeine use beyond several weeks at doses above 400 mg/day may increase the risk of adverse events (see Table 5) and dependence.39,40

               

              Table 5. Potential Adverse Events of Beta-Alanine and Caffeine2,36,39-41

              Ingredient Potential Adverse Events
              Beta-Alanine

               

              ·       Mild:

              o   Flushing

              o   Paresthesia

              o   Pruritus

               

              Caffeine

               

              ·       Mild to Moderate (> 400 mg per day):

              o   Vomiting

              o   Tachycardia

              o   Hypokalemia

              o   Hypoglycemia

              o   Anxiety and restlessness

              o   Gastrointestinal upset (including diarrhea and nausea)

              o   Diuresis

              o   Headache

              o   Insomnia

              o   Palpitations

              o   Muscle tremors

              ·       Severe (10 to 14 g per day):

              o   Agitation

              o   Seizures

              o   Ventricular dysrhythmias

              o   Hypotension

              o   Shock

               

               

              Patients should be aware of their total daily caffeine intake, which includes not only coffee and energy drinks but also caffeinated beverages, medications, and multivitamins that may also contain caffeine.37 To determine if a medication contains caffeine, patients can read their medications’ list of ingredients or ask their pharmacist.

               

              Caffeine is rapidly absorbed from the stomach and small intestine, reaching peak serum concentrations within 30 to 60 minutes following oral intake. Although food may slow the absorption rate, it does not reduce the total amount that will eventually be absorbed.41 Studies have found that individuals with lower CYP1A2 activity have increased reports of symptoms of toxicity, as caffeine is hepatically metabolized by CYP1A2 which causes caffeine to be absorbed more slowly.41-43 The plasma elimination half-life ranges from 3 to 7 hours in healthy adults and 3 to 4 hours in children. This range is shortened in smokers, due to the activation of the CYP1A2 enzyme by cigarette smoke, and prolonged in the last trimester of pregnancy, in patients with cirrhosis, and in infants.41

               

              In terms of safety, most adults can consume a maximum of 400 mg of caffeine per day, while children are typically safe when ingesting up to 2.5 mg/kg of caffeine per day.41

               

              Table 6. Approximate Caffeine Content in Select Beverages
              Coffee 100 mg
              Tea 20-90 mg
              Celsius Energy Drink 200 mg
              Monster Energy Drink 160 mg

               

              Toxicity and lethality risks increase with higher doses. Life-threatening events are seen when greater than 150 to 200 mg/kg of caffeine is consumed, and fatalities have been reported when 5 to 50 g of caffeine was ingested.41 However, recovery after ingestion of 50 g has also been reported.41

               

              Pharmacists should counsel patients who are taking caffeine-containing products while concomitantly using pre-workout supplements because they are consuming high levels of caffeine.37 This increased level of caffeine can increase the risk of adverse events described above.37

               

              Regarding pre-workout supplement use, the pharmacy technician should refer to the pharmacist if the patient

              • Has pre-existing medical conditions, including high blood pressure, anxiety, seizure history, kidney or liver impairment, and heart disease or arrhythmias
              • Is pregnant or breastfeeding
              • Is asking for a recommendation on which pre-workout supplement to use
              • Is experiencing or has questions regarding possible drug interactions and adverse effects
              • Has specific questions about dosing based on their condition, disease state, or current medications/supplements

               

              For example, Jenny, a 58-year-old woman, is interested in using a pre-workout supplement to help motivate her to be active after a long day at work. When the technician asks about her current caffeine intake, she mentions that she drinks two cups of coffee each day and also has a Sparkling Fuji Apple Pear (her favorite flavor) Celsius. The technician explains that each cup of coffee contains approximately 100 mg of caffeine, and the Celsius drink contains about 200 mg. Most pre-workout supplements contain between 150 to 300 mg of caffeine. If Jenny were to add a pre-workout supplement to her routine, her total caffeine intake could exceed 500 mg per day, increasing her risk of experiencing adverse events.

               

              PAUSE AND PONDER: With the growing popularity of stimulant-containing products, how can you further assess patients’ consumption of caffeine? (Hint: Remember hidden sources of caffeine.)

               

              CONCLUSION

              With the growing popularity of supplement use in the fitness industry, products such as creatine, protein powders, and pre-workout supplements continue to be widely used. Pre-workout supplements are typically taken before exercising to enhance performance and focus, while creatine and protein powders are commonly used to support muscle growth and recovery. When used appropriately, these supplements may improve physical performance, promote muscle development, and reduce recovery time.6

               

              As pharmacists and pharmacy technicians, it is part of our professional responsibility to educate the public about the potential risks and benefits of these products and to provide evidence-based recommendations. Our role also includes advocating for patients and staying informed about the latest developments, which are becoming increasingly prominent in the wellness market. Gaining a deeper understanding of these products is essential to recognize when we can confidently make recommendations or when to refer individuals to a physician or registered dietitian for more individualized guidance.

               

              It is also important to acknowledge that these products still require more research to establish their full safety and efficacy, standards that are already well established for prescription medications.10 Additionally, current research often overlooks key individual factors such as genetics, the gut microbiome, and habitual diet, all of which can significantly influence exercise performance, recovery, and muscle growth.6

               

              Pharmacist Post Test (for viewing only)

              Pharmacist Post-test
              25-033

              After completing this continuing education activity, pharmacists will be able to
              • Identify differences in composition and health benefits associated with creatine, protein powder, and pre-workout supplements
              • Describe creatine dosing, common adverse effects, contraindications, and differences in available formulations
              • Determine dietary preferences, digestion tolerance, and patient’s individual health goals when selecting protein powders
              • Provide timing and dosing for protein powder supplementation to maximize exercise recovery and muscle support

              *

              1. Which of the following is a counseling point you, as the pharmacist, can offer to a patient who is taking a pre-workout product and experiencing anxiety symptoms, including tachycardia?
              A. Limit the use of other caffeinated products, including coffee, while using a pre-work product.
              B. Stop using the pre-workout product immediately, as it may increase the risk of adverse neurological effects.
              C. Inform the patient that their symptoms are unlikely to be related to the pre-workout product.

              *

              2. Which of the following is a common adverse effect of creatine?
              A. Muscle cramps
              B. Hair loss
              C. Constipation

              *

              3. A 56 kg female patient comes in asking for guidance on how to adequately consume protein in her diet. The patient is allergic to dairy and has no other allergies. The patient goes on a 45-minute walk daily but does not perform resistance training. Which of the following is the best answer to provide for this patient?
              A. The patient should have a goal of consuming about 22 grams of hemp protein per meal, having 3 meals per day.
              B. The patient should have a goal of consuming about 32 grams of whey protein per meal, 3 meals per day.
              C. The patient should have a goal of consuming about 10 grams of hemp protein per meal, having 3 meals per day.

              *

              4. A 45-year-old female patient wants to begin taking a dietary protein supplement. She is currently taking omeprazole, warfarin, and ibuprofen. Which of the following medications may have an interaction with dietary protein supplementation?
              A. Omeprazole
              B. Warfarin
              C. Ibuprofen

              *

              5. A 70-year-old male recovering from surgery shows signs of fatigue and poor wound healing due to protein deficiency. What type of protein supplement would be most appropriate to support his energy levels and nutrition?
              A. Whey protein concentrate
              B. Whey protein hydrolysate
              C. Whey protein isolate

              *

              6. Which of the following creatine products has the most evidence supporting its use?
              A. Creatine Monohydrate
              B. Creatine Nitrate
              C. Creatine Citrate

              *

              7. A 85-year-old female asks her primary care provider about initiating daily supplementation with 20 grams of creatine. The physician asks you for assistance in answering this question. Upon reviewing her medical chart, you note that her estimated Glomerular Filtration Rate (eGFR) is 30 mL/min/1.73m2. Given this information, would you recommend the initiation of daily creatine supplementation?
              A. Yes, creatine has no contraindications with reduced renal function and can be safely initiated.
              B. No, creatine supplementation is not recommended in patients with reduced renal function, and this patient has kidney impairment.
              C. Yes, studies have proven that reducing the creatine loading dose to 15 grams daily, rather than 20 grams, allows patients with reduced renal function to safely supplement, if renal function is closely monitored.

              *

              8. Why can it be difficult for pharmacists to recommend a pre-workout supplement?
              A. Pre-workout supplements have variability in ingredients.
              B. Pre-workout supplements have been well studied.
              C. Pre-workout supplements have consistent ingredients.

              *

              9. A 39-year-old pregnant woman presents to the pharmacy seeking information about creatine supplementation. Upon reviewing her medication profile, you note that she is currently taking aripiprazole for bipolar disorder. What amount of creatine would you, as the pharmacist, recommend for her?
              A. I would recommend 20 grams daily for 7 days, followed by 8 grams daily for 16 weeks.
              B. I would recommend 11 grams daily for 20 weeks
              C. I would not recommend creatine supplementation.

              *

              10. A 68 kg male patient seeks guidance on his recommended daily protein intake. He follows a strict vegan diet, avoiding all animal products, and does resistance training (lifts heavy weights) four times per week. What would you, as the pharmacist, recommend for this patient?
              A. Consume a diet of 130 grams of plant-based protein per day, including consuming 20 grams of protein 1 hour after exercising.
              B. Consume a diet of 130 grams of plant-based protein per day, including consuming 20 grams of protein 1 hour before exercising.
              C. Consume a diet of 175 grams of plant-based protein per meal, including consuming 20 grams of protein 1 hour after exercising.

              Pharmacy Technician Post Test (for viewing only)

              Pharmacy Technician Post-test
              25-033

              After completing this continuing education activity, pharmacy technicians will be able to
              • Identify differences in composition and health benefits associated with creatine, protein powder, and pre-workout supplements.
              • Explain common misunderstandings about the use and safety of creatine, protein powder, and pre-workout supplements.
              • Discuss nutrition labels to help patients select appropriate supplements based on patient’s individual health needs.
              • Infer when to refer individuals' questions to the pharmacist.

              *

              1. In which one of the following situations should you, as the pharmacy technician, refer the patient to the pharmacist?
              A. A patient with chronic kidney disease asks for supplements to improve their physical performance during strength training.
              B. A patient with seasonal allergies asks for a recommendation between two creatine products, one with a USP seal and the other without.
              C. A 25-year-old patient asks about what types of protein powder the pharmacy has in stock.

              *

              2. Which of the following is a plant-based protein option?
              A. Pea protein
              B. Milk protein
              C. Whey protein

              *

              3. Choose the answer that correctly matches its corresponding statement.
              A. Whey isolate protein – suitable for lactose intolerance and can be used in individuals allergic to milk.
              B. Whey hydrolysate protein – easy to digest and suitable for individuals with nutritional deficiencies.
              C. Protein powder with artificial sweeteners – can be given to patients with irritable bowel syndrome (IBS).

              *

              4. A 75-year-old individual with newly diagnosed osteoporosis is looking to improve muscle recovery as they are increasing their strength training. They are unsure which protein supplement to choose. Which response best supports the importance of selecting the right protein source?
              A. Choosing the right protein powder depends on the patient’s individual needs, goals, and preferences.
              B. Whey protein supplementation is beneficial for all individuals reaching their protein requirements; however, excessive amounts of protein will damage your kidneys.
              C. Whey protein is better than other types of protein to lessen the risk of osteoporosis.

              *

              5. A 22-year-old male comes to the pharmacy with questions regarding creatine. He has heard rumors regarding creatine’s side effects and safety. He wants to know which of the rumors he has heard are true. Which of the following statements is true regarding creatine’s side effects?
              A. Creatine may cause hair loss.
              B. Creatine may cause diarrhea.
              C. Creatine may cause kidney stones.

              *

              6. Which of the following ingredients are commonly found in pre-workout supplements?
              A. Caffeine and taurine
              B. Taurine and vitamin C
              C. Caffeine and beta-alanine

              *

              7. Which of the following creatine products has the most evidence supporting its use?
              A. Creatine Monohydrate
              B. Creatine Nitrate
              C. Creatine Citrate

              *

              8. A 22-year-old male patient wants to begin creatine supplementation. He is currently taking loratadine and acetaminophen and wants to know if creatine will interact with either of these medications. Which of the following is the best course of action you, the a pharmacy technician, should take?
              A. Use an online resource to determine if there is an interaction.
              B. Refer the patient to the pharmacist.
              C. Recommend beginning supplementation, as there is no interaction with the medications.

              *

              9. An 18-year-old female patient is interested in starting weight training to gain muscle. She has seen TikTok influencers promoting the use of pre-workout supplements, protein powder, and creatine, claiming these products support muscle growth. However, she is skeptical, as many influencers have brand deals, and she wants to avoid being misled. Which of the products are the influencers promoting that have misleading claims about building muscle?
              A. Protein powder
              B. Creatine
              C. Pre-workout supplements

              *

              10. A 19-year-old male is interested in starting creatine supplementation and wants to choose a safe and effective product. Which of the following is a counseling point to provide when making a recommendation?
              A. Always start with a loading phase.
              B. Creatine monohydrate is the most widely studied.
              C. Use products without third-party testing to save money.

              References

              Full List of References

              1. Calella P, Di Dio M, Pelullo CP, et al. Are knowledge, attitudes and practices about dietary supplements and nutraceuticals related with exercise practice and setting? A cross-sectional study among Italian adults. Int J Food Sci Nutr. 2025;76(2):194-202. doi:10.1080/09637486.2024.2437468
              2. Cohen P. High-risk dietary supplements: Patient evaluation and counseling. UpToDate. UpToDate, Inc. Updated March 21, 2025. Accessed May 29, 2025. https://www.uptodate.com
              3. Massey PB. Dietary supplements. Med Clin North Am. 2002;86(1):127-147. doi:10.1016/s0025-7125(03)00076-2
              4. Peake JM. Recovery after exercise: What is the current state of play? Current Opinion in Physiology. 2019;10:17–26. https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S2468867319300379. doi: 10.1016/j.cophys.2019.03.007.
              5. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. Questions and Answers on Dietary Supplements. FDA. Updated December 4, 2023. Accessed May 22, 2025. https://www.fda.gov/food/information-consumers-using-dietary-supplements/questions-and-answers-dietary-supplements
              6. Maughan RJ, Burke LM, Dvorak J, et al. IOC Consensus Statement: Dietary Supplements and the High-Performance Athlete. Int J Sport Nutr Exerc Metab. 2018;28(2):104-125. doi: 10.1123/ijsnem.2018-0020
              7. Mabrey G, Koozehchian MS, Newton AT, et al. The Effect of Creatine Nitrate and Caffeine Individually or Combined on Exercise Performance and Cognitive Function: A Randomized, Crossover, Double-Blind, Placebo-Controlled Trial. Nutrients. 2024;16(6):766. doi:10.3390/nu16060766
              8. Nunes EA, Colenso-Semple L, McKellar SR, et al. Systematic review and meta-analysis of protein intake to support muscle mass and function in healthy adults. J Cachexia Sarcopenia Muscle. 2022;13(2):795-810. doi: 10.1002/jcsm.12922
              9. Kedia AW, Hofheins JE, Habowski SM, et al. Effects of a pre-workout supplement on lean mass, muscular performance, subjective workout experience and biomarkers of safety. Int J Med Sci. 2014 Jan 2;11(2):116-26. doi: 10.7150/ijms.7073
              10. White CM. Dietary Supplements Pose Real Dangers to Patients. Ann Pharmacother. 2020 Aug;54(8):815-819. doi: 10.1177/1060028019900504
              11. Gutiérrez-Hellín J, Del Coso J, Franco-Andrés A, et al. Creatine Supplementation Beyond Athletics: Benefits of Different Types of Creatine for Women, Vegans, and Clinical Populations—A Narrative Review. Nutrients. 2025; 17(1):95. https://doi.org/10.3390/nu17010095
              12. Graham AS, Hatton RC. Creatine: a review of efficacy and safety. J Am Pharm Assoc (Wash). 1999;39(6):803-877.
              13. Fernandez MM, Hosey RG. Performance-enhancing drugs snare nonathletes, too. J Fam Pract. 2009;58(1):16-23.
              14. Creatine. Natural Medicines. Accessed June 5, 2025. https://naturalmedicines-therapeuticresearch-com.ezproxy.lib.uconn.edu/
              15. Antonio J, Candow DG, Forbes SC, et al. Common questions and misconceptions about creatine supplementation: what does the scientific evidence really show? J Int Soc Sports Nutr. 2021;18(1):13. doi: 10.1186/s12970-021-00412-w.
              16. Creatine. Cleveland Clinic. Updated April 26, 2023. Accessed June 5, 2025. https://my.clevelandclinic.org/health/treatments/17674-creatine.
              17. Jäger R, Purpura M, Shao A, et al. Analysis of the efficacy, safety, and regulatory status of novel forms of creatine. Amino Acids. 2011;40(5):1369-1383. doi:10.1007/s00726-011-0874-6
              18. Lanhers C, Pereira B, Naughton G, Trousselard M, Lesage FX, Dutheil F. Creatine Supplementation and Upper Limb Strength Performance: A Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis. Sports Med. 2017;47(1):163-173. doi:10.1007/s40279-016-0571-4
              19. Ferrari L, Panaite SA, Bertazzo A, Visioli F. Animal- and Plant-Based Protein Sources: A Scoping Review of Human Health Outcomes and Environmental Impact. Nutrients. 2022;14(23):5115. Published 2022 Dec 1. doi:10.3390/nu14235115
              20. How to choose the best protein powder for you. Cleveland Clinic. June 12, 2020. Accessed June 3, 2025. https://health.clevelandclinic.org/7-tips-choosing-best-protein-powder.
              21. Is whey protein good for you? Cleveland Clinic. January 4, 2021. Accessed June 5, 2025. https://health.clevelandclinic.org/is-whey-protein-good-for-you.
              22. Carbone JW, Pasiakos SM. Dietary protein and muscle mass: Translating science to application and Health Benefit. Nutrients. 2019;11(5):1136. doi:10.3390/nu11051136
              23. Wardlaw S. How Much Protein Do I Need if I Work Out? Mass General Brigham. January 4, 2024. Accessed June 5, 2025. https://www.massgeneralbrigham.org/en/about/newsroom/articles/how-much-protein-when-working-out.
              24. Thomas DT, Erdman KA, Burke LM. Position of the Academy of Nutrition and Dietetics, dietitians of Canada, and the American College of Sports Medicine: Nutrition and Athletic Performance. Journal of the Academy of Nutrition and Dietetics. 2016;116(3):501-528. doi:10.1016/j.jand.2015.12.006
              25. Latner JD, Wilson GT. Binge eating and satiety in bulimia nervosa and binge eating disorder: effects of macronutrient intake. Int J Eat Disord. 2004;36(4):402-415. doi:10.1002/eat.20060
              26. Hewlings SJ. Eating Disorders and Dietary Supplements: A Review of the Science. Nutrients. 2023;15(9):2076. Published 2023 Apr 25. doi:10.3390/nu15092076
              27. Hackert AN, Kniskern MA, Beasley TM. Academy of Nutrition and Dietetics: Revised 2020 Standards of Practice and Standards of Professional Performance for Registered Dietitian Nutritionists (Competent, Proficient, and Expert) in Eating Disorders. J Acad Nutr Diet. 2020;120(11):1902-1919.e54. doi:10.1016/j.jand.2020.07.014
              28. Gupta RS, Warren CM, Smith BM, et al. The Public Health Impact of Parent-Reported Childhood Food Allergies in the United States. Pediatrics. 2018;142(6):e20181235. doi:10.1542/peds.2018-1235
              29. Niederberger E, Parnham MJ. The Impact of Diet and Exercise on Drug Responses. Int J Mol Sci. 2021;22(14):7692. doi:10.3390/ijms22147692.
              30. Why vitamin K can be dangerous if you take warfarin. Cleveland Clinic. October 28, 2019. Accessed June 4, 2025. https://health.clevelandclinic.org/vitamin-k-can-dangerous-take-warfarin.
              31. The hidden dangers of protein powders. Harvard Health. August 15, 2022. Accessed July 8, 2025. https://www.health.harvard.edu/staying-healthy/the-hidden-dangers-of-protein-powders.
              32. Kelly OJ, Gilman JC, Ilich JZ. Utilizing dietary nutrient ratios in nutritional research: Expanding the concept of nutrient ratios to macronutrients. MDPI. January 28, 2019. Accessed June 4, 2025. https://www.mdpi.com/2072-6643/11/2/282
              33. Josse, A. R., Atkinson, S. A., Tarnopolsky, M. A., & Phillips, S. M. (2012). Diets higher in dairy foods and dietary protein support bone health during diet- and exercise-induced weight loss in overweight and obese premenopausal women. The Journal of clinical endocrinology and metabolism, 97(1), 251–260. https://doi.org/10.1210/jc.2011-2165
              34. Berryman CE, Agarwal S, Lieberman HR, Fulgoni VL, Pasiakos SM. Diets higher in animal and plant protein are associated with lower adiposity and do not impair kidney function in US adults. The American Journal of Clinical Nutrition. July 27, 2016. Accessed August 4, 2025. https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S0002916522045981?via%3Dihub.
              35. Adela H, Paul JF. Dietary protein and changes in biomarkers of inflammation and oxidative stress in the Framingham Heart Study Offspring Cohort. Current Developments in Nutrition. March 28, 2019. Accessed August 4, 2025. https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S2475299122130143.
              36. Jagim AR, Harty PS, Camic CL. Common Ingredient Profiles of Multi-Ingredient Pre-Workout Supplements. Nutrients. 2019;11(2):254. doi: 10.3390/nu11020254
              37. Martinez N, Campbell B, Franek M, et al. The effect of acute pre-workout supplementation on power and strength performance. J Int Soc Sports Nutr. 2016;13:29. doi: 10.1186/s12970-016-0138-7
              38. Saunders B, Elliott-Sale K, Artioli GG, et al. β-alanine supplementation to improve exercise capacity and performance: a systematic review and meta-analysis. Br J Sports Med. 2017;51(8):658-669. doi:10.1136/bjsports-2016-096396
              39. Beta-Alanine. Natural Medicines. Accessed June 5 2025. https://naturalmedicines-therapeuticresearch-com.ezproxy.lib.uconn.edu/
              40. Caffeine. Natural medicines. Accessed June 5, 2025. https://naturalmedicines-therapeuticresearch-com.ezproxy.lib.uconn.edu/
              41. Hughes A. Acute Caffeine Poisoning. UpToDate. UpToDate, Inc. Updated April 7, 2025. Accessed June 3, 2025. https://www.uptodate.com
              42. Cornelis MC, El-Sohemy A, Kabagambe EK, Campos H. Coffee, CYP1A2 genotype, and risk of myocardial infarction. JAMA. 2006;295(10):1135-1141. doi:10.1001/jama.295.10.1135
              43. Sachse C, Brockmöller J, Bauer S, Roots I. Functional significance of a C-->A polymorphism in intron 1 of the cytochrome P450 CYP1A2 gene tested with caffeine. Br J Clin Pharmacol. 1999;47(4):445-449. doi:10.1046/j.1365-2125.1999.00898.x

              Law: “Gas Station” Drugs: A Regulatory Void

              Learning Objectives

               

              After completing this application-based continuing education activity, pharmacists and pharmacy technicians will be able to

              • Contrast the regulation of different categories of therapeutic agents
              • Describe the emergence and prevalence of "gas station" drugs
              • List the potential effects of unregulated medical products
              • Characterize the attempts to regulate examples of "gas station" drugs

                  A cartoon version of a gas station, including a gasoline pump to the left and a garbage can to the right. A tall canopy covers both items.

                  Release Date:

                  Release Date: September 15, 2025

                  Expiration Date: September 15, 2028

                  Course Fee

                  Pharmacists: $7

                  Pharmacy Technicians: $4

                  ACPE UANs

                  Pharmacist: 0009-0000-25-053-H03-P

                  Pharmacy Technician: 0009-0000-25-053-H03-T

                  Session Codes

                  Pharmacist: 25YC53-UFL36

                  Pharmacy Technician: 25YC53-LFU63

                  Accreditation Hours

                  2.0 hours of CE

                  Accreditation Statements

                  The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy is accredited by the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education as a provider of continuing pharmacy education.  Statements of credit for the online activity ACPE UAN 0009-0000-25-053-H03-P/T  will be awarded when the post test and evaluation have been completed and passed with a 70% or better. Your CE credits will be uploaded to your CPE monitor profile within 2 weeks of completion of the program.

                   

                  Disclosure of Discussions of Off-label and Investigational Drug Use

                  The material presented here does not necessarily reflect the views of The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy or its co-sponsor affiliates. These materials may discuss uses and dosages for therapeutic products, processes, procedures and inferred diagnoses that have not been approved by the United States Food and Drug Administration. A qualified health care professional should be consulted before using any therapeutic product discussed. All readers and continuing education participants should verify all information and data before treating patients or employing any therapies described in this continuing education activity.

                  Faculty

                  Gerald Gianutsos, B.S. Pharm, Ph.D., J.D.
                  Emeritus Associate Professor of Pharmaceutical Sciences
                  University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy
                  Storrs, CT
                   

                  Faculty Disclosure

                  In accordance with the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education (ACPE) Criteria for Quality and Interpretive Guidelines, The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy requires that faculty disclose any relationship that the faculty may have with commercial entities whose products or services may be mentioned in the activity.

                  Gerald Gianutsos, B.S. Pharm, Ph.D., J.D., has no relationships with ineligible companies and therefore have nothing to disclose.

                  ABSTRACT

                  The FDA has a highly structured and formal process for approving prescription drugs. However, nonprescription drugs receive less oversight. This activity will review the regulatory requirements for different categories of therapeutic agents. Several substances with the potential to cause serious adverse effects and dependence have emerged that have evaded any regulation by government agencies. Many of these are readily available in non-pharmacy settings such as convenience stores and online. The risks associated with these agents will also be discussed, with an emphasis on “gas station” drugs. Finally, efforts to provide some regulatory control over gas station drugs, which are often futile, will also be described.

                  CONTENT

                  Content

                  INTRODUCTION

                   

                  "Imagine if you're [at a] truck stop, you take two bottles of that and you're driving down the road — now you're high on opioids.”1 Researcher Todd Hillhouse.

                   

                  The commentator above is not referring to a product purchased from a seedy individual at the rear of the parking area, but rather something purchased out in the open, off the shelf of the public retail outlet prominently located within the rest area. Can it possibly be true that the public can purchase a product that mimics opioids at a truck stop or convenience store or online, no questions asked? Not only does the drug allegedly produce a “high,” It’s been associated with increasing reports of serious adverse events and addiction.2 Shouldn’t the FDA or DEA have regulations in place to prevent this from occurring?

                   

                  The drug in question is tianeptine, colloquially referred to as “Gas Station Heroin,” and is only one of several examples of a commodity that poses a danger to the public but falls between the cracks of regulatory oversight.

                   

                  Pharmacists are accustomed to dispensing prescription drugs that have undergone rigid clinical testing and been approved by the United States (U.S.) Food and Drug Administration (FDA). However, many products face less stringent requirements (e.g., over the counter [OTC] drugs, supplements) and some may receive no approval whatsoever. This activity will compare the regulatory standards for several categories of consumer products with an emphasis on substances that circumvent regulatory review.

                   

                  DRUG APPROVAL

                  Generally, a drug will undergo some level of review before it makes it way to the public. However, the rigor of the scrutiny varies greatly depending on the nature of the drug.

                   

                  As you are no doubt aware, prescription drugs on the market have been reviewed by the FDA which assesses evidence that the drug is safe and effective.3 The FDA's Center for Drug Evaluation and Research (CDER) evaluates evidence submitted by the manufacturer to ensure that drugs, both brand-name and generic, are effective for the target condition and that their health benefits outweigh their known risks.3 This is a structured process and generally requires at least two clinical trials. Approved drugs are also subject to post-market surveillance to ensure that they continue to be safe.3

                   

                  The FDA also has several accelerated approval mechanisms that expedite the marketing of promising prescription therapies that treat serious or life-threatening conditions and provide therapeutic benefit over available therapies. Many drugs have been approved under these programs and have altered the course of treatment since these pathways were developed in 1992, including antiretroviral drugs used to treat HIV/AIDS and targeted anti-cancer agents.3

                   

                  During the COVID pandemic, pharmacists became familiar with another modified drug approval mechanism, emergency use authorization (EUA).4 If the Secretary of Health and Human Services (HHS) declares a public health emergency, the FDA may authorize the emergency use of unapproved medical products or unapproved uses of approved medical products.

                   

                  The FDA was granted authority to issue EUAs in 2004 when Congress passed the Project BioShield Act. That Act was intended to facilitate the development, procurement, and use of medical countermeasures against chemical, biological, radiologic, and nuclear terrorism agents.5 The Act was passed in response to the events following the terrorism episode on 9/11; although the intent was to protect against acts of terrorism, to date the only EUAs issued have been in response to pandemics. Medical products considered for an EUA undergo FDA review, but the standard used for approval is a lower level of evidence (“reasonable to believe that the product may be effective” rather than “effective”) than needed for full FDA approval.4 There also must be no adequate, approved, and available alternative to the candidate product for diagnosing, preventing, or treating the disease or condition.4 (“Unavailable” includes insufficient supplies of the existing product to meet the emergency while inadequate includes contraindications for special circumstances or populations, for example children.4)

                   

                  Readers will be spared from a detailed review of the drug approval process, since pharmacists probably heard this numerous times while in school, but it is an important reminder that non-prescription compounds do not undergo the same rigorous pre-market evaluation by the FDA. OTC drugs are also approved by the FDA, but under different criteria. The primary difference is that the approval of prescription drugs requires approval of a specific drug product to treat a specific condition. Conversely, most OTC products must only conform with existing OTC monographs that describe the marketing standards including the active ingredients, labeling, and other general requirements.6

                   

                  OTC monographs set the conditions under which OTC drug products are generally recognized as safe and effective for their intended use. A monograph covers active ingredients, dosages, formulations, and labeling claims; a new OTC product does not need FDA approval if its manufacturer complies with the relevant monograph. This is because the FDA had already evaluated the safety and effectiveness evidence as part of its monograph rulemaking process.6 However, the FDA assesses monograph compliance as part of its inspection process.7

                   

                  If it is a new OTC product without an existing monograph, the manufacturer must submit a New Drug Application (NDA) with clinical trial data demonstrating safety and effectiveness.7

                   

                  In addition, the sponsor must provide consumer behavior studies demonstrating that purchasers can use the nonprescription drug product safely and effectively without the supervision of a healthcare provider.7 Of course, a prescription drug may also become an OTC drug.8

                   

                  In stark contrast, oversight of supplements is much less rigorous. Dietary supplements are not subject to the Food, Drug, and Cosmetic Act (FDCA Act), but rather are regulated by a different law, the Dietary Supplement Health and Education Act (DSHEA). DSHEA, enacted in 1994, states that “the Federal Government should not take any actions to impose unreasonable regulatory barriers limiting or slowing the flow of safe products and accurate information to consumers.”9 A dietary supplement is defined as a vitamin, mineral, amino acid, herb or other botanical, or a dietary substance for use by man to supplement the diet by increasing the total dietary intake.9

                   

                  Unlike drugs, supplements are not subject to pre-market FDA approval.10 (Hence the disclaimer found on supplement labels [“This statement has not been evaluated by the Food and Drug Administration."]). The manufacturer does not have to provide the FDA with the evidence it relies on to substantiate safety before or after it markets its products. However, if a proposed dietary supplement contains a new dietary ingredient, the manufacturer must submit a notification to the FDA 75 days before introducing it to the market. The notice must include information on the basis of which the firm has concluded that the supplement will reasonably be expected to be safe.10 (Only a notice is required, the FDA does not evaluate the data.)

                   

                  Manufacturers and distributors have the initial responsibility for ensuring that their dietary supplements meet the safety standards for dietary supplements. In general, the FDA’s ability to take action is limited to postmarket enforcement.11 Manufacturers and distributors must record, investigate, and forward to FDA any reports they receive of serious adverse events associated with the use of their products.

                   

                  The FDA cannot conduct post-market research on supplements to corroborate a manufacturer’s claims. It can only issue warning letters asking manufacturers to voluntarily recall adulterated or misbranded products. If a manufacturer refuses to voluntarily recall its product, the burden is on the FDA to prove that the supplement is harmful or adulterated.11 The FDA must show that the dietary supplement has a significant or unreasonable risk of causing injury or illness, a very high bar. In addition to issues of safety, problems exist with respect to the purity and bioavailability of some products.11

                   

                  Supplement manufacturers do have restrictions on the types of claims they can make. They may not claim to diagnose, mitigate, treat, cure, or prevent a specific disease or class (which would make them a drug, hence the second part of the label disclaimer: “This product is not intended to diagnose, treat, cure, or prevent any disease”) but may claim to aid a structure or function of the human body, benefit a classical nutrient disease, or promote general well-being.10

                   

                  PAUSE AND PONDER: Should supplements be subject to more stringent regulations and if so, in what ways?

                   

                  IF I’M NOT A DRUG NOR A SUPPLEMENT, WHAT AM I?

                  Despite all these regulatory pathways providing some degree of control, products can wind up being available for retail sale without any oversight. As noted above, an example of this is tianeptine, which is not FDA-approved, is not generally recognized as safe for use in food, and does not meet the statutory definition of a dietary ingredient. It is, nevertheless, commonly available from retail outlets.12

                   

                  “Gas Station” Drugs

                  A growing number of substances are available from gas stations, convenience stores, bodegas, vape shops, and even the Internet; they may even be purchased by minors.13 They have been given the label “gas station” drugs.

                   

                  It is believed that the first instance of a “gas station” drug was the emergence of “Spice,” a synthetic cannabinoid (producing cannabis-like effects) in 2008.13 The drugs were sold under the guise of being herbal incense or potpourri to circumvent the approval process; the FDA eventually placed the drugs in Schedule I in 2011. A similar pattern was seen a few years later with synthetic cathinones being sold as “bath salts” with “warnings” that they were for external use only, even though testimonials clearly indicated that they were being taken internally. (Cathinone is a naturally occurring beta-ketone amphetamine analogue from the leaves of the Catha edulis plant. Synthetic cathinones derivatives may possess both amphetamine-like properties and the ability to modulate serotonin, causing distinct psychoactive effects.) The Drug Enforcement Administration (DEA) eventually banned them after a series of fatalities occurred.13 Typically, substances like these continue to be sold until their dangerous consequences are recognized and there are calls to restrict them.13

                   

                  Some examples of unregulated drugs available today include delta 8/10 tetrahydrocannabinol, Royal Honey, and Rhino which contain sildenafil, tianeptine, kratom, and phenibut.13 The latter three substances will be discussed more fully below.

                   

                  PAUSE AND PONDER: What would you do if someone asked, “Does the pharmacy sell (one of the gas station drugs)”?

                   

                  Tianeptine

                  One of the newer emerging gas station threats is the sale of products containing tianeptine.14 Tianeptine was synthesized in France in 1971 as an analog of the newly discovered tricyclic antidepressants. It was approved in France as an antidepressant in 1989 and is now available in more than 60 countries.13,15

                   

                  Tianeptine [(7-((3-chloro-6-methyl-5,5-dioxido-6,11-dihydrodibenzo[c,f][1,2]thiazepin-11-yl)amino)heptanoic acid)] is an atypical tricyclic antidepressant approved in some European, Asian, and Latin American countries primarily for the treatment of major depression. It has also been used to treat anxiety and irritable bowel syndrome.13 Unlike traditional tricyclics which block serotonin reuptake in the CNS, tianeptine actually increases serotonin uptake.13 However, it is now believed that its antidepressant activity is related to modulating glutamate-mediated pathways involved in neuroplasticity (a process that involves adaptive structural and functional changes to the brain; in other words, the brain's ability to absorb information and evolve to manage new challenges).15 Unlike conventional tricyclic antidepressants, tianeptine is not primarily metabolized by cytochrome P450s, but is largely metabolized by β–oxidation (which would be a consideration with regard to potential drug interactions).15

                   

                  More significantly for the purpose of this activity, tianeptine acts as a full agonist at the mu-opiate receptor and a weak agonist at the delta-opioid receptor.13,14 It is moderately potent but highly efficacious as a mu agonist.15 As such, it causes opiate-like euphoria and carries a significant risk of overdose.13 Moreover, it has a short half-life that can lead to rapid withdrawal, increasing its potential for addiction and misuse.13 Some of the countries where tianeptine has been approved to treat depression and anxiety have restricted how tianeptine is prescribed or dispensed, or warned of possible risk of addiction.13

                   

                  In the U.S., tianeptine is not an approved prescription drug, but has become more visible as an OTC product sold in retail stores under the names of ZaZa Red, Tianna Red, Neptune’s Fix, Pegasus, TD Red, and others.12 The drug has earned the nickname “gas station heroin” due to its opioid-like effects and potential for similar abuse.12

                   

                  U.S. law enforcement has encountered tianeptine in various forms, including bulk powder, counterfeit pills mimicking hydrocodone and oxycodone pharmaceutical products, and individual stamp bags (small wax packets commonly used to distribute heroin).14 Tianeptine has also been combined with antidepressants and antianxiety medications; patients often combine the drugs themselves, and some manufacturers make fixed-dose combinations.14

                   

                  Tianeptine-containing products available to consumers include some with high doses and are making dangerous and unproven claims that tianeptine can improve brain function and treat anxiety, depression, pain, opioid use disorder, and other conditions.12 Case reports in the medical literature describe U.S. consumers ingesting daily doses on the order of 1.3 to 250 times (50 mg to 10,000 mg) the daily tianeptine dose typically recommended in labeled foreign drug products.12

                   

                  Risks

                  Reports of adverse reactions and adverse effects involving tianeptine have been increasing in the U.S.16 Poison control centers have reported that cases involving tianeptine exposure increased nationwide, from 4 cases in 2013 to nearly 350 cases in 2024. From 2020 to 2022, more than 600 calls were made to poison control centers after exposure, and five deaths occurred as a result.16

                   

                  The FDA has identified cases in which consumers have experienced serious harmful effects from abusing or misusing tianeptine including agitation, drowsiness, confusion, sweating, rapid heartbeat, high blood pressure, nausea, vomiting, slowed or stopped breathing, coma and death.16 Naloxone is an appropriate countermeasure in cases of severe poisoning, since tianeptine has opioid effects.13 Users frequently consume tianeptine chronically and, if they stop tianeptine abruptly, they may experience withdrawal symptoms similar to those associated with opioid discontinuation (e.g., craving, sweating, “goose flesh,” diarrhea, myalgias).16 Tolerance and dependence appear to develop quickly.17 Severe withdrawal symptoms in humans that have led to hospitalization following the use of tianeptine have also been reported.12,16

                   

                  Like many drugs of this nature, tianeptine is frequently found combined with other illicit ingredients, often synthetic cannabinoids, which are not included on the product label.17 Poison control centers describe the signs of overdose to vary widely and include clamminess, nausea, low blood pressure, and unconsciousness as well as seizures and severe stomach cramps.17

                   

                  It is difficult to get an accurate picture of the extent of tianeptine abuse. Reports to poison control centers are voluntary and hospitals do not test for it, so its prevalence is likely underreported.17 The drug also has a strong following on social media where its merits are hotly debated with one social media forum called “Quitting Tianeptine” attracting more than 5,000 followers.17

                   

                  Regulation

                  Clearly, tianeptine is not an FDA-approved medication. Could its sale at convenience outlets be justified as being designated a dietary supplement and therefore an appropriate consumer product covered by DSHEA? The FDA says it does not meet the statutory criteria for a dietary supplement.18

                   

                  Therefore, in the FDA’s view, “It is an unsafe food additive, and dietary supplements containing tianeptine are adulterated under the FD&C Act” (i.e., not “legal”). Nevertheless, many tianeptine products, frequently of non-U.S. origin, are openly marketed as supplements with many consumers mistakenly believing that it is a safe alternative to street opioids.17

                   

                  FDA Action

                  In May 2025, the FDA issued warnings to consumers about the “dangerous and growing health trend facing our nation” about the increasing number of adverse events, including death, associated with tianeptine-containing products.12 The agency warned consumers not to purchase or use any tianeptine product due to serious risks. The agency also issued warning letters to companies distributing and selling tianeptine products and issued an import alert to help block shipments to the U.S.19 However, its sale is not restricted.

                   

                  Several states have taken steps to limit sales of these products. Some states have placed tianeptine on controlled drug schedules.20 At least eight states (AL, FL, GA, IN, KY, MN, OH, VA) classify tianeptine as a C-I drug. Five others (AR, MI, NC, OK, TN) have placed it in C-II and Mississippi considers it a C-III substance. Other states have similar restrictions under consideration.20

                   

                  Increasing the control of tianeptine is also being discussed at the federal level. In 2024, members of Congress wrote to the FDA urging them to take steps beyond the issuing of warnings, stating that they believed that “more action on tianeptine use is needed to ensure the health and well-being of the American people.”21 There is a bill pending in Congress that would place the drug in C-III.22

                   

                  A more recent Congressional proposal would ban the sale of tianeptine entirely.23 It remains to be seen if additional regulation becomes a reality.

                   

                  KRATOM

                  Tianeptine is not the only product to exist in a regulatory gray area. Another example with a long history of regulatory wrangling is kratom.24 Kratom (Mitragyna speciosa korth) is a tropical tree indigenous to regions of Southeast Asia (Thailand, Malaysia, Myanmar) and belongs to the same family as the coffee tree.25 Traditionally, Thai and Malaysian laborers and farmers chewed the leaves to relieve fatigue. It has also been used as a substitute for opium when opium is unavailable and chronic opioid users have used it to manage opioid withdrawal symptoms.25 Soldiers returning from the Vietnam war and immigrants from Southeast Asia introduced kratom to America.26

                   

                  The principal constituents of Kratom, mitragynine (MTG) and 7-hydroxymitragynine (7-HMG), have opioid receptor activity.25 These compounds are indole alkaloids structurally related to yohimbine and have shown anti-inflammatory and analgesic activity in experimental animals.27

                   

                  MTG and 7-HMG both bind to the human opioid receptors with nanomolar affinity; they function as partial agonists at the mu-opioid receptor and weak antagonists at kappa-opioid and delta-opioid receptors.27

                   

                  7-HMG exhibits approximately 5-fold greater affinity at the mu-opioid receptor compared to MTG. In rats, MTG does not exhibit abuse liability and decreases the reinforcing effects of morphine. On the other hand, 7-HMG demonstrates abuse liability and increased morphine self-administration.27 MTG can be converted to 7-HMG both in vitro and in a mouse model. It is likely that at least some of the activity attributed to kratom may be due to its metabolic conversion to 7-HMG.27 It has been suggested that individuals who self-administer kratom tea to treat pain, addiction, or depression might achieve very different results depending on the alkaloid profile of the product that they use.27 If so, it would be difficult for consumers to predict the magnitude of activity to expect from ingesting the product since the product labeling does not reflect the variability in alkaloid content .27

                   

                  Kratom produces both stimulant and sedative effects. At low doses, kratom produces stimulant effects, with users reporting increased alertness, physical energy, talkativeness, and sociable behavior, while high doses produce opioid effects including sedation and euphoria.25 Effects occur within five to 10 minutes after ingestion and last for two to five hours.

                   

                  The most significant issue with products labeled “kratom” is the introduction of high concentrations of a metabolite (7-HMG) as the most abundant alkaloid. The most abundant alkaloid in traditional kratom products is mitragynine, with concentrations ranging from 54% to 66% of the total alkaloid content. Many other alkaloids comprise the remaining 34% to 46% of total alkaloids, but 7-HMG only constitutes less than 1% of the total. In its natural, fresh state, kratom leaves do not contain 7-HMG. “Kratom” products, often enhanced with extra 7-HMG, are available from Internet sites where it is promoted as a legal psychoactive product.25 Website entries include listings of vendors, methods of preparation, user experiences, and alleged medicinal uses.25 Kratom products are commonly sold in powder form, which is bitter, and users typically consume it as a capsule or use the powder to make tea.26 Common uses are as an alternative to prescription opioids for pain, self-management of opioid or other substance use disorder (including easing withdrawal symptoms), or treating anxiety and depression.25,26 Reports of adverse effects have increased as the drug has become more popular, with more frequent admission to a healthcare facility and serious medical outcomes, such as seizure, respiratory distress, or slow heart rate.26 According to data from the FDA's adverse event reporting system, mitragynine was involved in 1,255 cases from 2008 to September 2024 of which 1,171 cases were classified as serious and 637 cases resulted in death.25

                   

                  Regulatory Actions

                  The risks associated with kratom have prompted government officials to try to restrict its sales for almost a decade, but these efforts have been largely unsuccessful. In 2016, the DEA published its intent to temporarily place MTG and 7-HMG into Schedule I.28 (The Controlled Substances Act empowers the Attorney General to temporarily place a substance into Schedule I for two years without regard to other administrative requirements if there is a finding that such action is “necessary to avoid an imminent hazard to the public safety.”) This decision was based, in part, on the DEA’s finding that the “severity of the reported outcomes, health effects, and increased use of kratom suggests an emerging public health threat.”28 Organizations promoting kratom use did not receive this decision favorably.24,26

                   

                  Shortly after the DEA published its notice of intent, a “March for Kratom” was organized at the White House and the protests convinced 51 members of Congress on both sides of the aisle to sign a letter disagreeing with the DEA’s decision.26 Kratom supporters also sent a petition containing more than 145,00 signatures opposing the DEA’s decision to President Obama.26

                   

                  Kratom advocates stressed several points. They disputed the DEA’s claim about the magnitude of the harm that the substance was producing and also cited reports of possible beneficial effects of kratom as a useful alternative to opioids in managing pain and treating opiate addiction. They maintained that kratom is safer than prescription opioids and that the deaths associated with kratom could be due largely to the simultaneous use of other substances.26 Supporters also posted numerous online testimonials from users touting kratom’s beneficial effects.26

                   

                  As a result of the backlash, the DEA withdrew the proposed action less than two months after the initial publication, citing numerous comments from the public. The DEA initiated a period of public comment on the scheduling recommendation and received over 23,000 comments with 99% of them opposing the ban.26

                   

                  A year later, the FDA renewed its effort to schedule the kratom alkaloids and submitted an “eight factor” analysis to the DEA (see the SIDEBAR).26 A month later, the FDA announced a public health advisory on kratom and supported stricter regulation by asserting that kratom was associated with 36 deaths and has similar effects and dangers to other opioids. This was followed by a recall based on contamination of samples with Salmonella or heavy metals.26 However, its legal status has remained unchanged.

                   

                  SIDEBAR: DEA 8 Factor Test

                  In determining into which schedule a drug or other substance should be placed, or whether a substance should be decontrolled or rescheduled, certain factors are required to be considered by the Controlled Substances Act [21 U.S.C §811(c) ].29 These are

                  1. Its actual or relative potential for abuse.
                  2. Scientific evidence of its pharmacological effect, if known.
                  3. The state of current scientific knowledge regarding the drug or other substance.
                  4. Its history and current pattern of abuse.
                  5. The scope, duration, and significance of abuse.
                  6. What, if any, risk there is to the public health.
                  7. Its psychic or physiological dependence liability.
                  8. Whether the substance is an immediate precursor of a substance already controlled under CSA.

                   

                  In 2021 the World Health Organization (WHO) announced that it would conduct a review of kratom as part of its role in making public health recommendations to the international community. The FDA participated in this process by submitting information, although two U.S. Senators urged the agency to oppose any effort to add kratom to the list of internationally controlled substances.26 Ultimately, the Committee concluded that there is insufficient evidence to recommend a critical review of kratom.30

                   

                  The controversy over kratom has not abated, however. In 2023, bills were introduced in both houses of Congress to “protect access to kratom.”26,31 The bills did not expressly address the legal status but would require the HHS Secretary to hold at least one public hearing to discuss the safety of kratom products. Significantly, if enacted, the law would prohibit HHS from imposing requirements on kratom that are more restrictive than those for foods or dietary supplements.26,31 It would still permit states to impose more restrictive laws.

                   

                  More recently, in July 2025, the FDA recommended that products with concentrated levels of 7-HMG be classified as C-I substances; the press release does not define concentrated and the warning only refers to "added" 7-HMG.32 This would apply to products containing high levels of 7-HMG in tablets, gummies, drinks, or parenteral, but not plant, products. FDA Commissioner Makary called the move an “effort to prevent another ‘wave of the opioid epidemic’” from blindsiding the country.”32

                   

                  Most states permit the sale, possession, and consumption of kratom, although some set limits.26 There are age restrictions on the sale or possession of kratom products in 18 states; seven of the states restrict the distribution kratom to individuals 18 years of age or older while the other 11 states set an age restriction of 21.26 Tennessee had banned kratom completely, but changed its law to permit natural forms of kratom to be used by individuals over the age of 21.33 Other states have labelling requirements on kratom products.26,34 For example, South Carolina passed a law in 2025 mandating that labels must provide details on alkaloid content, serving sizes, and include FDA disclaimers and age warnings. Violations incur civil penalties up to $2,000.34

                   

                  Some states have taken more aggressive steps to limit access to kratom. Michigan became the first state to ban sales of the drug, classifying it as a Schedule II controlled substance in 2018.1 As of April 2025, 24 states and the District of Columbia regulate kratom products in some manner.26 Seven states (AL, AK, IN, MI, RI, VT, and WI) and the District of Columbia, treat kratom’s psychoactive components as controlled substances.26

                   

                  Seven states (AL, AR, IN, LA, RI, VT, WI) effectively ban the sale of kratom by classifying both the plant material and the psychoactive alkaloids as a controlled substance.33,34 Most have defined it as a C-I substance. Louisiana passed its law in August 2025 classifying the active ingredients, kratom products, and the Mitragyna tree as Schedule I controlled substances. Penalties are severe; producing or distributing kratom can lead to fines up to $50,000 and one to five years in prison, while possession incurs fines up to $1,000 or six months in jail for repeat offenses.34

                   

                  Other states have enacted more consumer-focused kinds of controls.34 For example, Hawaii requires products to be registered with the Department of Health, have third-party lab testing, and comply with federal good manufacturing practices. Products may not exceed 2% 7-HMG, contain harmful substances like synthetic cannabinoids, or be designed to attract children (e.g., cartoon-shaped products).34 Mississippi requires retailers to obtain permits and imposes an excise tax of $2.50 per ounce for kratom leaf and $5.00 per ounce for extracts.34 Four states (AZ, GA, OK, UT) require that labels indicate the alkaloid content of the product.34

                   

                  PAUSE AND PONDER: Where should the line be drawn between protecting the public and patient autonomy?

                   

                  PHENIBUT

                  Phenibut, known colloquially as Phenigamma and Phenygam among others, is another substance that has evaded regulatory control. Phenibut is a derivative of gamma-amino butyric acid (GABA) and acts as a GABA mimetic primarily at GABA-B receptors (like baclofen); it also affects GABA-A receptors but to a lesser extent. It also stimulates dopamine receptors and antagonizes beta-phenethylamine (PEA), a putative endogenous anxiogenic transmitter.35 Both its desired and adverse effects appear similar to other GABA receptor modulators like benzodiazepines.36

                   

                  It was originally developed in the former Soviet Union in the 1960s to relieve anxiety and improve cognitive function in military personnel.37 Later it was introduced into clinical medicine as a treatment for anxiety, insomnia, and various psychiatric conditions ranging from post-traumatic stress disorder to alcohol withdrawal. It has also been used to enhance cognition in young adults and to delay dementia in the elderly. Its presence has expanded to other parts of Europe and the U.S. where it is marketed as a putative OTC cognition enhancer.37 The drug is available in different forms including as a powder, “fine crystals,” and capsules and is also found combined with other substances.37,38

                   

                  Phenibut produces a number of adverse effects including drowsiness, lethargy, agitation, tachycardia, and confusion.37 In addition, it can lead to the development of tolerance and dependence and withdrawal may manifest as a severe abstinence syndrome that may require medical intervention.37 The abstinence syndrome resembles benzodiazepine withdrawal and patients may experience insomnia, anger, irritability, tremulousness, decreased appetite, and heart palpations.38 Phenibut also has the potential for interactions with related substances such as anxiolytics, antipsychotics, sedatives, opioids, and anticonvulsants.37

                   

                  During the period from 2009 to 2019, U.S. poison centers received 1,320 calls about phenibut exposures from all 50 states and the District of Columbia.39 The most commonly reported adverse health effects included drowsiness or lethargy, agitation, tachycardia, and confusion. Coma was reported in 6% of cases. In half of the cases, the exposure resulted in moderate effects with no long-term impairment. About 12% of cases reported life-threatening effects or resulting in significant disability, with three deaths.39 Physical dependence, withdrawal, and addiction have also been reported.38

                   

                  The FDA issued warning letters to companies whose products contained phenibut and were marketed as dietary supplements as far back as 2019. The FDA concluded that phenibut does not meet the statutory definition of a dietary supplement, and the products were therefore misbranded.40 Yet, phenibut is still legally available for sale in the U.S., largely through online sources.

                   

                  Phenibut has become increasingly available in the U.S. (and European) market, often labelled as a dietary supplement with claims such as promoting focus, relaxation, and positive mood; improving memory and concentration; counteracting irritability and restlessness; and increasing libido.37 Studies of consumers have found that it is frequently purchased as a therapeutic substitute for benzodiazepines, and to manage withdrawal due to benzodiazepines, opioids, and alcohol.37 Nevertheless, the FDA does not regard it as a dietary ingredient and considers phenibut-containing supplements declaring themselves as a dietary ingredient misbranded under the FDCA.

                   

                  The agency sent warning letters to at least three companies that have marketed products containing phenibut labelled as dietary supplements in 2019. Despite the warnings, the quantity of phenibut increased in three of four brands of OTC phenibut supplements tested following the FDA’s action; in some cases, the amounts detected were 450% greater than a typical 250 mg pharmaceutical tablet manufactured in Russia.41

                   

                  The warnings were obviously ineffective and phenibut remains readily available in the U.S., largely online.42 Several European countries have made phenibut a controlled substance. In the U.S., Alabama made phenibut a Schedule II drug in 2021and additional states are considering legislation to classify it as a controlled substance.42

                   

                  PEPTIDES

                  Another means used to circumvent FDA regulations is to sell drugs on-line advertised as “research compounds” or “lab use” although the promotional material and product reviews clearly show they are being used by individuals who are not enrolled in drug trails. These compounds are readily available online, including through Amazon.com.43

                   

                  There is a high demand for “research” compounds labelled as “peptides” especially among individuals seeking substances for athletic performance enhancement, improved libido, anti-aging effects, or weight loss (pseudo or real GLP-1 drugs).44 This includes existing prescription drugs purchased online through clandestine overseas operations or true research compounds. One example is sermorelin, which modulates the release of growth hormone and allegedly increases muscle mass and possibly enhances libido.44 The high demand has led to shortages of prescription products, further stimulating illicit sales.44

                   

                  FINAL COMMENTS

                  While most therapeutic substances are subject to some degree of control by the FDA, some products available in retail stores or on-line receive no regulatory approval. They present a risk to the public. Manufacturers of these substances may try to circumvent regulation by falsely depicting them as dietary supplements, research compounds, or for external use. Consumers may use these to self-manage their medical conditions or for recreational purposes with a risk of developing serious adverse effects or dependence. The FDA has tried to limit the use of these substances by issuing warnings to consumers and warning letters to manufacturers, but these tactics have had limited success. Pharmacists should be prepared to answer questions about these drugs which commonly gain momentum through social media and should point out that there is no oversight over their claims or safety.

                  Pharmacist Post Test (for viewing only)

                  LAW: “Gas Station” Drugs: A Regulatory Void

                  After completing this continuing education activity comma pharmacists and pharmacy technicians will be able to
                  1. Contrast the regulation of different categories of therapeutic agents
                  2. Describe the emergence and prevalence of “gas station” drugs
                  3. List the potential effects of unregulated medical products
                  4. Characterize the attempts to regulate examples of “gas station” drugs

                  *

                  1. In what way must a supplier interact with the FDA in order to market a dietary supplement?
                  A. It needs to obtain FDA approval after submitting safety data.
                  B. It follows a process similar to the requirements for an OTC drug.
                  C. It does not need FDA approval.

                  *

                  2. Many therapeutic agents received fast track approval during the COVID pandemic as emergency use authorization (EUA) products. Why was the EUA program established?
                  A. To accelerate the approval of novel or rare vaccines for pandemics.
                  B. To facilitate the development of countermeasures for terrorist activities.
                  C. To accelerate the approval of therapy for HIV/AIDS or orphan diseases.

                  *

                  3. A chronic user of tianeptine runs the risk of developing dependence. If the user discontinues tianeptine abruptly it may produce withdrawal effects. What withdrawal syndrome does it resemble?
                  A. Opioid withdrawal
                  B. Benzodiazepine withdrawal
                  C. Cocaine withdrawal

                  *

                  4. What category did the researchers originally place tianeptine in when they developed it?
                  A. Non-opioid analgesic
                  B. Antidepressant
                  C. Anxiolytic

                  *

                  5. What do kratom’s active components resemble that create concern?
                  A. Benzodiazepines
                  B. Cannabinoids
                  C. Opioids

                  *

                  6. The DEA tried to classify kratom as a Schedule I controlled substance in 2016. Why was this unsuccessful?
                  A. Public outcry convinced them to withdraw the petition.
                  B. They did not have the statutory authority to do so.
                  C. The DEA’s re-evaluation concluded that there was insufficient evidence of abuse to warrant a C-I designation.

                  *

                  7. What does abuse of phenibut most closely resemble?
                  A. Benzodiazepine abuse
                  B. Opioid abuse
                  C. Psychostimulant abuse

                  *

                  8. The FDA issued warning letters to the makers of phenibut in 2019. What was the outcome of the warning?
                  A. All but one company withdrew their product from the market.
                  B. The companies added additional safety information to their labels.
                  C. The quantity of phenibut in most products increased.

                  *

                  9. On-line, what do people who promote phenibut say it is?
                  A. A safe alternative to opioids
                  B. A cognition enhancer
                  C. Improving athletic performance

                  *

                  10. A bill is pending in Congress to make 7-hydroxymitragynine (7-HMG) a Schedule I substance. 7-HMG is a component of what unregulated product?
                  A. Kratom
                  B. Tianeptine
                  C. Phenibut

                  Pharmacy Technician Post Test (for viewing only)

                  LAW: “Gas Station” Drugs: A Regulatory Void

                  After completing this continuing education activity comma pharmacists and pharmacy technicians will be able to
                  1. Contrast the regulation of different categories of therapeutic agents
                  2. Describe the emergence and prevalence of “gas station” drugs
                  3. List the potential effects of unregulated medical products
                  4. Characterize the attempts to regulate examples of “gas station” drugs

                  *

                  1. In what way must a supplier interact with the FDA in order to market a dietary supplement?
                  A. It needs to obtain FDA approval after submitting safety data.
                  B. It follows a process similar to the requirements for an OTC drug.
                  C. It does not need FDA approval.

                  *

                  2. Many therapeutic agents received fast track approval during the COVID pandemic as emergency use authorization (EUA) products. Why was the EUA program established?
                  A. To accelerate the approval of novel or rare vaccines for pandemics.
                  B. To facilitate the development of countermeasures for terrorist activities.
                  C. To accelerate the approval of therapy for HIV/AIDS or orphan diseases.

                  *

                  3. A chronic user of tianeptine runs the risk of developing dependence. If the user discontinues tianeptine abruptly it may produce withdrawal effects. What withdrawal syndrome does it resemble?
                  A. Opioid withdrawal
                  B. Benzodiazepine withdrawal
                  C. Cocaine withdrawal

                  *

                  4. What category did the researchers originally place tianeptine in when they developed it?
                  A. Non-opioid analgesic
                  B. Antidepressant
                  C. Anxiolytic

                  *

                  5. What do kratom’s active components resemble that create concern?
                  A. Benzodiazepines
                  B. Cannabinoids
                  C. Opioids

                  *

                  6. The DEA tried to classify kratom as a Schedule I controlled substance in 2016. Why was this unsuccessful?
                  A. Public outcry convinced them to withdraw the petition.
                  B. They did not have the statutory authority to do so.
                  C. The DEA’s re-evaluation concluded that there was insufficient evidence of abuse to warrant a C-I designation.

                  *

                  7. What does abuse of phenibut most closely resemble?
                  A. Benzodiazepine abuse
                  B. Opioid abuse
                  C. Psychostimulant abuse

                  *

                  8. The FDA issued warning letters to the makers of phenibut in 2019. What was the outcome of the warning?
                  A. All but one company withdrew their product from the market.
                  B. The companies added additional safety information to their labels.
                  C. The quantity of phenibut in most products increased.

                  *

                  9. On-line, what do people who promote phenibut say it is?
                  A. A safe alternative to opioids
                  B. A cognition enhancer
                  C. Improving athletic performance

                  *

                  10. A bill is pending in Congress to make 7-hydroxymitragynine (7-HMG) a Schedule I substance. 7-HMG is a component of what unregulated product?
                  A. Kratom
                  B. Tianeptine
                  C. Phenibut

                  References

                  Full List of References

                  1. Chappell B. 8 Things to Know About the Drug Known As 'Gas Station Heroin'. NPR. July 14, 2024. Accessed August 5, 2025. https://www.npr.org/2024/07/12/nx-s1-4865955/tianeptine-gas-station-heroin-drug
                  2. Burkhart R. “Gas Station Heroin” Arises as New Threat. Pittsburg Post-Gazette. February 16, 2025. Accessed August 5, 2025. https://enews.wvu.edu/files/d/356bcab0-af27-4c7e-a05e-815808eb7cd9/tianeptine-aka-gas-station-heroin-an-emerging-threat-_-pittsburgh-post-gazette.pdf
                  3. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. Development and Approval Process: Drugs. August 8, 2022. Accessed August 5, 2025. https://www.fda.gov/drugs/development-approval-process-drugs
                  4. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. Emergency Use Authorization of Medical Products and Related Authorities: Guidance for Industry and Other Stakeholders. January 2017. Accessed August 5, 2025. https://www.fda.gov/regulatory-information/search-fda-guidance-documents/emergency-use-authorization-medical-products-and-related-authorities
                  5. Gottron F. The Project BioShield Act: Issues for the 113th Congress. Congressional Research Service. June 18, 2014. Accessed August 5, 2025.
                  https://sgp.fas.org/crs/terror/R43607.pdf
                  6. Bodie A. FDA Regulation of Over-the-Counter (OTC) Drugs: Overview and Issues for Congress. Congressional Research Service. December 10, 2021. Accessed August 5, 2025.
                  https://sgp.fas.org/crs/misc/R46985.pdf
                  7. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. Drug Application Process for Nonprescription Drugs. December 23, 2024. Accessed August 5, 2025.
                  https://www.fda.gov/drugs/types-applications/drug-application-process-nonprescription-drugs
                  8. Chang J, Lizer A, Patel I, Bhatia D, Tan X, Balkrishnan R. Prescription to over-the-counter switches in the United States. J Res Pharm Pract. 2016;5(3):149-154. doi: 10.4103/2279-042X.185706
                  9. National Institutes of Health. Dietary Supplement Health and Education Act of 1994. PL 103-417. 103rd Congress. Accessed August 5, 2025. https://ods.od.nih.gov/About/DSHEA_Wording.aspx
                  10. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. Questions and Answers on Dietary Supplements. February 21, 2024. Accessed August 5, 2025. https://www.fda.gov/food/information-consumers-using-dietary-supplements/questions-and-answers-dietary-supplements
                  11. Bailey RL. Current regulatory guidelines and resources to support research of dietary supplements in the United States. Crit Rev Food Sci Nutr. 2020;60(2):298-309. doi: 10.1080/10408398.2018.1524364
                  12. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. FDA warns consumers not to purchase or use any tianeptine product due to serious risks. May 8, 2025. Accessed August 5, 2025.
                  https://www.fda.gov/drugs/drug-safety-and-availability/fda-warns-consumers-not-purchase-or-use-any-tianeptine-product-due-serious-risks
                  13. Edinoff AN, Sall S, Beckman SP, Koepnick AD, et al.Tianeptine, an Antidepressant with Opioid Agonist Effects: Pharmacology and Abuse Potential, a Narrative Review. Pain Ther. 2023;12(5):1121-1134. doi: 10.1007/s40122-023-00539-5.
                  14. Drug Enforcement Administration. Tianeptine. April 2025. Accessed August 5, 2025.
                  https://www.deadiversion.usdoj.gov/drug_chem_info/tianeptine.pdf
                  15. Nishio Y, Lindsley CW, Bender AM. ACS Chemical Neuroscience 2024;15 (21):3863-3873
                  DOI: 10.1021/acschemneuro.4c00519
                  16. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. Tianeptine Products Linked to Serious Harm, Overdoses and Death. May 9, 2025. Accessed August 5, 2025. https://www.fda.gov/consumers/consumer-updates/tianeptine-products-linked-serious-harm-overdoses-death
                  17. Hoffman J. ‘Gas-Station Heroin’ Sold as Dietary Supplement Alarms Health Officials. NY Times. January 10, 2024. Accessed August 5, 2025.
                  https://www.nytimes.com/2024/01/10/health/gas-station-heroin-tianeptine-addiction.html
                  18. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. Tianeptine in Dietary Supplements. February 22, 2023. Accessed August 5, 2025.https://www.fda.gov/food/information-select-dietary-supplement-ingredients-and-other-substances/tianeptine-dietary-supplements
                  19. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. New “Gas Station Heroin” Tianeptine Product Trend. May 8, 2025. Accessed August 5, 2025.
                  https://www.fda.gov/consumers/health-fraud-scams/new-gas-station-heroin-tianeptine-product-trend
                  20. North Carolina General Assembly. Regulation of Tianeptine – State by State Overview. March 11, 2024. Accessed August 5, 2025.
                  https://webservices.ncleg.gov/ViewDocSiteFile/84838?ref=southarkansasreckoning.com
                  21. Nurse K. Lawmakers Call for FDA Overhaul on 'Gas Station Heroin'. USA Today. January 20, 2024. Accessed August 5, 2025.
                  https://www.usatoday.com/story/news/nation/2024/01/20/congress-fda-supplement-tianeptine-addictive/72294254007/
                  22. H.R.7068 - STAND Against Emerging Opioids Act. 118th Congress (2023-2024). Accessed August 5, 2025.
                  https://www.congress.gov/bill/118th-congress/house-bill/7068/all-actions
                  23. Palone F. Pallone Introduces Bill to Prohibit Sale of “Gas Station Heroin.” April 23, 2024. Accessed August 5, 2025.
                  https://democrats-energycommerce.house.gov/media/press-releases/pallone-introduces-bill-prohibit-sale-gas-station-heroin
                  24. Gianutsos G. The DEA Changes its Mind on Kratom. US Pharm. 2017;41(3):7-9. Accessed August 5, 2025. https://www.uspharmacist.com/article/the-dea-changes-its-mind-on-kratom
                  25.Drug Enforcement Administration. Kratom (Mitragyna speciosa korth). April 2025. Accessed August 5, 2025.https://www.deadiversion.usdoj.gov/drug_chem_info/kratom.pdf
                  26. Legislative Analysis and Public Policy Association. Regulation of Kratom in America: An Update. September 2022. Accessed August 5, 2025.https://legislativeanalysis.org/wp-content/uploads/2022/10/Kratom-Fact-Sheet-FINAL.pdf
                  27. Todd, D.A., Kellogg, J.J., Wallace, E.D. et al. Chemical composition and biological effects of kratom (Mitragyna speciosa): In vitro studies with implications for efficacy and drug interactions. Sci Rep. 2020;10:19158. Accessed August 5, 2025. https://doi.org/10.1038/s41598-020-76119-w
                  28. Drug Enforcement Administration. Schedules of Controlled Substances: Temporary Placement of Mitragynine and 7-Hydroxymitragynine Into Schedule I. Fed Reg. 2016;81(169):59929-59934. Accessed August 5, 2025.https://www.govinfo.gov/content/pkg/FR-2016-08-31/pdf/2016-20803.pdf
                  29. Drug Enforcement Administration. The Controlled Substances Act. Accessed August 5, 2025.
                  https://www.dea.gov/drug-information/csa
                  30. 44th WHO ECDD Summary Assessments, Findings and Recommendations. October 2021. Accessed August 5, 2025.https://cdn.who.int/media/docs/default-source/controlled-substances/44ecdd_unsg_annex1.pdf
                  31. H.R.9634 - Federal Clarity for Kratom Consumers Act. 117th Congress (2021-2022). Accessed August 5, 2025. https://www.congress.gov/bill/117th-congress/house-bill/9634?q=%7B%22search%22%3A%22kratom%22%7D&s=1&r=3
                  32. O’Connell-Domenech A. FDA Recommends Concentrated Kratom Be Scheduled as Illicit Substance. The Hill. July 29, 2025. Accessed August 5, 2025.
                  https://thehill.com/homenews/administration/5425792-trump-administration-recommends-7-oh-scheduling/
                  33. Bautista A. Kratom And The DEA: Current Stance and Updates. PureCBDNow. January 16, 2025. Accessed August 5, 2025. https://purecbdnow.com/article/kratom-and-the-dea/
                  34. Heflin JO. Kratom Regulation: Federal Status and State Approaches. Library of Congress. November 28, 2023. Accessed August 5, 2025. https://www.congress.gov/crs-product/LSB11082#:~:text=Effective%20July%201%2C%202024%2C%20Colorado,or%20deleterious%20non%2Dkratom%20substances
                  35. Lapin I. Phenibut (beta-phenyl-GABA): a tranquilizer and nootropic drug. CNS Drug Rev. 2001;7(4):471-81. doi: 10.1111/j.1527-3458.2001.tb00211.x.
                  36. Owen DR, Wood DM, Archer JR, Dargan PI (September 2016). "Phenibut (4-amino-3-phenyl-butyric acid): Availability, prevalence of use, desired effects and acute toxicity". Drug and Alcohol Review. 2016;35(5): 591–6. doi:10.1111/dar.12356. hdl:10044/1/30073
                  37. Gurley BJ, Koturbash L. Phenibut: A Drug with One Too Many “Buts”. Basic Clin Pharm Tox. 2024;135(4):409-416. Accessed August 5, 2025. https://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/doi/10.1111/bcpt.14075.
                  38. Jouney EA. Phenibut (β-Phenyl-γ-Aminobutyric Acid): an Easily Obtainable "Dietary Supplement" With Propensities for Physical Dependence and Addiction. Curr Psychiatry Rep. 2019;21(4):23. doi: 10.1007/s11920-019-1009-0
                  39. Graves JM, Dilley J, Kubsad S, Liebelt E. Notes from the Field: Phenibut Exposures Reported to Poison Centers - United States, 2009-2019. Morb Mortal Wkly Rep. 2020;69(35):1227-1228. doi: 10.15585/mmwr.mm6935a5
                  40. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. FDA Acts on Dietary Supplements Containing DMHA and Phenibut. April 29, 2019. Accessed August 5, 2025. https://www.fda.gov/food/hfp-constituent-updates/fda-acts-dietary-supplements-containing-dmha-and-phenibut
                  41. Cohen PA, Ellison RR, Travis JC, Gaufberg SV, Gerona R. Quantity of Phenibut in Dietary Supplements Before and After FDA Warnings. Clin Toxicol. 2022;60(4):486-488. doi: 10.1080/15563650.2021.1973020
                  42. Lesser R, Cutler P. Discussion on Potentially Dangerous Substance Use by Utahns. Accessed August 5, 2025. https://le.utah.gov/interim/2024/pdf/00003671.pdf
                  43. Gilbertson A, Keegan J. Labeled “Research” Chemicals, Doping Drugs Sold Openly on Amazon.com. The Markup. September 17, 2020. Accessed August 5, 2025. https://themarkup.org/banned-bounty/2020/09/17/amazon-sales-peptides-doping-drugs
                  44. Brueck H, Landsverk G. Peptide Shots Are the Hot, New Fad For Anti-Aging and Building Muscle — But No One Really Knows What They Are. Business Insider. September 29, 2023. Accessed August 5, 2025. https://www.businessinsider.com/peptides-growth-hormone-hgh-new-health-fad-2023-9

                  Pain Management in Palliative Care

                  Learning Objectives

                   

                  After completing this application-based continuing education activity, pharmacists will be able to

                  ·       Describe the principles of palliative and hospice care
                  ·       Discuss treatment options to manage the end-of-life symptoms of air hunger and/or pain
                  ·       Calculate appropriate opioid dose-equivalents
                  ·       Recognize risks of diversion in the hospice setting

                  After completing this application-based continuing education activity, pharmacy technicians will be able to

                  ·       Describe the principles of palliative and hospice care
                  ·       Identify treatment options to manage the end-of-life symptoms of air hunger and/or pain
                  ·       Recognize risks of diversion in the hospice setting

                  Sillouhette of two people on bench under trees

                  Release Date:

                  Release Date: September 3, 2025

                  Expiration Date: September 3, 2028

                  Course Fee

                  Pharmacists - $7

                  Technicians - $4

                   

                  ACPE UANs

                  Pharmacist: 0009-0000-25-054-H08-P

                  Pharmacy Technician: 0009-0000-25-054-H08-T

                  Session Codes

                  Pharmacist: 22YC48-JKV62

                  Pharmacy Technician: 22YC48-XTY88

                  Accreditation Hours

                  2.0 hours of CE

                  Accreditation Statements

                  The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy is accredited by the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education as a provider of continuing pharmacy education.  Statements of credit for the online activity ACPE UAN 0009-0000-25-054-H08-P/T  will be awarded when the post test and evaluation have been completed and passed with a 70% or better. Your CE credits will be uploaded to your CPE monitor profile within 2 weeks of completion of the program.

                   

                  Disclosure of Discussions of Off-label and Investigational Drug Use

                  The material presented here does not necessarily reflect the views of The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy or its co-sponsor affiliates. These materials may discuss uses and dosages for therapeutic products, processes, procedures and inferred diagnoses that have not been approved by the United States Food and Drug Administration. A qualified health care professional should be consulted before using any therapeutic product discussed. All readers and continuing education participants should verify all information and data before treating patients or employing any therapies described in this continuing education activity.

                  Faculty

                  Lisa E. Ruohoniemi, PharmD
                  Clinical Staff Pharmacist
                  HCA Healthcare LewisGale Hospital Montgomery
                  Blacksburg, VA

                  Faculty Disclosure

                  In accordance with the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education (ACPE) Criteria for Quality and Interpretive Guidelines, The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy requires that faculty disclose any relationship that the faculty may have with commercial entities whose products or services may be mentioned in the activity.

                  Dr. Ruohoniemi has no relationship with ineligible companies and therefore has nothing to disclose.

                   

                  ABSTRACT

                  Palliative and hospice care mitigate suffering and maintain patients’ dignity and comfort throughout the course of disease. Palliative and hospice care are different, but related. Patients become eligible for hospice care (an insurance benefit) when they no longer wish to pursue curative therapies, and their prognosis is 6 months of life expectancy or less. Hospice teams practice comfort care. Palliative care is available throughout a patient’s life-threatening disease. Towards life’s end, many patients experience pain and/or dyspnea (e.g., shortness of breath or air hunger). Opioids can alleviate these symptoms, but healthcare professionals face many clinical decisions when choosing a pain control regimen. They use equianalgesic dosing to convert patients from one opioid formulation to another. Particular issues arise in different care settings; practitioners in hospitals must manage pain crises, while those in transitional facilities, such as hospice houses offering respite care, must select appropriate routes of administration. Patients may have misconceptions about medications in hospice; being well-versed in opioids’ uses and side effects allays these concerns. Palliative/hospice care should always put the patient’s comfort first.

                  CONTENT

                  Content

                  INTRODUCTION

                  In 2020, The World Health Organization estimated that 40 million people need palliative care each year.1 Palliative care is “an interdisciplinary care delivery system designed to anticipate, prevent, and manage physical, psychological, social, and spiritual suffering to optimize quality of life for patients, their families, and caregivers.”2 As patients near the end of their lives, they may elect to pursue hospice care with a greater focus on maintaining their dignity and comfort.3 Such care is available in a variety of settings, including acute care hospitals, nursing homes, assisted living facilities, hospice houses, and the patient’s own home.4

                  A misconception—that palliative care is relevant only at the end of a patient’s life—is common. All patients contending with serious illnesses can benefit from palliative services.5 Patients with chronic diseases may choose to pursue both active treatment of their condition and palliative care for symptom management, working with a specialized, interdisciplinary team of healthcare professionals.4 This team collaborates with patients and their families to identify the patient’s treatment priorities and work to eliminate suffering throughout the course of the disease.6

                  Pharmacists are important members of the palliative care team and are involved with developing and implementing an individualized treatment plan for each patient.7 These plans “[require] specific patient goals with pharmacologic and nonpharmacologic management to improve quality of life while reducing costs and unnecessary medications.”7 Pharmacists provide valuable input to prescribers regarding medication selection, dosing recommendations, and nontraditional routes of administration, all of which will vary from patient to patient.6,7

                  Pharmacy staff also have the opportunity to educate patients and their families directly regarding appropriate medication use and side effect management. Additionally, they may dispel myths about opioid use in palliative and hospice care and help identify allergies and adverse reactions. They are also well-placed to identify instances of medication diversion in both inpatient and outpatient settings.6-8

                  Healthcare providers should feel comfortable managing patients pursuing palliative and hospice care, recognizing that medication is but one part of the care provided. The focus should be squarely on patients and their families and the goal of alleviating their suffering, no matter the stage of their disease.

                  PRINCIPLES OF PALLIATIVE/HOSPICE CARE

                  Palliative care is comprehensive in its management of the patient. According to the International Association for Hospice and Palliative Care, it9

                  • Provides relief from pain and other distressing symptoms
                  • Affirms life and regards dying as a normal process
                  • Integrates the psychological and spiritual aspects of patient care
                  • Offers a support system to help the family cope during the patient’s illness and in their own bereavement

                  Knowing that palliative care is not withdrawal or withholding of care is critical; it is simply a treatment with a different goal in mind: in this case, comfort, whether the patient is seeking cure or not. Palliative care comprises many components aside from medication; these may include varied offerings like mental health counseling, art therapy, and pastoral care, among others. All hospice care is palliative in nature, but not all palliative care is hospice care.11

                  Table 1 compares both types of care.

                  Table 1. Characteristics of Palliative vs. Hospice Services12-14
                  Palliative Services Hospice Services
                  When is it implemented? As early as diagnosis; at any stage of disease 6-month life expectancy or less
                  Is it used along with active treatment/life-prolonging measures? Yes No
                  Where is it offered? Usually an acute care facility or outpatient clinic, but may also be offered in nursing home, hospice house, or private residence Various settings, including an acute care facility, nursing home, hospice house, private residence
                  Are psychosocial/emotional support services offered? Yes Yes
                  Does it involve treatment, including medication, for symptom relief? Yes Yes

                  Opioids in End-of-Life Care: Management of Pain and/or Dyspnea

                  Pain and dyspnea (also known as shortness of breath or air hunger) are common symptoms at the end of life.15,16 This holds true even for patients without a respiratory causative diagnosis such as chronic obstructive pulmonary disease; patients with cancer (70%), AIDS (11% to 62%) and other terminal illnesses also experience difficulty breathing at the end of life.17 And in one study of 988 terminally ill patients, half experienced moderate or severe pain.18 Easing these symptoms reduces patient and family distress during the active dying process.

                  OPIOID PHARMACOLOGY

                  Opioids are the mainstay of therapy for pain and dyspnea in end-of-life care due to their multimodal mechanism of action.15 In the body, they bind to three different opioid receptor subtypes, known as mu-, kappa-, and delta-receptors.16,19

                  • Mu (μ) are responsible for analgesia, sedation, gastrointestinal distress, respiratory depression, euphoria, dependence
                  • Kappa (κ) are responsible for analgesia, sedation, dyspnea and respiratory distress, euphoria
                  • Delta (δ) are responsible for analgesia and spinal analgesia

                  These receptors are present in pain pathways in the central nervous system; by binding to them, opioids inhibit stimulatory neurotransmitters that conduct pain signals to the brain.20

                  Dyspnea’s exact mechanism at the end of life is poorly understood; however, opioids’ ability to mitigate shortness of breath is possibly due to their secondary effects. Opioids may alter a patient’s ventilatory response to carbon dioxide, ease hypoxia, change inspiratory flow resistive loading, and improve oxygen consumption.21 In other words, opioids decrease respiratory drive, alter the perception of breathlessness, change peripheral opioid receptors’ activity in the lung, and decrease anxiety, all of which contribute to the sensation of dyspnea.22 Patients and caregivers perceive the shortness of breath as anxiety and often reach for the benzodiazepines to relieve this discomfort. However, opioids are the drug of first choice for dyspnea and may provide relief of the underlying cause thereby minimizing anxiety.

                   

                  Selecting an Opioid

                   

                  Consideration of patient-specific factors should guide the healthcare provider’s selection of opioid for pain and dyspnea.23,24 Opioids’ pharmacokinetic profiles differ, sometimes substantially, from one medication to another. 25 Additionally, patients’ unique genetic identities may influence an opioid’s bioavailability, metabolism, and the patient’s physical response to the opioid.23 Table 2 lists some questions clinicians should ask themselves when deciding on a pain management regimen.

                   

                  Table 2. Clinical Considerations in the Selection of Opioids for a Patient Receiving Palliative Care25
                  Consideration Example
                  What kind of pain am I treating? Breakthrough vs. chronic, neuropathic vs. skeletomuscular

                   

                  What are the patient’s needs and goals? Some patients may prioritize total pain relief; others may tolerate more pain in order to be less sedated

                   

                  Is it practical and easy to administer the ordered dose? Order reasonable, whole-number doses at even dosing intervals, i.e., avoid oxycodone 3 mg by mouth every 5 hours
                  Is the patient likely to derive meaningful relief from this regimen? Consider renal and hepatic function, body composition, feasible routes of administration, drug interactions, etc.

                  Common Opioids Used in Palliative and Hospice Settings

                  Opioids are classified into four groups based on their chemical structure:

                  • Phenanthrenes
                  • Benzomorphans
                  • Phenylpiperidines
                  • Diphenylheptanes

                  The importance of these chemical structures will be discussed in the “Dispelling Common Hospice Myths” section.

                  Table 3 describes opioids commonly used in the palliative and hospice settings, and some of their pharmacokinetic and pharmacodynamic characteristics.

                  Table 3. Opioids* Commonly Used in the Palliative and Hospice Settings15,16,26
                  Opioid Pharmacokinetic and Pharmacodynamic Characteristics
                  Morphine (Avinza, Kadian, MS Contin, Duramorph, MSIR) Phenanthrene
                  HydrophilicMetabolism: glucuronidation
                  Highly protein-bound
                  Mean elimination half-life: 2 hours
                  Hydrocodone (Norco, Hycet, Vicodin, Lorcet, Lortab)

                  Note: only available in combination with non-opioid analgesics

                  Phenanthrene
                  Metabolism: CYP2D6 enzyme
                  Mean elimination half-life: 2.5-4 hours
                  Oxycodone (Oxycontin, OxyIR, Roxicodone, XTAMPZA, Percocet)

                  Note: available on its own and in combination with non-opioid analgesics

                  Phenanthrene
                  Metabolism: CYP2D6, CYP3A4 enzymes
                  Mean elimination half-life: 2.5-3 hours
                  Hydromorphone (Dilaudid, Exalgo) Phenanthrene
                  HydrophilicMetabolism: glucuronidation
                  Mean elimination half-life: 2-3 hours
                  Fentanyl Piperidine
                  Metabolism: CYP3A4 enzyme
                  Tramadol (Ultram, Ryzolt) Mu-opioid agonist

                  Metabolism: CYP2B6, CYP2D6 and CYP3A4 enzymes

                  Mean elimination half-life: 6-8 hours

                  *Note: Methadone, a diphenylheptane synthetic opioid derivative, is also commonly used for palliative and hospice patients with severe pain who are not opioid-naïve. Its metabolism is non-linear and its dosing is complicated; this continuing education activity will not discuss methadone in detail.26

                  Renal and Hepatic Dysfunction

                  Renal and hepatic metabolism affects multiple opioids. Table 4 discusses the use of these medications in instances of advanced kidney or liver disease and identifies drugs that should be avoided in these populations. In patients with impaired metabolism of opioids, providers should select the lowest effective dose and titrate cautiously to effect.

                   

                  Table 4. Opioids in Organ Impairment15,27,28,29

                   

                  Safe Use with Caution Avoid
                  Renal Impairment
                  Hydromorphone

                  Methadone

                  Fentanyl

                  Hydrocodone

                  Oxycodone

                  Tramadol

                  Morphine
                  Hepatic Impairment
                  Hydromorphone

                  Fentanyl

                  Morphine

                  Hydrocodone

                  Oxycodone

                  Tramadol

                  Methadone

                  EQUIANALGESIC DOSE CONVERSIONS

                  It is common in palliative and hospice care for patients to require multiple opioids for symptom management.30 As patients transition from the acute inpatient setting to outpatient care, clinicians should also consider converting parenteral opioid doses to oral forms whenever possible.31,32 This aids patient comfort and eases administration, particularly when a caregiver, rather than a medical professional, is responsible for the patient’s medication management.

                  Equianalgesia refers to various opioids’ analgesic doses that are estimated to provide the same pain relief.33 Equianalgesic dose conversion charts and calculators are widely available as tools to help clinicians determine appropriate opioid dosages for patients; however, pharmacists should be aware that all conversion charts are approximations and are only to be used as guides.34,35 Different sources may have slight variances in their conversion factors.36 Clinicians may use these charts as a way to double-check their arithmetic by comparing the doses calculated using different tables. Table 5 is one example of an equianalgesic dose conversion chart. Additionally, because of patient-specific factors, the appropriate dose for a patient may not always be the one calculated based on a standardized ratio. There is no substitute for sound clinical judgment!

                   

                  Table 5. Equianalgesic Opioid Dose Conversions 15,37
                  Drug Oral Dose Parenteral Dose Conversion Ratio (to oral morphine)
                  Morphine 30 mg 10 mg 3:1
                  Oxycodone 20 mg -- 2:3
                  Hydrocodone 20 mg -- 2:3
                  Hydromorphone 7 mg 1.5 mg Oral hydromorphone: 1:4

                  Parenteral hydromorphone: 1:20

                   

                  To convert from one parenteral or oral opioid dose to another, follow these steps3,33,37,38:

                  1.       Determine the total daily dose of current regimen in morphine equivalents

                  a.       Add all doses of opioids the patient receives over a 24-hour period

                  b.       Calculate equianalgesic morphine dose by multiplying the dose of the opioid you are switching from by the conversion factor*

                   

                  2.       Reduce the total daily dose of the new opioid by 25%-50% for incomplete cross tolerance*

                   

                  3.       Select the new dosing interval, accounting for short- and long-acting dosage forms

                  a.       Convert the total daily dose (TDD) of the old opioid to the new opioid using a dose conversion chart

                  b.       Determine the breakthrough/as-needed (PRN) dose of the new opioid by calculating 10-15% of the TDD for each PRN dose

                   

                  Utilize short dosing intervals (every 1-3 hours) for PRN pain control in hospice/palliative care

                  * Incomplete Cross Tolerance

                  On occasion, clinicians may need to switch patients from one opioid to another when a patient develops tolerance (decreased pharmacologic response pursuant to repeated or prolonged drug exposure).39 Incomplete cross tolerance occurs when patients have developed some level of tolerance to opioids with pharmacologically similar structures. However, the extent of this tolerance varies, and clinicians may unintentionally overdose patients by over-estimating their ability to handle an equianalgesic dose of a new opioid.39 To account for this phenomenon, clinicians should consider reducing the dose of the new opioid (i.e., the one you are switching to) by 25% to 50%.39,40

                  Many patients experience decreased analgesia from their pain regimen over time and benefit from opioid rotation. Opioid rotation is the process of switching the patient to a novel opioid not currently part of their pain management plan.33 Of note, clinicians may also consider opioid rotation if patients experience intolerable side effects from a drug within the same class.

                   

                  Example 1: Converting from the parenteral to the oral form of the same drug

                  Convert a patient on an IV morphine drip at 1 mg/hr, to an oral regimen or sustained-release morphine.

                  1. Convert from IV to PO formulation using conversion factor
                    • 24 mg IV morphine TDD * [3 mg PO morphine/1 mg IV morphine] = 72 mg PO morphine in 24 hours
                  2. Split total daily dose into two oral doses of the extended-release formulation
                    • 72 mg ÷ 2 = morphine sulfate ER 36 mg PO every 12 hours; but morphine sulfate ER is available in 30 mg tabs
                    • Final dose – morphine sulfate ER 30 mg PO every 12 hours
                  3. Calculate 10-15% of TDD for the breakthrough dose
                    • TDD = 60 mg
                    • 10% of TDD = 6 mg
                    • 15% of TDD = 9 mg
                    • Round to 10 mg PO morphine every 4-6 hours PRN; this dose was rounded up because we had to lower the around-the-clock dose due to the available dosage form.

                   

                  Example 2: Converting from the parenteral form of one drug to the oral form of another drug

                  Convert hydromorphone 1 mg IV every 2 hours to a pain control regimen involving oxycodone extended release (ER) and oxycodone immediate release (IR) for breakthrough pain.

                  1. Calculate total daily dose
                    • Hydromorphone 1 mg IV every 2 hours = 12 mg IV hydromorphone/day
                  2. Convert to new opioid using conversion factor
                    • 12 mg IV hydromorphone x [20 mg oxycodone/1.5 mg IV hydromorphone] = 160 mg oxycodone/24 hours
                  3. Dose reduce by 25%
                    • 25% of 160 mg = 40 mg oxycodone
                    • 160 mg – 40 mg = 120 mg oxycodone/24 hours
                  4. Round to a reasonable, whole number dose and interval for long-acting formulation
                    • 120 mg oxycodone/24 hours = 60 mg oxycodone ER every 12 hours
                  5. Calculate 10-15% of the TDD for breakthrough dose
                    • 120 mg oxycodone TDD x 10 to 15% = 10 mg or 15 mg every 3-4 hours
                    • Use remaining 50% of total daily dose as short-acting formulation

                   

                   

                  Note that healthcare providers still need to use good clinical judgment when determining the final recommendation; there is no standardized dosing interval for short-acting opioids, although long-acting opioids are not given more frequently than every eight hours.41,42

                  ROUTE-SPECIFIC CONSIDERATIONS

                  Intensol Formulations

                  Oral opioids are the formulation of choice for most patients pursuing palliative and hospice care.43 At the end of life, many patients become frail and lose muscle tone, resulting in decreased swallowing ability; however, many of the most common medications used in hospice, including morphine, come in a highly concentrated intensol formulation. These concentrated products deliver sizable doses in very small liquid volumes.44

                  Even in cases of severe pain and advanced illness, oral morphine remains an effective and suitable option; while inpatient facilities sometimes use morphine infusions, infusions are often unnecessary for patients at the end of life.44,45 To be most effective, clinicians should prescribe and administer morphine around the clock at consistent intervals to ensure steady pain control.45

                  Concentrated morphine solution (Roxanol) is available in a 20 mg/1 mL solution, allowing effective delivery of the medication even in patients unable to swallow.46 In this situation, the caregiver can prop the patient’s body to a 30-degree angle and instill up to 1 mL of the intensol solution into the buccal (cheek) area. This area serves as a “reservoir” for the medication as it slowly trickles down into the gastrointestinal tract where it is absorbed.44

                  Transdermal Fentanyl Patches

                  Transdermal fentanyl patches may be a reasonable option for opioid-tolerant patients requiring around-the-clock pain control. Clinicians, however, should never employ transdermal fentanyl for immediate or intermittent pain relief as it takes approximately 24 hours (up to as much as 48 hours) for serum fentanyl concentrations to reach a constant state.47 Package labeling also specifies that prescribers should only use fentanyl patches in patients who

                  • are already receiving opioid therapy
                  • have developed opioid tolerance, and
                  • are receiving a total daily dose at least equivalent to [fentanyl] 25 mcg/hr.47

                  Opioid tolerance, for the purpose of using a fentanyl patch, is defined as having been on at least 60 mg of morphine or its dosage equivalent daily for at least a week.47

                  Proper application of the fentanyl patch is necessary to ensure optimal pain relief and reduce the likelihood of adverse reactions. Clinicians should communicate the following to patients prescribed transdermal fentanyl patches47:

                  • Each new fentanyl patch should be applied to a different skin site after removal of the previous one
                  • The patch need not be applied to the area of discomfort or pain
                  • Patients may tape the edges of the patch with first aid tape
                  • If the patch falls off before 72 hours, dispose of it by folding it in half and flushing down the toilet
                  • Fentanyl patches must never be cut
                  • Never place a heating pad over a fentanyl patch

                  Do not escalate fentanyl patch doses more frequently than every two to three days. When a patch is first applied, serum fentanyl concentrations will increase with the first few applications.47 Following several rounds of patch applications, serum concentrations eventually reach steady state, meaning that it is difficult to measure a patient’s pain relief accurately during the initiation of a new transdermal fentanyl dose.47 Premature dose escalation may lead to overdose.

                  Additionally, body composition is an important clinical consideration when using transdermal fentanyl. This drug’s absorption is related to a patient’s body fat composition as fentanyl is lipophilic. Patients who are cachectic (wasting physically with weight and muscle mass loss due to disease) or suffer from profuse sweating, as many cancer patients do, will derive minimal benefit from transdermal fentanyl patches.44,48 Heat will increase the absorption of fentanyl from the patch, so heating pads must never be applied directly over the patch and patients with fever should have their patch removed and an alternate dosage form should be used.

                  It is appropriate to use fentanyl patches in conjunction with opioids given by other routes of administration. Judicious use of the patches may reduce the need for breakthrough pain doses by providing more consistent drug delivery over the 72-hour application period. Levy’s Rule (See Figure 1) provides the conversion factor to calculate equianalgesic transdermal fentanyl doses based on a patient’s total daily dose of oral morphine equivalents.49

                   

                  FIGURE 1

                   

                  Levy’s Rule: Fentanyl patch dose (in mcg) = half of the TDD oral morphine

                   

                  Managing a Pain Crisis

                  A pain crisis is a situation in which a patient’s pain is severe and uncontrolled, causing the patient, family, or both severe distress; the pain crisis may be sudden in onset or the result of worsening chronic pain.25 Clinicians should address this rapidly-escalating, uncontrolled pain promptly and aggressively. When patients are in pain crises, members of the treatment team, including nurses, pharmacists, and physicians, must work together to monitor their responses to opioid administration closely and make adjustments accordingly.50

                  Clinicians should double the dose of the immediate-acting opioid every twenty minutes until the patient’s pain is controlled and conduct a review of the pain management plan thereafter to determine if dosage or administration frequency need to be changed.25 Opioids have no maximum dosage limit; particularly in the palliative care setting, doses must be titrated to an appropriate level of pain relief that ensures a satisfactory result.

                  PAUSE AND PONDER: A patient is in pain crisis. You recommend doubling her dose of intravenous hydromorphone every 20 minutes, but her new nurse is nervous about increasing her dose so aggressively. How do you explain the treatment plan and alleviate his concern?

                  DISPELLING COMMON HOSPICE MYTHS

                  For many patients and their families, hospice is a difficult term to face at first. Pharmacists are in a unique position, both in the inpatient and outpatient settings, to speak to them as medication experts.7 Patients may express hesitation around opioid use related to a variety of factors.3,51 One study (N = 496) explored terminally-ill patients’ reasons for declining pain management; patients indicated that they feared addiction, found mental or physical side effects unwelcome, and resented the burden of medication in terms of number of doses.18 Table 6 lists some common misconceptions about opioid use in hospice care and suggests responses pharmacists can use to educate patients about these medications’ place in palliative care.

                   

                  Table 6. Myths and Facts About Opioid Use in Hospice Care3,52-55
                  Myth Fact
                  “Opioids will make me die faster” When used appropriately, opioids will not hasten death and can help relieve breathing discomfort many patients experience at the end of life.
                  “I will get addicted to opioids” Patients may develop a tolerance to opioids, which occurs when they experience decreased pain relief compared to when they started taking the medication. This is a result of the way the drug works in the body. Patients may need higher doses to achieve the same effect. This is different from addiction. Addiction is a disease that involves a person’s repeated use of a drug despite experiencing negative consequences. Needing higher doses of an opioid does not mean a person is addicted.
                  “Going on hospice care and taking opioids means giving up” Hospice provides care tailored to a patient’s dignity, comfort, and quality of life. It is not the same as withdrawing medical treatment; in fact, a multidisciplinary team of healthcare professionals manages patients in hospice. Medications, like opioids, are only one component of the care hospice patients receive.
                  “I get too constipated when I take opioids” Constipation is a common opioid side effect that does not resolve over time, so clinicians need to prescribe appropriate laxatives for patients on opioids. Constipation in itself is not a contraindication to the use of opioids in palliative/hospice care.

                   

                  Allergy vs “Allergy”

                   

                  Another common misconception patients have regarding opioid use relates to allergies, as many opioid side effects mimic symptoms of true allergic reactions.56 Palliative care clinicians need to be able to differentiate between a true allergy and an adverse reaction to determine appropriate pain regimens for patients safely.

                   

                  True drug allergies, also known as type I hypersensitivity reactions, are due to immunoglobulin E (IgE)-mediated release of antibodies against the offending agent.57 This reaction, in its severest form presenting as anaphylaxis, occurs in less than 2% of patients.56,57 While the gold standard for identifying a true drug allergy is drug provocation testing, achieved by exposing a patient to small doses of suspected drugs and monitoring for a reaction, clinicians rarely order drug provocation testing in practice and it is even less relevant in the hospice population.58

                   

                  In contrast to drug allergies, adverse reactions (see Table 7) are known or expected responses, different from the intended therapeutic effect, to a medication.59 Such adverse reactions are commonly due to the parent opioid’s active metabolites.16

                   

                  Table 7. Management of Common Opioid Adverse Reactions56,62
                  Adverse Reaction Do patients develop tolerance to this adverse reaction? Management
                  Nausea/vomiting Yes May recommend use of prophylactic antiemetics (i.e., ondansetron, metoclopramide)
                  Constipation No Routinely recommend concomitant use of a stool softener (i.e., psyllium or docusate) or stimulant laxative (i.e., senna, bisacodyl)
                  Itching Yes May recommend use of prophylactic H1 or H2 histamine antagonist (i.e., diphenhydramine, loratadine, famotidine)

                   

                   

                  Patients may also demonstrate pseudo-allergy to an opioid, which is an adverse reaction that appears to mimic a true allergy but is unaffected by IgE.56 These may include mild itching, skin redness, or bronchospasm but do not necessarily indicate an allergic reaction.60 Instead, they are more commonly due to a histamine-mediated response.60 Histamine release is related to the opioid’s potency; the more potent the opioid, the less histamine release and the lower the likelihood of a histamine-mediated reaction.

                   

                  If a patient demonstrates any one of these symptoms or develops several that are mild in severity, it does not necessarily signal the patient has an immune-related allergy to opioids. Similarly, histamine-meditated adverse reactions do not mean opioids as a class are contraindicated for use in the affected patient. Clinicians in this scenario can opt to pre-medicate the patient with antihistamines or steroids before administering an opioid for a few days until the effect is minimized.60 They may also consider an alternative opioid in a different pharmacologic opioid class which may be more tolerable.60

                   

                  PAUSE AND PONDER: What questions would you ask patients to assess whether they are experiencing an allergy versus a side effect?

                   

                  Cross-reactivity can occur when a chemical component of one medication is like that in another, resulting in an allergic reaction to both drugs.61 Understanding opioids’ chemical structures (see Table 8) allows clinicians to determine risk of cross-reactivity when they are concerned about a true allergy. Cross-reactivity may occur within the same class; for example, a patient with a true allergy to codeine should not take oxycodone. However, it is reasonable for a patient with an allergy to a drug in one class of opioids to take a medication from another class.62 The risk for cross-reactivity in this situation is low, but if the patient has a true allergic reaction, they should only take an opioid from another class under supervision of a healthcare professional until allergy to that product is ruled out.62

                   

                  Table 8. Chemical Classes of Opioids16
                  Phenanthrenes Benzomorphans Phenylpiperidines Diphenylheptanes
                  Buprenorphine

                  Butorphanol

                  Codeine

                  Hydromorphone

                  Morphine

                  Nalbuphine

                  Oxycodone
                  Oxymorphone

                  Pentazocine Alfentanil

                  Fentanyl

                  Meperidine

                  Sufentanil

                  Methadone

                   

                  DIVERSION

                  Drug diversion is defined as “a criminal act or deviation that removes a prescription drug from its intended path from the manufacturer to the intended patient.”63 The hospice setting is not immune to the risk of diversion. Given the estimate that more than 90% of hospice and palliative care patients receive a controlled pain medication, diversion is a very real concern.30 One survey of 371 hospices revealed that 31% of facilities interviewed reported at least one case of confirmed diversion in the past quarter.64

                  Palliative care presents unique diversion issues because it is often delivered in the patient’s home, rather than a facility. The home environment, while often the preferred site of care, is less closely monitored and controlled than in an inpatient setting, making it a susceptible site of opioid diversion.65 Caregivers, family members, healthcare providers, and patients themselves may all divert opioids.66

                  Identifying diversion

                  Providers should be able to identify instances of possible diversion and take reasonable steps to prevent it from happening.67 State prescription drug monitoring programs (PDMPs) are one such way to monitor patient’s access to opioids.68 These programs vary from state to state, but all allow authorized providers to review a patient’s controlled substance fill history.68 Practitioners should make it a habit to review their state’s PDMP prior to filling a prescription for a controlled substance to determine whether a patient may seek out multiple prescribers or visit different pharmacies. Such behavior does not always indicate drug misuse or diversion but should prompt the pharmacist to identify any risky activity. Other common “red flags” that may signal a person is diverting medication:

                  □ Frequent or early refill requests from patient or caregiver

                  □ Inaccurate or missing record-keeping by pharmacy or hospice agency

                  □ Noncommunicative patients who appear to always be in severe pain/distress

                  □ Impaired caregivers, including both family members and home health staff

                  The University of Maryland, Baltimore, in conjunction with the Hospice Foundation of America, has developed 15 recommendations for preventing medication diversion and misuse in hospice care.69 These include recommendations related to several care areas featured in Figure 2.

                  FIGURE 2

                   

                  Various strategies about preventing medication diversion and misuse in this figure. Contact Joanne at joanne.nault@uconn.edu for more information.

                  Hospice Prescriptions Transmitted by Facsimile

                  Federal and state laws regulate controlled substances dispensing for hospice patients. Specifically, prescribers may fax prescriptions for C-II medications to retail pharmacies without needing to subsequently furnish a hard copy as they would for a non-hospice patient.70 The federal law regarding faxing C-II prescriptions for hospice patients states that “a prescription prepared in accordance with §1306.05 written for a Schedule II narcotic substance for a patient enrolled in a hospice care program certified and/or paid for by Medicare under Title XVIII or a hospice program which is licensed by the state may be transmitted by the practitioner or the practitioner's agent to the dispensing pharmacy by facsimile. The practitioner or the practitioner's agent will note on the prescription that the patient is a hospice patient. The facsimile serves as the original written prescription for purposes of this paragraph (g) and it shall be maintained in accordance with §1304.04(h).”70 The faxed prescription must indicate that it is for a hospice patient in order to be filled legally—pharmacy teams should make note of this rule and ensure prescribers so annotate prescriptions. 

                  Conclusion

                  Patients in palliative and hospice care have unique needs. Clinicians should be familiar with how the two types of care differ and their common characteristics. To manage a patient’s pain and dyspnea, healthcare providers should have a solid foundational knowledge of opioid medications and an understanding of how to select and tailor patients’ pain control regimens to their specific needs. There is no treatment algorithm for pain management, just as there is no standardized equianalgesic opioid dose conversion chart. Clinicians must account for patient- and drug-specific factors and use their own judgment when transitioning patients from one opioid to another to ensure adequate pain control. Certain formulations, such as intensol and transdermal patches, also have route-specific considerations. Pharmacists particularly are well-placed to educate other healthcare professionals as well as patients and their caregivers about opioids’ place in palliative/hospice care. They can “myth-bust” common hospice misconceptions, help identify allergies and adverse reactions, and inform treatment decisions related to acute situations (like pain crises) and transitions from inpatient to outpatient settings. They can also be closely involved in monitoring, documenting, and preventing issues related to medication diversion. Drug therapy is a significant component of palliative/hospice care. It requires a thorough and sensitive understanding by medical staff so that patients derive maximum benefit from it as they approach the end of their lives. Alleviation of suffering, and the protection of a patient’s dignity, should be at the core of any medication decisions made for these patients.

                  Pharmacist Post Test (for viewing only)

                  Pain Management in Palliative Care
                  25-054

                  Learning Objectives
                  • Describe the principles of palliative and hospice care
                  • Discuss treatment options to manage the end-of-life symptoms of air hunger and/or pain
                  • Calculate appropriate opioid dose-equivalents
                  • Recognize risks of diversion in the hospice setting

                  *

                  1. Which of the following is TRUE of palliative care?
                  a. It can hasten a patient’s death by using high doses of opioids and benzodiazepines
                  b. It is intended for patients with a life expectancy of six months or less
                  c. It is intended for any patient with a chronic disease, regardless of stage of illness

                  *

                  2. Your pharmacy receives a faxed prescription for KL. It has all the valid components of a legal prescription but does not specify “hospice patient” on it. Her family member confirms that KL is in fact pursuing hospice care. What should your next step be?
                  a. Fill the prescription as-is, indicating on the back of the fax that it is for a hospice patient; pharmacist documentation is sufficient
                  b. Call the physician’s office to request the prescription be re-transmitted with the necessary information documented on it
                  c. Contact your local DEA office to report your suspicion of medication diversion, as the prescription is a counterfeit

                  *

                  3. The hospitalist is preparing to discharge patient NM who has previously been on IV hydromorphone 1 mg q4h PRN, averaging four doses per day. He would like to send NM home on oral oxycodone at the same dosing interval (every four hours). What dose would you recommend?
                  a. Oxycodone 10 mg by mouth every 4 hours PRN
                  b. Oxycodone 5 mg by mouth every 4 hours PRN
                  c. Oxycodone 8.88 mg by mouth four times per day PRN

                  *

                  4. Which of the following is a step a home hospice agency could take to prevent diversion?
                  a. Designate one staff member to witness medication disposal after a patient dies
                  b. Conduct urine drug screens for new hires prior to an unsupervised home visit
                  c. Permit hospice staff to transport controlled substances via their personal vehicles

                  *

                  5. A man comes in with several prescriptions for his 98-year-old mother. He is concerned that the physician ordered morphine intensol, saying, “She was just in the hospital for pneumonia because she keeps inhaling her food when she eats. Won’t this cause the same problem?” How could you respond?
                  a. Tell him you will call the physician to have her change the order to morphine 10 mg/5 mL liquid
                  b. Advise him to crush her extended-release morphine tablets and use a small amount of water to make a paste she can swallow
                  c. Reassure him that morphine intensol is a concentrated liquid formulation that delivers drug in a very small volume

                  *

                  6. Which of the following might lead you to consider the possibility that a family member was diverting controlled substances for a hospice patient?
                  a. Family member claims patient needs morphine intensol for difficulty breathing, even though the patient isn’t dying from a lung disease
                  b. Family member provides prescriptions from several providers in different specialties and office locations
                  c. Family member claims patient needs morphine intensol for pain, even though the patient is on a high dose that should sedate her enough to be comfortable

                  *

                  7. Patient RT has advanced lung cancer with metastases to the bone and brain. He comes to your hospital in a pain crisis, as his family has been unable to control his pain with oral medications at home. The hospitalist starts him on hydromorphone 1 mg IV every 5 minutes. RT receives four consecutive doses but is still in excruciating 10/10 pain. What is the best next step to recommend?
                  a. Double the dose to hydromorphone 2 mg IV every 5 minutes
                  b. Transition the patient to an equianalgesic dose of oral hydromorphone
                  c. Initiate an oral long-acting opioid such as extended-release morphine or extended-release oxycodone

                  *

                  8. When converting a dose of one opioid to an equianalgesic dose of another, you must reduce your final calculated dose by 25-50%. Why is this?
                  a. To account for incomplete cross-tolerance and reduce the risk of overdosing the patient with the new opioid
                  b. To ensure the patient has less potent strengths of an opioid, thereby reducing the likelihood of diversion
                  c. To make it easier to round your calculated dose to a whole number so patients don’t have to split tablets

                  *

                  9. You are a pharmacist in a long-term care facility. You note that one of your patients is a good candidate for a fentanyl patch. He is currently on oxycodone ER 30 mg by mouth BID and oxycodone 5 mg by mouth every four hours as needed. He normally receives three breakthrough doses in a 24 hour-period. What would you recommend?
                  a. Fentanyl 75 mcg/hour patch, and continue the oxycodone 5 mg by mouth every four hours as needed
                  b. Fentanyl 100 mcg/hour patch, and discontinue the oxycodone 5 mg by mouth every four hours as needed
                  c. Fentanyl 50 mcg/hour patch, and continue the oxycodone 5 mg by mouth every four hours as needed

                  *

                  10. WN is a 45-year-old male recently diagnosed with ALS (Lou Gehrig’s Disease). He asks to meet with your hospital’s palliative nurse to discuss symptom management. Which of the following is true?
                  a. WN should exhaust all treatment options before pursuing palliative care
                  b. Palliative care can be administered alongside treatment
                  c. WE cannot explore palliative care until he is estimated to have a 6-month life expectancy or less

                  *

                  11. Patient RT has advanced lung cancer with metastases to the bone and brain. He comes to your hospital in a pain crisis, as his family has been unable to control his pain with medication at home. The hospitalist starts him on hydromorphone 1 mg IV every 5 minutes. RT receives four consecutive doses but is still in excruciating pain. What is the next step to recommend?
                  a. Increase the dose to hydromorphone 2 mg IV every 5 minutes
                  b. Transition the patient to an equianalgesic dose of oral hydromorphone
                  c. Initiate a long-acting opioid such as extended-release morphine or extended-release oxycodone

                  *

                  12. A pharmacy student uses two different equianalgesic dose conversion charts to calculate an oral hydromorphone dose and comes up with two different calculations: hydromorphone 3 mg by mouth every four hours vs. hydromorphone 4 mg by mouth every four hours. You advise that the 4 mg dose is the better option. Why is this?
                  a. The patient likely needs a higher dose for better pain control
                  b. It is a more feasible dose to administer due to the tablet size
                  c. You calculated the dose to be 4 mg based on the equianalgesic dose conversion chart you used

                  *

                  13. In what clinical situation would you consider opioid rotation?
                  a. In a patient who has developed unbearable constipation, despite taking medications to manage it
                  b. In a patient who was started on a fentanyl patch one day ago and has yet to show a response
                  c. In a patient who is responding well to the same pain regimen he has been on for the past two years

                  *

                  14. You receive a palliative care consult for a patient with chronic kidney disease who has now also developed acute renal failure. His creatinine clearance in the hospital is currently 24 mL/min. He has been receiving hydromorphone 8 mg by mouth every 6 hours. What is an appropriate recommendation?
                  a. Continue on the current dose
                  b. Reduce the dose to 4 mg every 6 hours
                  c. Increase the dose to 16 mg every 6 hours

                  *

                  15. Your patient BB has lost IV access. She was previously receiving morphine 1 mg IV every 2 hours PRN, averaging about 9 doses per day. What would an appropriate oral morphine dose administered every 4 hours PRN be?
                  a. Morphine 5 mg by mouth every 4 hours PRN
                  b. Morphine 1.5 mg by mouth every 4 hours PRN
                  c. Morphine 2.5 mg by mouth every 4 hours PRN

                  Pharmacy Technician Post Test (for viewing only)

                  Pain Management in Palliative Care
                  25-054

                  Learning Objectives
                  After completing this CE activity, pharmacy technicians will be able to
                  • Describe the principles of palliative and hospice care
                  • Identify treatment options to manage the end-of-life symptoms of air hunger and/or pain
                  • Recognize risks of diversion in the hospice setting

                  *

                  1. Which of the following is TRUE of palliative care?
                  a. It can hasten a patient’s death by using high doses of opioids and benzodiazepines
                  b. It is intended for patients with a life expectancy of six months or less
                  c. It is intended for any patient with a chronic disease, regardless of stage of illness

                  *

                  2. Your pharmacy receives a faxed prescription for KL. It has all the valid components of a legal prescription but does not specify “hospice patient” on it. Her family member confirms that KL is in fact pursuing hospice care. What should your next step be?
                  a. Fill the prescription as-is, indicating on the back of the fax that it is for a hospice patient; pharmacist documentation is sufficient
                  b. Call the physician’s office to request the prescription be re-transmitted with the necessary information documented on it
                  c. Contact your local DEA office to report your suspicion of medication diversion, as the prescription is a counterfeit

                  *

                  3. A patient comes to your pharmacy with a prescription for methadone. You note she has an allergy to morphine listed in her profile. Which of the following is true?
                  a. Methadone is not likely to cause the same reaction based on the risk of cross-reactivity
                  b. You can assume it is probably not a true allergy as many patients report morphine allergy
                  c. This patient should not take methadone because of her allergy; she will have the same reaction to both

                  *

                  4. Which of the following is a step a home hospice agency could take to prevent diversion?
                  a. Designate one staff member to witness medication disposal after a patient dies
                  b. Conduct urine drug screens for new hires prior to an unsupervised home visit
                  c. Permit hospice staff to transport controlled substances via their personal vehicles

                  *

                  5. A man comes in with several prescriptions for his 98-year-old mother. He is concerned that the physician ordered morphine intensol, saying, “She was just in the hospital for pneumonia because she keeps inhaling her food when she eats. Won’t this cause the same problem?” How could you respond?
                  a. Tell him you will call the physician to have her change the order to morphine 10 mg/5 mL liquid
                  b. Advise him to crush her extended-release morphine tablets and use a small amount of water to make a paste she can swallow
                  c. Reassure him that morphine intensol is a concentrated liquid formulation that delivers drug in a very small volume

                  *

                  6. Which of the following might lead you to consider the possibility that a family member was diverting controlled substances for a hospice patient?
                  a. Family member claims patient needs morphine intensol for difficulty breathing, even though the patient isn’t dying from a lung disease
                  b. Family member provides prescriptions from several providers in different specialties and office locations
                  c. Family member claims patient needs morphine intensol for pain, even though the patient’s high dose that should keep her comfortable

                  *

                  7. Your patient YP comes into your pharmacy to fill a prescription for oxycodone/acetaminophen 5/325 mg one tablet by mouth every four hours as needed. You see an allergy to morphine listed in his profile. When you ask him about it, he says, “It makes me so sick, I can’t stomach it.” How do you respond?
                  a. Tell him he should not take the oxycodone/acetaminophen, as he will also be allergic to it and will not be able to tolerate it
                  b. Tell him all opioids make people nauseous, and he should take morphine rather than oxycodone/acetaminophen since it isn’t a real allergy
                  c. Confirm with the pharmacist that YP can take the oxycodone/acetaminophen, as nausea is a side effect rather than an allergy

                  *

                  8. A patient hands you a prescription. She says, “My doctor had to increase my dose from 1 mg to 2 mg. I’ve been on it for a year but it doesn’t feel like it’s doing anything for me anymore.” What term best describes the phenomenon the patient is experiencing?
                  a. Tolerance
                  b. Addiction
                  c. Medication diversion

                  *

                  9. In what way does hospice care differ from palliative care?
                  a. Hospice uses no active treatment or life-prolonging measures
                  b. Hospice involves psychosocial and emotional support services
                  c. Hospice is only provided in a patient’s home or hospital

                  *

                  10. WN is a 45-year-old male recently diagnosed with ALS (Lou Gehrig’s Disease). He asks to meet with your hospital’s palliative nurse to discuss symptom management. Which of the following is true?
                  a. WN should exhaust all treatment options before pursuing palliative care
                  b. Palliative care can be administered alongside treatment
                  c. WN cannot explore palliative care until his estimated life expectancy less than 6 month

                  References

                  Full List of References

                  References

                     

                    References
                    1. World Health Organization. Palliative Care Key Facts. World Health Organization website. August 5, 2020. Accessed May 3, 2021. https://www.who.int/news-room/fact-sheets/detail/palliative-care

                    2. National Consensus Project for Quality Palliative Care. Clinical Practice Guidelines for Quality Palliative Care. 4th edition. Richmond, VA: National Coalition for Hospice and Palliative Care; 2018. Accessed April 14, 2021.https://www. nationalcoalitionhpc.org/ncp.

                    3. Clary PL, Lawson, P. Pharmacologic pearls for end-of-life care. Am Fam Physician. 2009;79(12):1059-1065.

                    4. National Institute on Aging. What are palliative and hospice care? U.S. Department of Health and Human Services website. May 17, 2017. Accessed May 3, 2021. https://www.nia.nih.gov/health/what-are-palliative-care-and-hospice-care#:~:text=Palliative%20care%20is%20a%20resource,from%20the%20point%20of%20diagnosis

                    5. American College of Surgeons Trauma Quality Improvement Program. Palliative care best practices guidelines. American College of Surgeons website. October 2017. Accessed May 3, 2021. https://www.facs.org/-/media/files/quality-programs/trauma/tqip/palliative_guidelines.ashx

                    6. Demler, TL. Pharmacist involvement in hospice and palliative care. US Pharm. 2016;41(3):HS2-HS5.

                    7. Barbee J, Kelley S, Andrews J, Harman A. Palliative care: the role of the pharmacist. Pharm Times. 2016;5(6). https://www.pharmacytimes.com/view/palliative-care-the-pharmacists-role

                    8. Walker KA, Scarpaci L, McPherson ML. Fifty reasons to love your palliative care pharmacist. Am J Hosp Palliat Care. 2010;27(8):511-513. doi: 10.1177/1049909110371096

                    9. What is palliative care? International Association for Hospice and Palliative Care website. Accessed May 6, 2021. https://hospicecare.com/what-we-do/publications/getting-started/5-what-is-palliative-care

                    10. Palliative care or hospice? National Hospice and Palliative Care Organization website. 2019. Accessed May 3, 2021. https://www.nhpco.org/wp-content/uploads/2019/04/PalliativeCare_VS_Hospice.pdf

                    11. Palliative care defined. Hospice Foundation of America website. 2018. Accessed May 7, 2021. https://hospicefoundation.org/Hospice-Care/Palliative-Care-Defined

                    12. Palliative care vs. hospice: what’s the difference? Vitas Healthcare website. Accessed May 3, 2021. https://www.vitas.com/hospice-and-palliative-care-basics/about-palliative-care/hospice-vs-palliative-care-whats-the-difference

                    13. Palliative care vs. hospice: similar but different. Centers for Medicare and Medicaid Services website. Accessed May 3, 2021. https://www.cms.gov/Medicare-Medicaid-Coordination/Fraud-Prevention/Medicaid-Integrity-Education/Downloads/infograph-PalliativeCare-%5BJune-2015%5D.pdf

                    14. Healthline. What’s the difference between palliative care and hospice? Healthline website. February 7, 2020. Accessed May 3, 2021. https://www.healthline.com/health/palliative-care-vs-hospice#how-to-decide

                    15. Groninger H, Vijayan J. Pharmacologic management of pain at the end of life. Am Fam Physician. 2014;90(1):26-32.

                    16. Trescot AM, Datta S, Lee M, Hansen H. Opioid pharmacology. Pain Physician. 2008;11(2 Suppl):S133-S153.

                    17. Ross DD, Alexander CS. Management of common symptoms in terminally ill patients: part II. Am Fam Physician. 2001;64(6):1019-1027

                    18. Weiss SC, Emanuel LL, Fairclough DL, Emanuel EJ. Understanding the experience of pain in terminally ill patients. Lancet. 2001;357(9265):1311-1315. doi:10.1016/S0140-6736(00)04515-3

                    19. Vallejo R, Barkin RL, Wang VC. Pharmacology of opioids in the treatment of chronic pain syndromes. Pain Physician. 2011;14:E343-E360.

                    20. Trang T, Al-Hasani R, Salvemini D, Salter MW, Gutstein H, Cahill CM. Pain and poppies: the good, the bad, and the ugly of opioid analgesics. J Neurosci. 2015;35(41):13879-13888. doi:10.1523/JNEUROSCI.2711-15.2015

                    21. Kamal AH, Maguire JM, Wheeler JL, Currow DC, Abernethy AP. Dyspnea review for the palliative care professional: treatment goals and therapeutic options. J Pall Med. 2012;15(1):106-114. doi:10.1089/jpm.2011.0110

                    22. Mahler, D. Opioids for refractory dyspnea. Expert Rev Respir Med. 2014;7(2):123-135. doi:10.1586/ers.13.5

                    23. NICE Clinical Guidelines, No. 140. Cardiff, UK; National Collaborating Centre for Cancer; 2012. National Collaborating Centre for Cancer (UK). Accessed April 20, 2021. https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK115251/ .

                    24. Barnett M. Alternative opioids to morphine in palliative care: a review of current practice and evidence. Postgrad Med J. 2001;77:371-378. doi:10.1136/pmj.77.908.371

                    25. Moryl, N, Coyle N, Foley KM. Managing an acute pain crisis in a patient with advanced cancer. JAMA. 2008;299(12):1457-1467. doi:10.1001/jama.299.12.1457

                    26. Brown R, Kraus C, Fleming M, Reddy S. Methadone: applied pharmacology and use as adjunctive treatment in chronic pain. Postgrad Med J. 2004;80(949):654-659. doi:10.1136/pgmj.2004.022988

                    27. Broadbent A, Khor K, Heaney A. Palliation and chronic renal failure: opioid and other palliative medications- dosage guidelines. Prog Palliat Care. 2013;11(4):183-190. doi: 10.1179/096992603225002627

                    28. Arnold R, Verrico P, Karnell A, Davison SN. opioid use in renal failure. Palliative Care Network of Wisconsin website. March 2020. Accessed May 3, 2021. https://www.mypcnow.org/fast-fact/opioid-use-in-renal-failure/

                    29. Oliverio C, Malone N, Rosielle DA. Opioid use in liver failure. Palliative Care Network of Wisconsin website. September 2015. Accessed May 3, 2021. https://www.mypcnow.org/fast-fact/opioid-use-in-liver-failure/

                    30. Cagle, JG. Strategies for detecting, addressing, and preventing drug diversion in hospice and palliative care. J Pain Symptom Manage. 2019;57(2):360. doi: 10.1016/j.jpainsymman.2018.12.023

                    31. Muller-Busch HC, Lindena G, Kietze K, Woskanjan S. Opioid switch in palliative care, opioid choice by clinical need and opioid availability. Eur J Pain. 2012;9(5):571. doi: 10.1016/j.ejpain.2004.12.003
                    32. Portenoy RK, Mehta Z, Ahmed E. Cancer Pain management with opioids: optimizing analgesia. UptoDate website. January 12, 2021. Accessed May 3, 2021. https://www.uptodate.com/contents/cancer-pain-management-with-opioids-optimizing-analgesia

                    33. Bhatnagar M, Pruskowski J. Opioid Equivalency. StatPearls Publishing;2020. Accessed April 19, 2021. https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK535402/#_NBK535402_pubdet_.

                    34. Arnold R, Weissman DE. Calculating opioid dose conversions. Palliative Care Network of Wisconsin. May 2015. Accessed May 3, 2021. https://www.mypcnow.org/fast-fact/calculating-opioid-dose-conversions/

                    35. Pereira J, Lawlor P, Vigano A, Dorgan M, Bruera E. Equianalgesic dose ratios for opioids: a critical review and proposals for long-term dosing. J Pain Symptom Manage. 2001;22(2):672-687. doi:10.1016/s0885-3924(01)00294-9

                    36. Anderson R, Saiers JH, Abram S, Schlicht C. Accuracy in equianalgesic dosing: conversion dilemmas. J Pain Symptom Manage. 2001;21(5):397-406. doi:10.1016/s0885-3924(01)00271-8

                    37. Periyakoil V. Equivalency table. Stanford School of Medicine Palliative Care website. Accessed May 3, 2021. https://palliative.stanford.edu/opioid-conversion/opioids/

                    38. Opioid prescribing guideline resources. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention website. February 2021. Accessed 4/19/2021. https://www.cdc.gov/drugoverdose/prescribing/guideline.html

                    39. Dumas EO, Pollack GM. Opioid tolerance development: a pharmacokinetic/pharmacodynamic perspective. AAPS J. 2008;10(4):537-551. doi:10.1208/s12248-008-9056-1

                    40. Pasternak GW. Preclinical pharmacology and opioid combinations. Pain Med. 2012;13:S4-S11. doi:10.1111/j.1526-4637.2012.01335.x

                    41. Vallerand AH. The use of long-acting opioids in chronic pain management. Nurs Clin North Am. 2003;38(3):435-445. doi: 10.1016/s0029-6465(02)00094-4.

                    42. Fine PG, Mahajan G, McPherson ML. Long-acting opioids and short-acting opioids: appropriate use in chronic pain. Pain Med. 2009;10(Supp 2):S79-S88. https://doi.org/10.1111/j.1526-4637.2009.00666.x

                    43. Kestenbaum MG, Messersmith S, Vilches AO, et al. Alternative routes to oral opioid administration in palliative care: a review and clinical summary. Pain Med. 2014;15(7):1129-1153. doi:10.1111/pme.12464

                    44. McPherson, ML, Kim, M, Walker, KA. 50 practical medication tips at end of life. J Support Onc. 2012;10(6):222-229. doi:10.1016/j.suponc.2012.08.002

                    45. Miller, KE. Continuous infusion of IV morphine for cancer pain. AM Fam Physician. 2003;67(2):416-417.

                    46. Morphine sulfate solution. Prescribing information. Boehringer Ingelheim; 2012. Accessed April 20, 2021. https://docs.boehringer-ingelheim.com/Prescribing%20Information/PIs/Roxanol/Roxanol.pdf

                    47. Duragesic. Prescribing information. Janssen Pharmaceuticals, Inc; 2021. Accessed April 20, 2021. https://www.janssenlabels.com/package-insert/product-monograph/prescribing-information/DURAGESIC-pi.pdf

                    48. Clemens KE, Klaschik E. Clinical experience with transdermal and orally administered opioids in palliative care patients- a retrospective study. Jpn J Clin Oncol. 2007;37(4):302-309. doi:10.1093/jjco/hym017

                    49. Levy, MH. Pharmacologic treatment of cancer pain. N Engl J Med. 1996;335(15):1124-1132. doi: 10.1056/NEJM199610103351507

                    50. Ferrell B, Levy MH, Paice J. Managing pain from advanced cancer in the palliative care setting. Clin J Oncol Nurs. 2008;12(4):575-581. doi: 10.1188/08.CJON.575-581

                    51. Berger JM, Vadivelu N. Common misconceptions about opioid use for pain management at the end of life. Virtual Mentor. 2013;15(5):403-409. doi: 10.1001/virtualmentor.2013.15.5.ecas1-1305

                    52. Harrod CG, Mahler DA, Selecky PA et al. American College of Chest Physicians consensus statement on the management of dyspnea in patients with advanced lung or heart disease. Chest. 2010;137(3):674-691. doi:10.1378/chest.09-1543

                    53. The NIDA Blog Team. Tolerance, Dependence, Addiction: What’s the Difference? NIH website. January 12, 2017. Accessed May 4, 2021. https://archives.drugabuse.gov/blog/post/tolerance-dependence-addiction-whats-difference

                    54. Dispelling Hospice Myths. Hospice Foundation of America website. Accessed May 4, 2021. https://hospicefoundation.org/Hospice-Care/Dispelling-Hospice-Myths

                    55. Albert RH. End-of-life care: managing common symptoms. Am Fam Physician. 2017;95(6):356-361.

                    56. Fudin, J. Opioid allergy, pseudo-allergy, or adverse effect? Pharmacy Times website. March 6, 2018. Accessed May 4, 2021. https://www.pharmacytimes.com/view/opioid-allergy-pseudo-allergy-or-adverse-effect

                    57. Abbas M, Moussa M, Akel H. Type I Hypersensitivity Reaction. Stat Pearls Publishing;2020. Accessed April 20, 2021. https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK560561/ .

                    58. Li PH, Ue KL, Wagner A, Rutkowski R, Rutkowski K. Opioid hypersensitivity: predictors of allergy and role of drug provocation testing. J Allergy Clin Immunol Pract. 2017;5(6):1601-1606. doi:10.1016/j.jaip.2017.03.035

                    59. Coleman JJ, Pontefract SK. Adverse drug reactions. Clin Med (Lond). 2016;16(5):481-485. doi: 10.7861/clinmedicine.16-5-481

                    60. Woodall HE, Chiu A, Weissman DE. Opioid allergic reactions. Palliative Care Network of Wisconsin website. July 2015. Accessed April 20, 2021. https://www.mypcnow.org/fast-fact/opioid-allergic-reactions/

                    61. Jain S, Kaplowitz N. 9.16- Clinical Considerations of Drug-Induced Hepatotoxicity. In: Comprehensive Toxicology. 2nd ed. McQueen CA. Elsevier; 2010;369-381. https://doi.org/10.1016/B978-0-08-046884-6.01014-9.

                    62. Soljoughian, M. Opioids: allergy vs. pseudoallergy. US Pharm. 2006;6:HS5-HS9. https://www.uspharmacist.com/article/opioids-allergy-vs-pseudoallergy

                    63. Controlled substances drug diversion pharmacy technician toolkit. American Society of Health-System Pharmacists website. Accessed April 19,2021. https://www.ashp.org/Pharmacy-Technician/About-Pharmacy-Technicians/Advanced-Pharmacy-Technician-Roles-Toolkits/Controlled-Substances-Drug-Diversion-Pharmacy-Technician-Toolkit?loginreturnUrl=SSOCheckOnly

                    64. Cagle JG, McPherson ML, Frey JJ, et al. Estimates of medication diversion in hospice. JAMA. 2020;323(6):566-568. doi:10.1001/jama.2019.20388

                    65. Cagle JG, Ware OD. Preventing medication diversion in home health & hospice. HomeCare Magazine. October 8, 2019. Accessed April 20, 2021. https://www.homecaremag.com/october-2019/preventing-medication-diversions

                    66. Parker, J. Strategies to prevent drug diversion in hospice care. Hospice News. April 29, 2019. Accessed April 20, 2021. https://hospicenews.com/2019/04/29/strategies-to-prevent-drug-diversion-in-hospice-care/

                    67. Risk evaluation and mitigation tool-kit: strategies to promote the safe use of opioids. Virginia Association for Hospices and Palliative Care website. 2012. Accessed May 6, 2021. https://www.virginiahospices.org/assets/docs/REM_TOOLKIT/REM%20Tool%20Kit%204Website_2019.pdf

                    68. What States Need to Know About PDMPs. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention website. July 1, 2020. Accessed May 7, 2021. https://www.cdc.gov/drugoverdose/pdmp/states.html#:~:text=A%20prescription%20drug%20monitoring%20program,a%20nimble%20and%20targeted%20response.

                    69. Cagle JG, Ware OD. 15 recommendations for preventing medication diversion & misuse in hospice care. Hospice Foundation of America website. August 2019. Accessed April 20, 2021. https://hospicefoundation.org/hfa/media/Files/Preventing-Medication-Diversion-in-Hospice-Recommendations-10-28-2019.pdf

                    70. Office of the Federal Register. Part 1306- Prescriptions. Electronic Code of Federal Regulations website. May 4, 2021. Accessed May 6, 2021. https://www.ecfr.gov/cgi-bin/text-idx?SID=5ca5f28a5a2b14665924d3bef7178ebe&mc=true&node=se21.9.1306_111&rgn=div8

                    Spotlight on Perimenopause and Menopause: What Pharmacy Teams Should Know

                    Learning Objectives

                     

                    After completing this knowledge-based continuing education activity, pharmacists and pharmacy technicians will be able to

                    1. DIFFERENTIATE between perimenopause and menopause
                    2. DISCUSS the age-related loss of estrogen and its relation to symptoms of perimenopause and menopause
                    3. IDENTIFY remedies and lifestyle adjustments for perimenopause and menopause

                          Women with glasses, smiling with her eyes closed. There is a pink circle surrounding her with the female gender symbol. A text box floats above her with a an "X" on top of a drop of blood.

                          Release Date:

                          Release Date: August 15, 2025

                          Expiration Date: August 15, 2028

                          Course Fee

                          Pharmacists: $7

                          Pharmacy Technicians: $4

                          ACPE UANs

                          Pharmacist: 0009-0000-25-051-H01-P

                          Pharmacy Technician: 0009-0000-25-051-H01-T

                          Session Codes

                          Pharmacist: 25YC51-SLP74

                          Pharmacy Technician: 25YC51-LPS47

                          Accreditation Hours

                          2.0 hours of CE

                          Accreditation Statements

                          The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy is accredited by the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education as a provider of continuing pharmacy education.  Statements of credit for the online activity ACPE UAN 0009-0000-25-051-H01-P/T  will be awarded when the post test and evaluation have been completed and passed with a 70% or better. Your CE credits will be uploaded to your CPE monitor profile within 2 weeks of completion of the program.

                           

                          Disclosure of Discussions of Off-label and Investigational Drug Use

                          The material presented here does not necessarily reflect the views of The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy or its co-sponsor affiliates. These materials may discuss uses and dosages for therapeutic products, processes, procedures and inferred diagnoses that have not been approved by the United States Food and Drug Administration. A qualified health care professional should be consulted before using any therapeutic product discussed. All readers and continuing education participants should verify all information and data before treating patients or employing any therapies described in this continuing education activity.

                          Faculty

                          Yvonne Riley-Poku
                          PharmD, RPh
                          Medical writer
                          Storrs, CT
                           

                          Faculty Disclosure

                          In accordance with the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education (ACPE) Criteria for Quality and Interpretive Guidelines, The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy requires that faculty disclose any relationship that the faculty may have with commercial entities whose products or services may be mentioned in the activity.

                          Yvonne Riley-Poku, PharmD, RPh, has no relationships with ineligible companies and therefore have nothing to disclose.

                          ABSTRACT

                          Awareness about menopause is growing. It is now common to see menopause information on social media platforms and national news outlets. Menopause, sometimes referred to as “the change of life,” is a natural part of biological aging in women. Every woman who lives long enough will experience menopause, but its arrival affects some women physically, mentally, and emotionally. Menopausal hormone replacement therapy (HRT) is an option for treatment of certain symptoms, but it comes with risks. The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has specific approved indications for HRT and various organizations such as the United States Preventive Task Force and the Menopause Society have issued their positions and recommendations for its use. Non-hormonal therapies are available, and lifestyle modifications may also help offset some health risks that are associated with this stage in a woman’s life.

                          CONTENT

                          Content

                          INTRODUCTION

                          Menopause is a natural part of biological aging in women. This phenomenon marks the end of reproductive years, and every woman who lives long enough will experience it.1 Often beginning in perimenopause—the period of time leading up to menopause—women experience many symptoms and health risks.1,2

                           

                          Approximately 1.3 million women in the United States (U.S.) enter menopause every year.3 Despite being a natural result of aging, menopause has historically been shrouded in secrecy and seldom openly discussed, but the New York Times reports that high profile women and female celebrities alike are now openly discussing their experience with menopause. It also reports that the market is being flooded with menopause-related beauty products and telemedicine start-ups.4

                           

                          With increased interest, a growing movement to increase awareness, and information flooding the Internet, it is important now more than ever for women to receive accurate information from healthcare providers and reputable sources. However, a recent survey revealed that nationally, most obstetrics and gynecology residency programs lack a dedicated menopause curriculum. Most program directors also agreed that their programs needed more menopause education resources.

                           

                          Many symptoms and health risks of menopause, if left unmanaged, have an impact on a woman’s quality of life, productivity, and emotional state. Women are living longer, and a woman may live many years after menopause. Globally, a woman aged 60 years in 2019 could expect to live on average another 21 years.1

                           

                          Years after the National Institutes of Health's (NIHs) Women's Health Initiative, HRT as an option for certain symptoms in postmenopausal women is back in the spotlight. Now, physicians take a nuanced approach to HRT, considering certain individual patient factors.6,7

                           

                          It is important for women to recognize symptoms, understand the risk of chronic conditions, and generally educate themselves about the menopause transition. Being well-informed about the menopause transition means women can be proactive and lead healthier lifestyles to counter the issues that may arise with menopause such as bone loss and cardiovascular disease. Proper management during this period results in healthy aging and better quality of life. Menopause is a universal female experience, and it is vital that both physicians and women alike be appropriately informed about it.

                           

                          PAUSE AND PONDER: What do you wish you knew about menopause before you or a loved one began the menopause transition?

                           

                          DEFINING MENOPAUSE AND ITS EFFECTS

                          Perimenopause is the period leading up to menopause and signals the final years of a woman’s reproductive life. This period can last several years, the average being four years.2 It begins with irregular menstrual cycles marked by a gradual loss of ovarian follicular function (i.e., ovaries begin to stop releasing eggs for fertilization) and a decline in circulating estrogen and progesterone levels.1,2 This period may usher in a slew of symptoms, and the hormonal changes and fluctuations are often responsible for them.2 A woman can still get pregnant during perimenopause because although menstruation is irregular, the ovaries can still release eggs for fertilization. It is impossible to accurately predict ovulation, and women must use adequate birth control until one full year after the last period to avoid unwanted pregnancy.2

                           

                          Menopause marks the end of the reproductive years for women.1,2 Menopause occurs or is diagnosed after 12 consecutive months without menstruation in the absence of clinical intervention or other physiologic or pathologic cause.1 This means that a woman could go 11 months with no menstruation and then have a period in the 12th month. The clock would then begin all over again. A woman cannot become naturally pregnant after menopause because the ovaries have stopped releasing eggs for fertilization. Importantly, they can still contract sexually transmitted diseases, so experts advise women to use adequate protective measures.2

                           

                          The average age of menopause in the U.S. is 52.2 Genetics, lifestyle, and environmental factors influence the age at menopause and the timing of symptoms throughout the menopausal transition. According to the World Health Organization, for women worldwide, natural menopause generally occurs between age 45 and 55.1 The SIDEBAR lists factors that trigger early menopause.

                           

                          SIDEBAR: Factors That Trigger an Early Onset of Menopause1,2

                          • Surgical procedures that involve removing both ovaries
                          • Medical interventions that cause termination of ovarian function, such as radiation therapy and chemotherapy
                          • Premature menopause, or menopause before age 40 due to chromosomal abnormalities, autoimmune disorders, or other unknown causes

                           

                          Menopausal Hormone Changes

                          Years before menopause occurs, ovarian function begins to fluctuate.2 This is a progressive process often responsible for many of the symptoms women experience during this period.

                           

                          How this Happens

                          Ovaries are the primary estrogen source in a woman’s body, with follicles synthesizing and releasing the hormone. An ovary has the greatest number of oocytes (about 1 to 2 million) at birth. Oocytes are the immature cells within a follicle that potentially mature into fully developed eggs. A fully developed egg is  released from the ovary during ovulation and travels down the fallopian tube to be potentially fertilized.8,9

                           

                          As women age, the number of follicles in their ovaries decrease. During a physiological process known as atresia, ovarian follicles that contain oocytes degenerate and die. This is a normal process that happens in all women. The process ensures that only healthy follicles with oocytes mature and ovulate. During atresia, follicle cells die, eggs break down, and macrophages and other follicular cells resorb the follicle contents. Although ovulation will also decrease the number of follicles, the vast number of follicles are decreased through atresia. At some point the number of follicles and oocytes reach critically low levels in the ovaries. Since these are responsible for producing estrogen, this is when women begin to experience symptoms associated with estrogen depletion.8,9

                           

                          At various stages during the menopause transition, women may only have a few hundred to a few thousand oocytes left. Estrogen levels decrease and menstrual periods become irregular. As various tissues in the body have estrogen receptors, when estrogen levels decrease or fluctuate, several systems can develop and women experience many of the symptoms of perimenopause and menopause.8,9

                           

                          Progesterone levels also decrease during the menopausal transition. After ovulation releases the egg from the follicle, the leftover contents of the empty follicle form the corpus luteum, a temporary gland that produces progesterone.10 Progesterone thickens the endometrium (lining of the uterus) for a fertilized egg to implant and grow. If pregnancy occurs, the placenta takes over the production of progesterone. In the absence of pregnancy, progesterone levels drop, causing the endometrium to shed (causing menstruation). During the menopause transition, the ovaries no longer produce high levels of estrogen and progesterone in the absence of regular ovulation.10

                           

                          Symptoms of Menopause

                          Hormonal changes and fluctuations lead to the many symptoms associated with perimenopause and menopause, some more common than others and affecting each woman differently, with varying degrees of severity. Vasomotor symptoms (VMS) like hot flashes are the most recognized and reported symptom of menopause.11 Table 1 describes the symptoms a woman may experience during and after the menopause transition listed in the order in which they typically occur. For less common symptoms of menopause, see the SIDEBAR. Some women may be able to tolerate menopausal symptoms with lifestyle changes alone, while others may require hormonal remedies, non-hormonal remedies, or a combination of both.11

                           

                          Table 1. Signs and Symptoms of Perimenopause and Menopause2,12-15

                          Symptom Description
                          Irregular periods

                           

                          Starts the menopause transition

                          Unpredictable ovulation causes changes in menstrual cycle patterns

                          Could be months of missed periods, varying lengths of time between cycles (longer or shorter), and menstrual flow changes

                          Vasomotor Symptoms ( hot flashes, night sweats)

                           

                          This is a sudden feeling of heat in the face, neck, and chest that is often accompanied by flushing, perspiration, and acute feelings of physical discomfort. May be followed by cold shivering. This may last up to several minutes. Night sweats are hot flashes that cause sweating during sleep. Vasomotor symptoms can occur before, during, and after menopause.
                          Genitourinary symptoms Symptoms include dysuria, urinary incontinence, increased urinary frequency, vaginal and cervical atrophy (thinning, drying, and inflammation of the vaginal walls), sexual dysfunction, and decreased libido. Vaginal dryness presents an increased risk for sexually transmitted diseases.
                          Weight gain While weight gain occurs in both men and women with aging, a particular increased deposition of visceral and subcutaneous adipose tissue to the abdomen in women during the menopause transition occurs.

                          For weight gain before menopause, estrogen makes it possible for subcutaneous adipose tissue to deposit in the gluteal and femoral regions. After menopause this deposition moves to the abdominal region due to the decrease in estrogen levels. Abdominal fat distribution carries the risk of cardiovascular and metabolic diseases.

                          Sleep disruption Sleep duration changes with advancing age, however during the menopause transition, concurrent changes in women’s reproductive hormone levels influence sleep duration and quality. It may be harder to fall asleep and stay asleep. Night sweats may also disrupt sleep.
                          Mood changes  depression, anxiety Estrogen receptors are in the brain including areas involved in mood regulation. Stress, work, and family responsibilities affect mood during this period. Although the exact mechanism is unknown, mood symptoms may additionally be related to fluctuating estrogen levels. Some women may feel irritable or have crying spells.

                          Depression and anxiety may be caused by fluctuating hormones, menopausal symptoms, or both.

                           

                          SIDEBAR: Less Common Symptoms of Menopause16

                          Experts are continually learning about menopause’s symptoms. Gradual estrogen loss may be responsible for these less common symptoms of menopause:

                          • Dry eye syndrome and vision changes
                          • Easier bruising due collagen changes in the skin
                          • Return of acne
                          • Joint pain and stiffness
                          • Growing rogue hairs on chin or cheeks

                          The menopause transition can cause a wide variety of symptoms, but other serious conditions can cause these too. It is always important to consult a provider to rule these out.

                           

                          PAUSE AND PONDER: How many symptoms of perimenopause and menopause can you name aside from hot flashes?

                           

                          Chronic Conditions and Long-Term Consequences

                          Long term complications of menopause are related to low estrogen levels. Two major complications of concern are cardiovascular disease and osteoporosis.

                           

                          Declining estrogen in menopause increases the risk of cardiovascular disease.2 Coronary heart disease rates are two to three times higher in those who have reached menopause than those at the same age who have not. Women generally have a lower risk of heart disease than men before the age of 55, but after menopause, women reach the same level of risk for heart disease as men of the same age.2

                           

                          Estrogen deficiency during menopause also causes the typical bone loss or decreased bone density seen in osteoporosis.2 Up to 20% of bone loss  can happen  during this period.17 The consequences of osteoporosis are an increased risk of fractures, pain, mobility issues, and loss of height. Osteoporosis, a progressive condition, can worsen over time.

                           

                          Menopause symptoms also adversely affect women in the workplace. Middle aged women contribute greatly to the global workforce and could potentially face increased health care costs and lost opportunities for career advancement. Mayo Clinic conducted a study to determine the estimated economic impact of menopause symptoms based on missed days from work; hours cut back at work; and quitting, retiring, or changing jobs. Based on missed workdays alone, these researchers estimated an annual loss of $1.8 billion in the U.S. due to menopause-related symptoms.18

                           

                          MENOPAUSAL HORMONE REPLACEMENT THERAPY

                          The Ongoing Debate of HRT

                          Experts have debated menopausal HRT use for decades. Studies in the mid-1970s showed that women who used estrogen alone had an increased risk of endometrial cancer.19,20 Researchers found that adding progesterone to estrogen provided protection against uterine cancer. Since then, progesterone is added to hormone treatment for women who have an intact uterus.7,19,20

                           

                          Between 1993 and 1998, the NIH began The Women’s Health Initiative, to study strategies to prevent and control some of the most common causes of morbidity and mortality in postmenopausal women (e.g., cardiovascular disease, osteoporosis, cancer).21 Researchers randomized more than 27,000 postmenopausal women aged 50 to 79 in the HRT portion of the trial. Those with a uterus (n = 16,608) received either combined conjugated equine estrogen (CEE 0.625 mg/day) plus medroxyprogesterone acetate (MPA 2.5 mg/day) or placebo. Women without a uterus (i.e., prior hysterectomies) were assigned to CEE alone or placebo.22,23 The primary outcome was coronary heart disease incidence, and the primary safety outcome was invasive breast cancer incidence. To summarize overall effects, researchers also looked at other risks and benefits of HRT in addition to the primary outcomes. These included colorectal cancer, hip fracture, and cardiovascular risks.22,23

                           

                          After about five years, results began to show that the risks of HRT outweighed the benefits. HRT was associated with an increased risk of stroke, heart disease, and breast cancer. However, the results also indicated a reduction in osteoporotic fractures and colorectal cancers but no significant cardiovascular benefits. Ultimately, the research team stopped the trial early. Many physicians stopped prescribing HRT, and many women abandoned it altogether.6,7

                           

                          Despite stopping the trial, researchers continued to follow up with trial participants until 2010.24,25 They reanalyzed the data based on results from the intervention, post-intervention, and follow-up phases with consideration for the trial participants’ ages. Researchers concluded that the trial findings do not support HRT for chronic disease prevention. They have since noted that HRT may be beneficial for bothersome symptoms among women in early menopause (i.e., women 50 to 59 years of age) or within 10 years of menopause onset. Data do not support HRT for chronic disease prevention in this subset either. These women must have no contraindications and must be interested in taking HRT.24,25

                           

                          Extensive debate continues, but several groups such as the U.S. Preventive Service Task Force (USPSTF) and the Menopause Society, have published position statements and recommendations for HRT use. The USPSTF is an independent panel of experts in disease prevention and evidence-based medicine that makes recommendations about clinical preventive services. The Menopause Society, formerly known as the North American Menopause Society, is a non-profit organization dedicated to improving women’s health during menopause and beyond, by providing resources for both healthcare professionals and the public.

                           

                          Several organizations have issued recommendations on HRT use in postmenopausal individuals, particularly regarding its benefits, risks, and approved indications. While the general consensus is that HRT is the most effective treatment for VMS and genitourinary syndrome of menopause, its role in preventing chronic conditions such as osteoporosis remains controversial. The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) and the Menopause Society support HRT for VMS, genitourinary symptom management, and osteoporosis prevention in appropriate candidates, especially women younger than age 60 or within 10 years of menopause onset. In contrast, USPSTF recommends against using HRT solely for the primary prevention of chronic conditions in asymptomatic individuals. Recommendations emphasize shared decision-making and individual risk assessment.26-28

                           

                          Forms of Hormone Therapy

                          Menopausal HRT involves the administration of synthetic estrogen and progesterone to replace a woman’s hormone levels to help alleviate symptoms. Women should be educated on the risks and benefits of HRT, consider their personal risk, and be willing to take HRT, before starting treatment.26-28

                           

                          The current recommendations are for postmenopausal women younger than 60 years or women who are within 10 years of menopause onset and have no contraindications. These women must also be willing to take HRT.26-28 HRT use is not recommended in women after the age of 60, or in those who are 10 years post menopause. The FDA has approved HRT for VMS, urogenital symptoms, and postmenopausal osteoporosis prevention.

                           

                          HRT may be given as estrogen alone, progestin alone, or a combination estrogen and progestin. The FDA has approved several formulations, including oral, topical, transdermal, and injectable dosage forms.29 Table 2 lists FDA-approved HRT products.

                           

                          Women with an intact uterus with no other contraindications or risks who are willing to take HRT for menopause may receive estrogen in combination with progesterone. Estrogen therapy alone causes the endometrial lining to grow unopposed. Adding progesterone to the regimen prevents this abnormal growth and thus reduces risk of malignancy.19,20

                           

                          Women with no other contraindications or risks who have had a hysterectomy and are willing to take HRT may receive estrogen therapy alone. In such cases, progesterone is unnecessary.19,20

                           

                          Table 2. FDA-Approved Hormone Replacement Therapies29

                          Generic Name How Supplied Brand Name(s)
                          Estrogen-Only
                          Conjugated estrogens Oral Premarin
                          Vaginal cream Premarin
                          Injection Premarin
                          Estradiol Gel Divigel, Elestrin, Estrogel
                          Transdermal patch Alora, Climara, Menostar*, Minivelle, Vivelle, Vivelle-Dot
                          Transdermal skin spray Evamist
                          Vaginal cream Estrace
                          Vaginal ring Estring
                          Vaginal tablet Vagifem
                          Estradiol acetate Vaginal ring Femring
                          Estradiol valerate Injection Delestrogen
                          Estropipate Oral Ogen
                          Progestin-Only
                          Medroxyprogesterone acetate Oral Provera
                          Micronized progesterone Oral Prometrium
                          Combination Therapies
                          Conjugated estrogen/ bazedoxifene** Oral Duavee
                          Conjugated estrogen/ medroxyprogesterone Oral Prempro
                          Estradiol/drospirenone Oral Angeliq
                          Estradiol/levonorgestrel Transdermal patch Climara Pro
                          Estradiol/norethindrone acetate Oral Activella
                          Transdermal patch Combipatch
                          Norethindrone acetate/ethinyl estradiol Oral Femhrt

                          *Menostar is for osteoporosis prevention only. **Bazedoxifene is not a hormonal therapy.

                           

                          Due to the known risks of menopausal HRT use, all patients need a thorough evaluation—including a detailed medical history and physical examination—for a proper diagnosis and to identify potential contraindications. Providers and patients must also assess whether the benefits outweigh the risks on an individualized basis. Women should use HRT at the lowest possible dose and for the shortest possible duration to achieve symptomatic relief while avoiding adverse effects.30

                           

                          Women should not take HRT if they have29

                          • problems with vaginal bleeding
                          • current or past cancers, such as breast cancer or uterine cancer
                          • current or past blood clot, stroke, or heart attack
                          • bleeding disorders
                          • liver disease
                          • allergy to hormone medicine

                           

                          NON-HORMONAL THERAPIES FOR MENOPAUSE

                          Risks of menopausal HRT outweigh its benefits for many patients, so additional options are needed. The FDA has approved a few non-hormonal options for women who are ineligible for or uninterested in HRT, and others many opt to use off-label or complementary and alternative medicines.26

                           

                          FDA-Approved Therapies

                          Fezolinetant

                          The FDA recently approved an oral medication fezolinetant (Veozah) for the treatment of moderate to severe VMS caused by menopause. Fezolinetant is a neurokinin-3 (NK3) receptor antagonist that binds to and blocks the activities of the neurokinin-3 receptor, which plays a role in the brain’s regulation of body temperature.31

                           

                          Fezolinetant is supplied as a 45 mg tablet, taken once daily with or without food. It has been associated with a risk of elevated hepatic transaminases, leading the FDA to add a Boxed Warning about the risk of liver injury more than a year after initial approval.32 Blood work to check for liver damage is required before fezolinetant use and every three months for the first nine months after initiation of therapy.31

                           

                          Adverse effects of fezolinetant include abdominal pain, diarrhea, insomnia, back pain, hot flush, and elevated hepatic transaminases. Symptoms relating to liver damage to watch for include nausea, vomiting, and yellowing of the skin and eyes. Patients experiencing these must consult their prescriber immediately. Fezolinetant is contraindicated in patients with cirrhosis, severe renal damage, or end-stage renal disease.31

                           

                          Paroxetine

                          Paroxetine (Brisdelle) is a selective serotonin reuptake inhibitor (SSRI) FDA-approved for the treatment of moderate to severe VMS. It is not an estrogen and its mechanism of action for the treatment of VMS is unknown.33 The recommended dose is one 7.5 mg capsule daily at bedtime with or without food. This medication contains a lower dose of paroxetine than those used for other indications (e.g., depression, obsessive compulsive disorder) and is not approved for any psychiatric conditions.

                           

                          Paroxetine’s common adverse effects include headache, fatigue, and nausea and vomiting. Paroxetine has a Boxed Warning for the potential of increased risk of suicidal thoughts and behaviors, and serotonin syndrome. The FDA warns prescribers to monitor for worsening and emergence of these severe symptoms. Contraindications include concomitant use or within 14 days of monoamine oxidase inhibitors, use with thioridazine or pimozide, hypersensitivity to any ingredient, and pregnancy. VMS do not occur during pregnancy and paroxetine may cause fetal harm.33

                           

                          Selective Estrogen Receptor Modulators

                          Raloxifene and ospemifene are selective estrogen receptor modulators (SERMs) FDA-approved for varying uses during menopause. Bazedoxifene is another FDA-approved SERM, which is found only in a combination tablet with conjugated estrogens.

                           

                          Raloxifene (Evista) is SERM indicated for treatment and prevention of osteoporosis in post-menopausal women.34 Patients take one 60 mg tablet once daily. Common adverse effects include hot flashes, leg cramps, peripheral edema, flu syndrome, arthralgia, and sweating.34 Raloxifene is contraindicated in women with active or history of venous thromboembolism, including deep vein thrombosis, pulmonary embolism, and retinal vein thrombosis. It is also contraindicated for use in pregnancy, as it may cause fetal harm.34 The FDA’s Boxed Warning cautions of an increased risk of venous thromboembolism and death from stroke. Providers must consider the risk-benefit balance in women at risk for stroke. Concomitant use is not recommended or caution should be used when raloxifene is taken with cholestyramine, warfarin, and other highly protein-bound drugs (e.g., diazepam, diazoxide, lidocaine).34

                           

                          Ospemifene (Osphena) is a SERM indicated for the treatment of moderate to severe vaginal dryness and dyspareunia due to menopause.35 Patients take one 60 mg oral tablet once daily with food. Ospemifene acts just like estrogen in some parts of the body but not in others. 35 It has estrogen agonistic effects on the endometrium, which has led the FDA to add a Boxed Warning of a risk of endometrial cancer. With its estrogen agonist/antagonist profile, the FDA has another Boxed Warning of an increased risk of cardiovascular disorders (stroke, coronary heart disease, venous thromboembolism). 35 Ospemifene should be used for the shortest duration consistent with treatment goals and risks for the individual woman.35 Common adverse effects include hot flush, vaginal discharge, muscle spasms, headache, hyperhidrosis, vaginal hemorrhage, and night sweats. Contraindications to ospemifene use include35

                          • undiagnosed abnormal genital bleeding
                          • estrogen-dependent neoplasia
                          • hypersensitivity to ospemifene
                          • active or history of deep vein thrombosis or pulmonary embolism
                          • active or history of arterial thromboembolic disease (e.g., stroke, myocardial infarction)

                           

                          Women taking ospemifene should not take estrogen or estrogen agonist/antagonists, fluconazole, or rifampin concomitantly.35

                           

                          Bazedoxifene is a SERM available in combination with conjugated estrogens (Dauvee) indicated for the treatment of moderate to severe VMS and postmenopausal osteoporosis prevention in women with a uterus. Bazedoxefine acts as an estrogen agonist in some estrogen-sensitive tissues and as an antagonist in others (e.g., the uterus). The pairing of conjugated estrogens with bazedoxifene produces a composite effect that is specific to each target tissue. The bazedoxifene component reduces the risk of endometrial hyperplasia that can occur with the conjugated estrogens component.  Patients take one tablet (conjugated estrogens/bazedoxifene 0.45 mg/20 mg)daily with or without food for both indications.36

                           

                          Women taking conjugated estrogens/bazedoxifene should add supplemental calcium and/or vitamin D to their diets if intake is inadequate.

                           

                          Contraindications to conjugated estrogens/bazedoxifene include36

                          • Undiagnosed abnormal uterine bleeding
                          • Known, suspected, or a history of breast cancer
                          • Known or suspected estrogen-dependent neoplasia
                          • Active or history of deep vein thrombosis and pulmonary embolism
                          • Active or history of arterial thromboembolic disease (stroke, myocardial infarction)
                          • Known hepatic impairment or disease
                          • Hypersensitivity to estrogens, bazedoxifene or any ingredients
                          • Known protein C, protein S, or antithrombin deficiency or other known thrombophilic disorders
                          • Pregnancy

                           

                          Women taking conjugated estrogens/bazedoxifene should not take progestins, additional estrogens, or additional estrogen agonists/antagonists.

                           

                          Adverse reactions include a risk for malignant neoplasms (endometrial cancer, breast cancer, ovarian cancer), cardiovascular disorders (stroke, coronary heart disease, venous thromboembolism), gallbladder disease and hypertriglyceridemia.36

                           

                          Off-Label Therapies

                          In 2023, The Menopause Society conducted an evidence-based review of the most current and available literature to determine whether to recommend some management options for menopause associated VMS. They recommended some SSRIs, serotonin-norepinephrine reuptake inhibitors (SNRIs), and gabapentin.37

                           

                          Researchers have found in large randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled trials that paroxetine, citalopram, escitalopram, venlafaxine, desvenlafaxine, and duloxetine reduce hot flashes by 24% to 69%. These medications are also first-line therapies for mood disorders such as depression and anxiety. For women with new onset or worsening mood disorders, which are common in menopause, these medications may be beneficial.38,37 Common adverse effects associated with use of SSRIs and SNRIs include nausea, weight gain, gastrointestinal disorders, headache, and sexual dysfunction. Lower doses are generally used for VMS rather than the higher doses used for mood disorders.38

                           

                          In very small randomized double-blind, placebo-controlled trials, gabapentin was effective at reducing hot flash frequency by 45% to 51% compared to placebo.39,40 It was also shown to be a well-tolerated treatment for hot flashes.40 Gabapentin is also used as treatment for neuropathic pain and epilepsy and may help with sleep when taken at bedtime. Adverse effects include dizziness and coordination difficulties, weight gain, edema, and lethargy. Patients should use the lowest effective dose to minimize these negative adverse effects.38

                           

                          Complementary and Alternative Medicine

                          Some complementary and alternative medicines (CAMs) make claims about easing menopausal symptoms. Complementary health approaches to menopause may include any or all of the following41:

                          • nutritional (e.g., dietary supplements, special diets)
                          • psychological (e.g., meditation, hypnosis, relaxation therapies)
                          • physical (e.g., massage therapy, acupuncture)
                          • combination approaches (e.g., yoga, tai chi [physical and psychological])

                           

                          CAMs are not regulated the same way as FDA-approved medications. Although some dietary supplements have been studied for menopause symptoms, none have been shown to be clearly helpful. Little information is available on long term safety of dietary supplements for menopause and some supplements may have harmful adverse effects or drug interactions.

                           

                          In 2023, the Menopause Society released its position statement on non-hormonal approaches for menopause-related VMS based on an evidence-based review of current literature.37 For CAM, it recommended cognitive behavioral therapy and clinical hypnosis as options for the treatment of VMS. The Menopause Society did not recommend yoga, acupuncture, or any natural products for VMS.37

                           

                          According to the NIH’s National Center for Complementary and Integrative Health, the evidence has not clearly shown that phytoestrogens, herbs, and other dietary supplements; acupuncture; or yoga relieve menopause symptoms.41

                           

                          Phytoestrogens are substances from plants that have chemical structures similar to those of estrogen. Flaxseed is a phytoestrogen source and the isoflavones found in soy and red clover are also phytoestrogens. Studies on their ability to relieve menopause symptoms have been inconsistent, or no more effective than placebo.  Phytoestrogens may be safe for short term use, but their long-term safety has not been established and may not be safe for women who should not take estrogen.41

                           

                          Regarding custom-mixed (compounded) bioidentical hormones, the group reports that the evidence does not support claims that they are more effective than conventional HRT. They also warn that compounded bioidentical hormones have not been shown to be safer than other forms of HRT, and that their content may vary from batch to batch.41

                           

                          PAUSE AND PONDER: In what ways have you made or supported a loved one in making lifestyle changes to adequately prepare for “the change of life?”

                           

                          Lifestyle Modification During and After Menopause,

                          To stay healthy during and after menopause, lifestyle changes and modifications (illustrated in Figure 1) are beneficial. Lifestyle changes and modifications may make menopausal symptoms bearable even if symptoms are not completely eliminated. Lifestyle changes may also help prevent the chronic conditions of menopause such as cardiovascular disease, osteoporosis, and insulin resistance. It may also help with mood and sleep and help prepare a woman for healthy aging.42

                           

                          Figure 1. Lifestyle Modifications for During and After Menopause 43

                           

                          At least 30 minutes of physical activity on most days of the week helps women maintain a healthy weight and is good for the bones, heart, and mood. Women should aim for a mix of moderate and vigorous aerobic activities and exercises that build muscle strength, such as weight-bearing exercises.42,44 Women should obtain advice from their healthcare provider before beginning any physical activity.

                           

                          Eating a healthy diet can help counter some of the symptoms women experience in the menopause transition and prevent chronic illnesses and certain cancers. Essential nutrients to focus on in menopause include vitamins B, C, D, calcium, and protein for energy. A healthy diet also helps with the maintenance of a healthy weight, which improves cholesterol levels, reduces the risk for diabetes, improves blood pressure, and improves daily function.42,44

                           

                          Good sleep is essential for health and emotional well-being. Insufficient sleep duration and quality may be a problem during this period in a woman’s life. Hot flashes and night sweats are also disruptive to sleep. Getting enough sleep lowers the risks for chronic conditions such as high blood pressure, diabetes, and heart disease. It also improves attention and memory. Regular exercise, a healthy diet, avoiding caffeine and alcohol before bedtime, and going to bed and getting up at the same time each day can improve sleep.44

                           

                          Cognitive function at midlife appears to be influenced by the stage of menopause and menopausal symptoms such as sleep difficulties and mood changes. Many life stressors cannot be altered, but coping skills and strategies are beneficial to maintain a balance between self-nurturing and the obligations of work and caring for others. To improve and maintain cognition and mood, women should consider maintaining a social network, remaining physically and mentally active, and following a healthy diet.44 Maintaining quality social contacts is beneficial during this period. Actively engaging with friends, family, and the community in positive ways helps improve health and emotional wellbeing.

                           

                          Smoking is damaging to health in many ways. It causes heart disease, reduces bone density, and causes many forms of cancer. Experts advise women to stop smoking and limit alcohol consumption.42,44

                           

                          CONCLUSION

                          Discussions about menopause are no longer taboo. While HRT is beneficial and remains an option for women with no risk factors and contraindications, it is not a one-size fits all solution. HRT comes with risks and providers must assess patients carefully before treatment initiation and consider patient preferences. Non-hormonal therapies are available for women who may be unable or unwilling to take HRT. Women are living longer, and a woman may live for several years post-menopause. Lifestyle changes and modifications help counter the chronic conditions that often arise post-menopause and are important and necessary for healthy aging in women.

                          Pharmacist Post Test (for viewing only)

                          Spotlight on Perimenopause and Menopause: What Pharmacy Teams Should Know
                          Pharmacist Post-test 25-051

                          After completing this continuing education activity, pharmacists will be able to
                          • DIFFERENTIATE between perimenopause and menopause
                          • DISCUSS the age-related loss of estrogen and its relation to symptoms of perimenopause and menopause
                          • IDENTIFY remedies and lifestyle adjustments for perimenopause and menopause

                          1. Which of the following is caused by the fluctuating hormone levels of perimenopause?
                          A. Immediate, permanent cessation of ovulation
                          B. Early onset menopause
                          C. Symptoms that signal the transition to menopause

                          2. AB is a 45-year-old woman who has been on the same birth control for 5 years. She is experiencing occasional night sweats, and she has noticed weight gain particularly in her abdominal region. She has not had a menstrual period in 6 months. What is AB most likely experiencing?
                          A. Menopause
                          B. Perimenopause
                          C. Adverse effects of birth control

                          3. Women naturally undergo a process where follicles containing oocytes degenerate and die ensuring that only healthy follicles with oocytes mature and ovulate. What is this process known as?
                          A. Perimenopause
                          B. Atresia
                          C. Pregnancy

                          4. BC is a 48-year-old woman with an intact uterus seeking a remedy for her bothersome vasomotor symptoms. Based on her medical history, labs, and risk assessment, her OBGYN determines she is a candidate for hormone replacement therapy and BC agrees. Which of these regimens is appropriate?
                          A. Estradiol/norethindrone acetate
                          B. Conjugated estrogen/bazedoxifene
                          C. Medroxyprogesterone acetate

                          5. MD is 48 years old with an intact uterus experiencing bothersome vasomotor symptoms. Her provider determines that she is a candidate for hormone therapy based on her medical history, labs, and a risk assessment. MD is very concerned about the risks associated with hormone therapy. Which of the following is the BEST response?
                          A. “As long as you use both estrogen and progesterone, the risks are minimal.”
                          B. “The gabapentin you already take for neuropathic pain should be enough.”
                          C. “Fezolinetant may be a better option for you, I can contact your doctor.”

                          6. Experts advise women to make lifestyle modifications for healthy aging after menopause. Which one of these is the BEST recommendation?
                          A. Isolating from others for peace of mind
                          B. Drinking one glass of wine nightly for relaxation
                          C. Improving the diet and incorporating exercise

                          7. KG is in perimenopause, and although she is still asymptomatic, she expresses concern about the health conditions some women face post-menopause. She requests menopausal hormone replacement therapy to prevent possible cardiovascular disease and Type 2 diabetes. Which of these is the MOST appropriate response?
                          A. Hormone therapy is not recommended to prevent these chronic conditions
                          B. It’s a good idea to start hormone therapy early before symptoms arise
                          C. Her provider should prescribe paroxetine as preventive therapy instead

                          8. Which of the following is the progressive loss of estrogen during the menopause transition responsible for?
                          A. Ensuring that only healthy follicles with oocytes mature and ovulate
                          B. Thickening the endometrial lining to prepare for cessation of menstruation
                          C. Unpredictable ovulation and changes in menstrual cycle patterns

                          9. When do women experience vasomotor symptoms?
                          A. Only during menopause
                          B. During perimenopause and menopause
                          C. Only during post-menopause

                          10. What strategies can women implement to lower the risk for chronic conditions associated with menopause, including heart disease and osteoporosis?
                          A. Request hormone therapy before they begin the menopause transition
                          B. Make lifestyle modifications that may help counter some future health risks
                          C. Do nothing, the risk of menopause complications is not that significant

                          Pharmacy Technician Post Test (for viewing only)

                          Spotlight on Perimenopause and Menopause: What Pharmacy Teams Should Know
                          Pharmacy Technician Post-test 25-051

                          After completing this continuing education activity, pharmacists will be able to
                          • DIFFERENTIATE between perimenopause and menopause
                          • DISCUSS the age-related loss of estrogen and its relation to symptoms of perimenopause and menopause
                          • IDENTIFY remedies and lifestyle adjustments for perimenopause and menopause

                          1. Which of the following is caused by the fluctuating hormone levels of perimenopause?
                          A. Immediate, permanent cessation of ovulation
                          B. Early onset menopause
                          C. Symptoms that signal the transition to menopause

                          2. AB is a 45-year-old woman who has been on the same birth control for 5 years. She is experiencing occasional night sweats, and she has noticed weight gain particularly in her abdominal region. She has not had a menstrual period in 6 months. What is AB most likely experiencing?
                          A. Menopause
                          B. Perimenopause
                          C. Adverse effects of birth control

                          3. Women naturally undergo a process where follicles containing oocytes degenerate and die ensuring that only healthy follicles with oocytes mature and ovulate. What is this process known as?
                          A. Perimenopause
                          B. Atresia
                          C. Pregnancy

                          4. BC is a 48-year-old woman seeking a remedy for her bothersome vasomotor symptoms. She presents a prescription to the pharmacy for fezolinetant 60 mg tablet to be taken once daily. Why should you bring this to the pharmacist’s attention?
                          A. Fezolinetant is a 45 mg tablet
                          B. Fezolinetant is a suspension
                          C. Fezolinetant is not FDA-approved

                          5. MD is 48 years old and experiencing bothersome vasomotor symptoms. Her provider determines that she is a candidate for hormone therapy based on her medical history, labs, and a risk assessment. MD is very concerned about the risks associated with hormone therapy. Which of the following is a non-hormonal option to consider for MD?
                          A. Bazedoxifene
                          B. Estradiol vaginal ring
                          C. Fezolinetant

                          6. Experts advise women to make lifestyle modifications for healthy aging after menopause. Which one of these is the BEST recommendation?
                          A. Isolating from others for peace of mind
                          B. Drinking one glass of wine nightly for relaxation
                          C. Improving the diet and incorporating exercise

                          7. KG presents a prescription to the pharmacy for paroxetine 20 mg tablets. She mentions that it has been prescribed for her hot flashes. Why should you bring this to the pharmacist’s attention?
                          A. Paroxetine cannot be prescribed for hot flashes
                          B. Paroxetine dosing for hot flashes is 7.5 mg daily
                          C. Paroxetine 20 mg has been discontinued

                          8. Which of the following is the progressive loss of estrogen during the menopause transition responsible for?
                          A. Ensuring that only healthy follicles with oocytes mature and ovulate
                          B. Thickening the endometrial lining to prepare for cessation of menstruation
                          C. Unpredictable ovulation and changes in menstrual cycle patterns

                          9. When do women experience vasomotor symptoms?
                          A. Only during menopause
                          B. During perimenopause and menopause
                          C. Only during post-menopause

                          10. What strategies can women implement to lower the risk for chronic conditions associated with menopause, including heart disease and osteoporosis?
                          A. Request hormone therapy before they begin the menopause transition
                          B. Make lifestyle modifications that may help counter some future health risks
                          C. Do nothing, the risk of menopause complications is not that significant

                          References

                          Full List of References

                          1. World Health Organization. Menopause. October 16, 2024. Accessed April 10, 2025. https://www.who.int/news-room/fact-sheets/detail/menopause
                          2. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. Office on Women’s Health. Menopause Basics. March 17, 2025. Accessed April 10, 2025. https://womenshealth.gov/menopause/menopause-basics
                          3. Society for women’s health research. Menopause. Accessed July 9, 2025. https://swhr.org/health_focus_area/menopause/
                          4. Larocca A. Welcome to the menopause gold rush. The New York Times. December 20, 2022. Accessed April 10, 2025. https://www.nytimes.com/2022/12/20/style/menopause-womens-health-goop.html
                          5. Allen JT, Laks S, Zahler-Miller C, et al. Needs assessment of menopause education in United States obstetrics and gynecology residency training programs. Menopause. 2023;30(10):1002-1005. doi:10.1097/GME.0000000000002234
                          6. Lobo RA. Hormone-replacement therapy: current thinking. Nat Rev Endocrinol. 2017;13(4):220-231. doi: 10.1038/nrendo.2016.164\
                          7. Cagnacci A, Venier M. The controversial history of hormone replacement therapy. Medicina (Kaunas). 2019;55(9):602. doi: 10.3390/medicina55090602.
                          8. Vollenhoven B, Hunt S. Ovarian ageing and the impact on female fertility. F1000Res. 2018;7:F1000 Faculty Rev-1835. doi: 10.12688/f1000research.16509.1
                          9. Zhou J, Peng X, Mei, S. Autophagy in Ovarian follicular development and Atresia. Int J Biol Sci. 2019;15(4):726-737. doi: 10.7150/ijbs.30369
                          10. Cleveland Clinic. Progesterone. December 29, 2022. Accessed April 10, 2025. https://my.clevelandclinic.org/health/body/24562-progesterone
                          11. The Menopause Society. Menopause Topics: Symptoms. Accessed April 10, 2025. https://menopause.org/patient-education/menopause-topics/symptoms
                          12. National Institute on Aging. What is menopause? October 16, 2024. Accessed April 10, 2025. https://www.nia.nih.gov/health/menopause/what-menopause
                          13. Knight MG, Anekwe C, Washington K, Akam EY, Wang E, Stanford FC. Weight regulation in menopause. Menopause. 2021;28(8):960-965. doi: 10.1097/GME.0000000000001792
                          14. Vahratian A. Sleep duration and quality among women aged 40–59, by menopausal status. NCHS data brief, no 286. Hyattsville, MD: National Center for Health Statistics. 2017. Accessed April 10, 2025. https://www.cdc.gov/nchs/data/databriefs/db286.pdf
                          15. The Menopause Society. Menopause Topics: Mental Health. Accessed April 10, 2025. https://menopause.org/patient-education/menopause-topics/mental-health
                          16. Mayo Clinic Press. Could this be menopause? Exploring lesser-known symptoms and what to do about them. April 23, 2024. Accessed April 10, 2025. https://mcpress.mayoclinic.org/menopause/could-this-be-menopause-exploring-lesser-known-symptoms-and-what-to-do-about-them/
                          17. Endocrine Society. Menopause and Bone Loss. January 24, 2022. Accessed July 14, 2025. endocrine.org/patient-engagement/endocrine-library/menopause-and-bone-loss
                          18. Faubion SS, Enders F, Hedges MS, et al. Impact of Menopause Symptoms on Women in the Workplace. Mayo Clin Proc. 2023;98(6):833-845. doi:10.1016/j.mayocp.2023.02.025
                          19. Woodruff JD, Pickar JH. Incidence of endometrial hyperplasia in postmenopausal women taking conjugated estrogens (Premarin) with medroxyprogesterone acetate or conjugated estrogens alone. The Menopause Study Group. Am J Obstet Gynecol. 1994;170(5 Pt 1):1213-23. doi: 10.1016/s0002-9378(94)70129-6
                          20. Ziel HK, Finkle WD. Increased risk of endometrial carcinoma among users of conjugated estrogens. N Engl J Med. 1975;293(23):1167-1170. doi:10.1056/NEJM197512042932303
                          21. Design of the Women's Health Initiative clinical trial and observational study. The Women's Health Initiative Study Group. Control Clin Trials. 1998;19(1):61-109. doi:10.1016/s0197-2456(97)00078-0
                          22.Rossouw JE, Anderson GL, Prentice RL, et al; Writing group for the Women's Health Initiative investigators. Risks and benefits of estrogen plus progestin in healthy postmenopausal women: principal results From the Women's Health Initiative randomized controlled trial. JAMA. 2002;288(3):321-333. doi: 10.1001/jama.288.3.321
                          23. Anderson GL, Limacher M, Assaf AR, et al; Women's Health Initiative Steering Committee. Effects of conjugated equine estrogen in postmenopausal women with hysterectomy: the Women's Health Initiative randomized controlled trial. JAMA. 2004;291(14):1701-1712. doi: 10.1001/jama.291.14.1701
                          24. Manson JE, Chlebowski RT, Stefanick ML, et al. Menopausal hormone therapy and health outcomes during the intervention and extended poststopping phases of the Women’s Health Initiative randomized trials. JAMA. 2013;310(13):1353–1368. doi:10.1001/jama.2013.278040
                          25. Manson JE, Crandall CJ, Rossouw JE, et al. The Women’s Health Initiative randomized trials and clinical practice: A review. JAMA. 2024;331(20):1748–1760. doi:10.1001/jama.2024.6542
                          26. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. Menopause. December 14, 2023. Accessed April 10, 2025. https://www.fda.gov/consumers/womens-health-topics/menopause
                          27. The 2022 Hormone Therapy Position Statement of The North American Menopause Society Advisory Panel. The 2022 hormone therapy position statement of The North American Menopause Society. Menopause. 2022;29(7):767-794. doi: 10.1097/GME.0000000000002028
                          28. US Preventive Services Task Force. Hormone therapy for the primary prevention of chronic conditions in postmenopausal persons: US Preventive Services Task Force Recommendation Statement. JAMA. 2022;328(17):1740–1746. doi:10.1001/jama.2022.18625
                          29. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. Menopause: Medicines to help you. August 22, 2019. Accessed April 10, 2025. https://www.fda.gov/consumers/free-publications-women/menopause-medicines-help-you
                          30. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. Office on Women’s Health. Menopause Treatment. March 11, 2025. Accessed April 10, 2025. https://womenshealth.gov/menopause/menopause-treatment
                          31. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. FDA approves novel drug to treat moderate to severe hot flashes caused by menopause. May 12, 2023. Accessed April 10, 2025. https://www.fda.gov/news-events/press-announcements/fda-approves-novel-drug-treat-moderate-severe-hot-flashes-caused-menopause
                          32. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. FDA adds warning about rare occurrence of serious liver injury with the use of Veozah (fezolinetant) for hot flashes due to menopause. September 12, 2024. Accessed April 10, 2025. https://www.fda.gov/drugs/drug-safety-and-availability/fda-adds-warning-about-rare-occurrence-serious-liver-injury-use-veozah-fezolinetant-hot-flashes-due
                          33. National Institute of Health. National Library of Medicine. DAILYMED. Paroxetine capsule. September 1, 2023. Accessed April 10, 2025. https://dailymed.nlm.nih.gov/dailymed/drugInfo.cfm?setid=1383d713-79b9-45bd-bd06-65707f28bc99
                          34. National Institute of Health. National library of medicine DAILYMED. Raloxifene hydrochloride tablet. September 24, 2014. Accessed April 10, 2025. https://dailymed.nlm.nih.gov/dailymed/drugInfo.cfm?setid=8f4fe353-c5de-44ba-9c68-b75a185f7dc5
                          35. National Institute of Health. National library of medicine DAILYMED. Osphena. March 16, 2023. Accessed April 10, 2025. https://dailymed.nlm.nih.gov/dailymed/drugInfo.cfm?setid=8462d6ab-e3cd-4efa-a360-75bf8f917287
                          36. National Institute of Health. National library of medicine DAILYMED. DUAVEE- conjugated estrogens/bazedoxifene tablet, film coated. January 13, 2025. Accessed July 15, 2025. https://dailymed.nlm.nih.gov/dailymed/drugInfo.cfm?setid=e16705d8-4472-4f83-96ac-69fa2be066cb
                          37. “The 2023 Nonhormone Therapy Position Statement of The North American Menopause Society” Advisory Panel. The 2023 nonhormone therapy position statement of The North American Menopause Society. Menopause. 2023;30(6):573-590. doi:10.1097/GME.0000000000002200
                          38. Iyer TK, Fiffick AN, Batur P. Nonhormone therapies for vasomotor symptom management. Cleve Clin J Med. 2024;91(4):237-244. doi:10.3949/ccjm.91a.23067
                          39. Guttuso T Jr, Kurlan R, McDermott MP, Kieburtz K. Gabapentin's effects on hot flashes in postmenopausal women: a randomized controlled trial. Obstet Gynecol. 2003;101(2):337-45. doi: 10.1016/s0029-7844(02)02712-6
                          40. Butt DA, Lock M, Lewis JE, Ross S, Moineddin R. Gabapentin for the treatment of menopausal hot flashes: a randomized controlled trial. Menopause. 2008;15(2):310-8. doi: 10.1097/gme.0b013e3180dca175
                          41. National Institutes of Health. National Center for Complementary and Integrative Health. Menopausal symptoms: in-depth. May 2017. Accessed April 25, 2025. https://www.nccih.nih.gov/health/menopausal-symptoms-in-depth
                          42. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. Office on women’s Health. Menopause and your health. March 12, 2025. Accessed April 10, 2025. https://womenshealth.gov/menopause/menopause-and-your-health
                          43. National Institutes of Health. National Institute on Aging. Infographic: Staying healthy during and after menopause. January 27, 2025. Accessed April 10, 2025. https://www.nia.nih.gov/health/menopause/staying-healthy-during-and-after-menopause
                          44. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Women’s Health. Age is just a number: health tips for women over 50. September 23, 2024. Accessed April 10, 2025. https://www.cdc.gov/womens-health/features/age-just-a-number.html

                          Sjogren’s Disease: How Dry Am I?

                          Learning Objectives

                           

                          At the completion of this activity, pharmacists will be able to:
                          1. Discuss current theories postulating how Sjogren's disease develops
                          2. Identify biomarkers used in diagnosis and patient classification
                          3. Interpret guidelines and evidence-based medicine to use best practices to manage Sjogren's disease
                          4. Use elements of an integrated approach to care among specialists and other pharmacists

                          At the completion of this activity, the pharmacy technicians will be able to:
                          1. Describe Sjogren's disease's basic pathology and symptoms
                          2. Outline prescription and non-prescription treatments used in Sjogren's disease
                          3. Identify when to refer patients to the pharmacists for recommendations or referrals

                          Release Date:

                          Release Date: August 1, 2025

                          Expiration Date: August 1, 2028

                          Course Fee

                          FREE

                          An Educational Grant has been provided by:

                          Novartis

                          ACPE UANs

                          Pharmacist: 0009-0000-25-050-H01-P

                          Pharmacy Technician: 0009-0000-25-050-H01-T

                          Session Codes

                          Pharmacist: 22YC47-FKW24

                          Pharmacy Technician: 22YC47-WKW44

                          Accreditation Hours

                          2.0 hours of CE

                          Accreditation Statements

                          The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy is accredited by the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education as a provider of continuing pharmacy education.  Statements of credit for the online activity ACPE UAN 0009-0000-25-050-H01-P/T  will be awarded when the post test and evaluation have been completed and passed with a 70% or better. Your CE credits will be uploaded to your CPE monitor profile within 2 weeks of completion of the program.

                           

                          Disclosure of Discussions of Off-label and Investigational Drug Use

                          The material presented here does not necessarily reflect the views of The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy or its co-sponsor affiliates. These materials may discuss uses and dosages for therapeutic products, processes, procedures and inferred diagnoses that have not been approved by the United States Food and Drug Administration. A qualified health care professional should be consulted before using any therapeutic product discussed. All readers and continuing education participants should verify all information and data before treating patients or employing any therapies described in this continuing education activity.

                          Faculty

                          Kelsey Giara, PharmD
                          Freelance Medical Writer
                          Pelham, NH

                          Faculty Disclosure

                          In accordance with the Accreditation Council for Pharmacy Education (ACPE) Criteria for Quality and Interpretive Guidelines, The University of Connecticut School of Pharmacy requires that faculty disclose any relationship that the faculty may have with commercial entities whose products or services may be mentioned in the activity.

                          Dr. Giara has no relationship with ineligible companies and therefore has nothing to disclose.

                           

                          THIS IS A RE-ACCREDITATION OF A PREVIOUS CE CALLED SJOGREN’S SYNDROME: HOW DRY AM I?

                          If you took that CE, you will not be able to receive credit for this one. The only change is in terminology.
                          This disease recently underwent a name change from “Sjogren’s syndrome (SjS).” The name change from Sjögren’s syndrome to Sjögren’s disease was proposed and endorsed by the 2023 International Rome Consensus Task Force, a multidisciplinary panel of international experts and patient representatives. The name was changed to better reflect its nature as a distinct systemic autoimmune disease, rather than a vague collection of symptoms implied by the term “syndrome.” The change also aimed to eliminate the confusing and potentially misleading distinction between “primary” and “secondary” forms, which does not align with how other autoimmune diseases are classified and was viewed by patients as diminishing the seriousness of their condition.

                          For further information, see Ramos-Casals M, Baer AN, Brito-Zerón MDP, et al. 2023 International Rome consensus for the nomenclature of Sjögren disease. Nat Rev Rheumatol. 2025;21(7):426-437. doi:10.1038/s41584-025-01268-z

                          ABSTRACT

                          Once considered a “dry eye-dry mouth-arthritis” illness, Sjogren’s syndrome (SjS) is a systemic condition strongly associated with organ-specific and systemic autoimmunity. Systemic SjS is linked to autoimmune dysfunction that may eventually be irreversible. This disease affects about 2 to 4 million Americans, but every patient presents differently and symptoms mimic those of various other conditions, posing a challenge for diagnosis and treatment. SjS’s classic symptoms include sicca (ocular and oral dryness), arthralgia (joint pain), and fatigue. The pathogenesis of the disease is complex and multifactorial, but researchers are looking for a well-defined cause and modern understanding of SjS is improving. The search for biomarkers, therapeutic targets, and disease-modifying treatments for SjS is underway. Health care providers—including pharmacists and pharmacy technicians—who are up to date on current understanding and recently-updated guidelines will be better prepared to make evidence-based recommendations and appropriate referrals to improve care and outcomes for patients with SjS.

                          CONTENT

                          Content

                          Sjogren’s Disease: How Dry Am I?

                           

                          Author: Kelsey Giara, PharmD

                           

                          Program Goal: To educate pharmacists and pharmacy technicians about emerging theories related to Sjogren’s disease, including use of biomarkers to diagnose and classify patients. This continuing education activity will cover guidelines, evidence-based medicine, and supportive material that the integrated healthcare team can employ to improve quality of life for patients who have Sjogren’s disease.

                           

                          Learning Objectives:

                          Upon completion of this activity, pharmacists will be able to

                          1. Discuss current theories postulating how Sjogren’s disease develops
                          2. Identify biomarkers used in diagnosis and patient classification
                          3. Interpret guidelines and evidence-based medicine to use best practices to manage Sjogren’s disease
                          4. Use elements of an integrated approach to care among specialists and other pharmacists

                           

                          Upon completion of this activity, pharmacy technicians will be able to

                          1. Describe Sjogren’s disease’s basic pathology and symptoms
                          2. Outline prescription and non-prescription treatments used in Sjogren’s disease
                          3. Identify when to refer patients to the pharmacists for recommendations or referrals

                           

                          ABSTRACT

                          Once considered a “dry eye-dry mouth-arthritis” illness, Sjogren’s disease (SjD) is a systemic condition strongly associated with organ-specific and systemic autoimmunity. Systemic SjD is linked to autoimmune dysfunction that may eventually be irreversible. This disease affects about 2 to 4 million Americans, but every patient presents differently and symptoms mimic those of various other conditions, posing a challenge for diagnosis and treatment. SjD’s classic symptoms include sicca (ocular and oral dryness), arthralgia (joint pain), and fatigue. The pathogenesis of the disease is complex and multifactorial, but researchers are looking for a well-defined cause and modern understanding of SjD is improving. The search for biomarkers, therapeutic targets, and disease-modifying treatments for SjD is underway. Health care providers—including pharmacists and pharmacy technicians—who are up to date on current understanding and recently-updated guidelines will be better prepared to make evidence-based recommendations and appropriate referrals to improve care and outcomes for patients with SjD.

                           

                           

                          INTRODUCTION

                          The medical community’s understanding of Sjogren’s disease (SjD) has evolved a great deal since it was first recognized in the late 1800s. A surgeon reported the first clinical case of what is now called SjD in 1888, describing a male patient with painless bilateral swelling of the lacrimal, parotid, and submandibular glands (i.e., the glands that produce tears and saliva).1 Following a series of case reports over about a century detailing a “dry eye-dry mouth-arthritis” illness, physicians pieced together and named the disease known today as SjD.1,2

                           

                          Importantly, this disease recently underwent a name change from “Sjogren’s syndrome (SjD).” The name change from Sjögren’s syndrome to Sjögren’s disease was proposed and endorsed by the 2023 International Rome Consensus Task Force, a multidisciplinary panel of international experts and patient representatives.2 The name was changed to better reflect its nature as a distinct systemic autoimmune disease, rather than a vague collection of symptoms implied by the term “syndrome.” The change also aimed to eliminate the confusing and potentially misleading distinction between “primary” and “secondary” forms, which does not align with how other autoimmune diseases are classified and was viewed by patients as diminishing the seriousness of their condition.2

                           

                          Epidemiologic data about SjD in the United States (U.S.) is limited. It is estimated to affect about 2 to 4 million Americans, but only about 1 million are definitively diagnosed.3,4 Women are nine times more likely to have the condition, and it typically emerges around menopause (i.e., after age 50). SjD is the second most common rheumatologic disorder in the U.S. behind systemic lupus erythematous (SLE).5 Autoimmune conditions don’t discriminate; many famous people have historically battled them publicly. Selena Gomez postponed a concert tour to undergo treatment for SLE. Kim Kardashian suffers from psoriasis. SjD, as a rarer condition, doesn’t make the news quite as often as other autoimmune conditions, but here are a few people you may recognize who are battling the disease today6-8:

                          • Carrie Ann Inaba: In 2021, the 30-season judge of Dancing with the Stars and co-host of The Talk took a leave of absence from television to focus on her health and wellbeing. The chronic pain associated with her SjD, SLE, fibromyalgia, and rheumatoid arthritis forced her to stay in bed three days a week.
                          • Shannon Boxx: This World Cup soccer player and Olympic gold medalist was diagnosed with SjD in 2002 and suffered from severe fatigue and joint pain. Ahead of the 2007 World Cup, she was put on corticosteroids to alleviate her symptoms and needed specific approval from the U.S. Anti-Doping Agency to take them while competing.
                          • Venus Williams: While dominating the sport of tennis as the most decorated female tennis player to compete in the Olympic Games, she has also been in a battle against her own body. SjD-related fatigue caused her to pull out of the 2011 U.S. Open, and she was temporarily booted from the top 100 tennis players for the first time in 15 years.

                           

                          As an autoimmune condition, SjD’s cause is unclear. Genetic, environmental, and hormonal factors likely work collaboratively to produce the cardinal symptoms of dry eyes and/or mouth, fatigue, and limb pain. Some patients experience additional manifestations in the lymph nodes, lungs, kidneys, muscles, nervous system, skin, teeth, and brain. Glandular and joint involvement is also possible, and constitutional symptoms (e.g., fever, involuntary weight loss, night sweats) can affect quality of life. Patients with SjD have an elevated risk of lymphoma, about 15 to 20 times higher than the general population.9,10

                           

                          Clinical Presentation

                          SjD is a systemic condition strongly associated with organ-specific and systemic autoimmunity. Since it impacts multiple systems in the body, SjD can manifest various ways. Affected patients may have symptoms that cycle between mild and severe. Symptoms also tend to worsen as patients age and the function of the exocrine glands subsides.

                           

                          SjD’s main symptoms are dry mouth and dry eyes (collectively, sicca). More than 95% of patients with SjD present with sicca symptoms, which are irritating and poorly tolerated.11 About half of patients also have dermatologic involvement (i.e., dry skin or rashes).3,12 Xerostomia (oral dryness) can substantially impact daily life, interfering with eating, speaking, or sleeping.4 When patients’ salivary volume decreases, they also lose saliva’s antibacterial properties. This can accelerate tooth decay, infection, and periodontal disease. Patients with dry mouth also report swallowing difficulties, halitosis (bad breath), and burning sensations in the mouth. Using artificial saliva products to manage dry mouth is time-consuming and ineffective for many patients with SjD.13

                           

                          Patients with ocular dryness complain of itchy, gritty, sore, or dry sensations in the eyes despite appearing physically normal.4 Decreased tear production over time can cause chronic irritation and destruction of conjunctival epithelium that lines the inside of the eyelids and covers the sclera (whites of the eyes).

                           

                          Patients may also experience symptoms elsewhere in the body, including

                          • Dry cough
                          • Fatigue
                          • Joint and muscle pain
                          • Numbness or tingling of the hands and feet
                          • Vaginal dryness

                           

                          Patients who develop musculoskeletal symptoms may have difficulty remaining active. About 53% of patients experience arthralgias (joint stiffness) and 22% experience myalgias (muscle pain).4 SjD-associated arthralgia occurs primarily in small joints, sometimes asymmetrically. Providers may confuse these symptoms with SLE or rheumatoid arthritis.

                           

                          Disease Classification and Severity

                          Experts classify SjD as primary or secondary (see Table 1). Primary SjD (pSjD) is an autoimmune disease that causes immune cells to mistakenly attack and destroy healthy cells in the glands that produce tears and saliva. SjD can also be secondary to other autoimmune diseases (e.g., SLE, rheumatoid arthritis, scleroderma), as is the case for about 60% of patients.4

                           

                          Table 1. American-European Consensus Group Criteria for the Classification of SjD14

                          Primary SjD Criteria Secondary SjD Criteria SjD Exclusion Criteria
                          At least 4 of the following, including at least criterion 5 or 6:

                          1.   Ocular symptoms (dry eyes for ≥ 3 months, foreign-body sensation, use of tear substitutes > 3 times daily)

                          2.   Oral symptoms (dry mouth, recurrently swollen salivary glands, frequent use of liquids to aid swallowing)

                          3.   Ocular signs (Schirmer test* performed without anesthesia [< 5 mm in 5 minutes], positive vital dye staining results)

                          4.   Oral signs (abnormal imaging of salivary glands, unstimulated salivary flow < 1.5 mL in 15 minutes)

                          5.   Positive minor salivary gland biopsy findings

                          6.   Positive anti-SDA or anti-SDB antibody results

                          In the presence of a connective-tissue disease, symptoms of oral or ocular dryness exist in addition to criterion 3, 4, or 5 for primary SjD. Any of the following:

                          ·     AIDS

                          ·     Graft versus host disease

                          ·     Hepatitis C virus infection

                          ·     Past head-and-neck radiation

                          ·     Prior lymphoma

                          ·     Sarcoidosis

                          ·     Use of anticholinergic drugs

                          *Schirmer test is used to determine whether the eye produces enough tears to keep it moist; AIDS = acquired immunodeficiency syndrome; SjD = Sjogren’s disease; SDA = Sjogren's disease A; SDB = Sjogren’s disease B

                           

                          There is a broad range of disease severity in SjD. Some patients experience mild glandular dryness and constitutional symptoms while others have severe glandular involvement and various manifestations throughout the rest of the body, including systemic autoimmune features. Mild SjD has a good prognosis, but patients often have difficulty managing their symptoms and moderate-to-severe disease can severely impact quality of life.15 SjD symptoms cause considerable psychological distress. About one third of patients with the condition have clinically significant anxiety and half have diagnosable depression.16

                           

                          Measuring Systemic Disease Activity

                          The European League Against Rheumatism (EULAR) created a disease activity index for primary SjD (ESSDAI) to measure systemic disease activity.17,18 The ESSDAI includes 12 domains: cutaneous, respiratory, renal, articular, muscular, peripheral nervous system, central nervous system, hematological, glandular, constitutional, lymphadenopathic, and biological. Each domain is divided into three or four levels of activity, and patients are scored based on that domain’s severity (i.e., 0 indicates no activity and 3 or 4 indicates high activity).18

                           

                          Each domain’s weight reflects its relative importance to disease activity, and the score for each domain is equal to the level of activity multiplied by the domain’s weight. A final ESSDAI score (i.e., the sum of all the domain scores) could theoretically be between 0 and 123. Patients’ disease activity based on ESSDAI score is as follows17,18:

                          • 0 = no activity
                          • 1 to 4 = low activity
                          • 5 to 13 = moderate activity
                          • 14 or greater, or high activity in any domain with a definition of high activity = severe activity

                           

                          Measuring Patient-Reported Outcomes

                          EULAR also created the SjD patient reported index (ESSPRI) to assess patient-reported outcomes in pSjD.18 This scale focuses solely on the three major manifestations of SjD: dryness, fatigue, and musculoskeletal pain. Patients rank each of these domains on a scale of 0 to 10, and the total ESSPRI score is the mean (average) of those scores. A “patient acceptable symptom state” is defined as an ESSPRI score of less than 5, and clinicians and researchers define “minimally clinically important improvement” as an increase in ESSPRI score 1 point or more or 15%.18

                           

                          Recognition and Treatment are Inadequate

                          SjD’s variable symptoms are not always present at the same time, leading providers—including physicians, dentists, and ophthalmologists—to treat each symptom individually, unaware of the systemic disease’s presence. Patients suffer from SjD symptoms an average of 10 years before obtaining a diagnosis.4,19 The condition has historically been misdiagnosed because providers consider symptoms minor or vague and they often mimic other diseases. Up to 30% of people 65 years or older, with SjD or not, report dryness of the eyes and mouth.19 Sicca and/or parotid gland enlargement can result from various other conditions, including19

                          • Alzheimer’s disease
                          • anxiety and depression
                          • Bell’s palsy
                          • bulimia
                          • chronic conjunctivitis or blepharitis (inflammation of the membrane on the eye or the eyelid, respectively)
                          • chronic pancreatitis
                          • complications from contact lenses
                          • dehydration
                          • diabetes mellitus
                          • hepatitis C
                          • Parkinson’s disease
                          • rosacea
                          • viral infections (e.g., cytomegalovirus, influenza, mumps)

                           

                          About half of patients with SjD lack a definitive diagnosis, so undertreatment is considerable.4 For those who are diagnosed, treatment guidelines have historically been unclear and available treatments are limited and often unsuccessful. Recently, evidence-based treatment guidelines have emerged (discussed below) to help providers make decisions regarding SjD care. SjD is incurable; targeted, disease-modifying therapies are needed.

                           

                          DISEASE MECHANISMS AND BIOMARKERS

                          pSjD’s pathogenesis is complex and multifactorial. Underlying genetic predisposition, epigenetic mechanisms (i.e., things that cause changes that affect the way your genes work), and environmental factors contribute to disease development.20 There is no identified causal agent for SjD and it presents with multiple organ involvement. This makes the pursuit for defining an etiology and identifying biomarkers all the more important.

                           

                          Researchers historically considered SjD a specific, self-perpetuating immune-mediated loss of exocrine tissue as the main cause of glandular dysfunction.20 Today, with more sophisticated research methods, experts believe this fails to fully explain several SjD-related phenomena and experimental findings.

                           

                          Genetics and Epigenetics

                          Genetic studies are a powerful tool for discovering new pathogenic pathways. Scientists have made great strides in studying genetic susceptibility to pSjD, but the evidence still does not match that of other autoimmune conditions.20 Several genome-wide association studies in pSjD have shown that the strongest association lies within human leukocyte antigen (HLA) genes.

                           

                          The non-HLA genes IRF5 and STAT4 (relevant to the innate and adaptive immune systems) also show consistent associations but on a smaller scale.20 These genes activate interferon (IFN) pathways as part of the innate immune system. Epigenetic mechanisms (e.g., DNA methylation) also play a role in pSjD pathogenesis by modulating gene expression without altering DNA sequences. This may serve as a dynamic link between the genome and SjD manifestation.

                           

                          Chronic Immune System Activation

                          Chronic immune system activation is central to SjD pathophysiology. Innate (“nonspecific”) immunity is the defense system people are born with to protect them from all antigens (foreign substances) that enter the body. Unlike the innate immune system, which attacks based on identification of general threats, the adaptive immune system is activated by pathogen exposure. Adaptive immunity uses its “memory” to learn about the threat and enhance the immune system accordingly over time. The adaptive immune system relies on B cells and T cells—otherwise known as lymphocytes—to function.

                           

                          IFNs exert antiviral, antimicrobial, antitumor, and immunomodulatory effects as part of the innate immune system. Literature widely recognizes the SjD-associated “IFN signature,” as increased IFN levels activate multiple IFN-responsive genes involved in immune activities.21 Research indicates that type 1 IFN dysregulation is a major pathogenic mechanism in many autoimmune conditions, including SjD.21,22 It is also suggested that “crosstalk” between the type 1 IFN pathway and B-cell activation causes a vicious cycle of immune activation where type 1 IFNs drive production of autoantibodies (made against substances formed by a person's own body) which further promotes IFN production.21 Toll-like receptors (TLRs) also play key roles in the innate immune system.21 Research suggests that TLR-dependent IFN expression may contribute to immune system activation and autoimmunity development in pSjD.21

                           

                          In patients with SjD, lymphocytes infiltrate the salivary and lacrimal glands and other glands of the respiratory and gastrointestinal tracts and vagina.4 T cells in this infiltrate produce interleukin (IL)-2, IL-4, IL-6, IL-1β, and tumor necrosis factor while the B cells cause hypergammaglobulinemia (overproduction of immunoglobulins/antibodies) and produce autoantibodies.4 Some of these autoantibodies target cellular antigens of salivary ducts, the thyroid gland, the gastric mucosa, erythrocytes, the pancreas, the prostate, and nerve cells. About 60% of patients with SjD also express non-organ-specific autoantibodies, including rheumatoid factors, antinuclear antibodies, and antibodies to the small RNA-protein complexes Ro/SS-A and La/SS-B.4 These processes eventually lead to glandular dysfunction that manifests as dry eyes and mouth and enlargement of major salivary glands.

                           

                          B-cell activating factor (BAFF) may also contribute to pSjD development. BAFF is usually an active part of the innate immune system, but B cells, T cells, and epithelial cells in the salivary glands also release BAFF in response to IFNs.21 This suggests that epithelial cells are not only passive victims of pSjD autoimmunity but also contributors to immune system overactivation. This also shows that BAFF serves as a link between the innate and adaptive immune systems in pSjD and could also represent an important therapeutic target in pSjD.21

                           

                          Other Theories

                          Research into a well-defined cause of SjD is ongoing. Additional theories include a potential viral trigger, neuroendocrine abnormalities, and autoimmune epithelitis. Evidence for a viral trigger in pSjD development is conflicting, but studies have been unable to replicate an association between SjD and Epstein-Barr virus, hepatitis C virus, retroviruses, or Coxsackie A virus.21 Researchers think that the microbial stimuli driving pSjD development could be diverse or that the initiating viral stimulus is no longer detectable once the disease manifests.

                           

                          The classic triad of symptoms in pSjD is sicca, arthralgia, and fatigue. Pathogenic mechanisms producing fatigue remain unknown, but neuroendocrine dysfunction may play a key role in the process.21 Studies show that patients with pSjD have decreased hormone levels (e.g., cortisol) compared with healthy individuals, indicating dysfunction of the hypothalamic-pituitary-adrenal (HPA) axis. The HPA axis is suggested to promote fatigue and depression in patients with pSjD.

                           

                          The Search for Biomarkers

                          Disclosing a disease’s etiology allows researchers to identify biomarkers (i.e., a biological molecule in the body that is a sign of an abnormal process) for diagnosis and assessment of disease process and treatment response. It also stimulates discovery of treatment targets. Researchers have been hard at work searching for biomarkers for SjD. Biomarkers can drive more precise diagnosis and may be used to measure disease severity or see how well the body responds to treatment. Scientists have discovered potential biomarkers, but studies have yet to validate their utility in SjD diagnosis and treatment.

                           

                          Novel tissue-specific autoantibodies (TSAs) have been described in the early stages of pSjD, including salivary protein-1, parotid secretory pro­tein, and carbonic anhydrase 6.23 These are detectable even before the classic autoantibodies Ro/SS-A and La/SS-B. Further studies are needed to determine the utility of TSAs in screening patients with dry eye for SjD.

                           

                          Some researchers hope to look beyond blood for reliable biomarkers for pSjD, more specifically in tears or saliva. They have studied y=tear proteins LACTO and LIPOC-1 as potential biomarkers for pSjD and one study shows they are more accurate indicators than traditional clinical tests for disease detection.23 Other studies have examined salivary levels of S100A8/A9 as a potential biomarker for lymphoma development in patients with pSjD. Imaging biomarkers are also gaining attention. Salivary gland ultrasounds, for example, are non-invasive and valuable for studying the morphology (structure) of major salivary glands.23

                           

                          EVIDENCE-BASED TREATMENT STRATEGIES

                          SjD has no cure, and treatment varies from person to person based on their symptoms. Until recently, guidelines were unavailable to help clinicians manage Sjogren’s disease rationally.

                           

                          In 2019, EULAR released evidence-based guidelines on which to rely, but clinicians may be unaware of its availability.11 Medication is the cornerstone of these recommendations, so pharmacists and pharmacy technicians should be prepared to make evidence-based recommendations and appropriate referrals to improve care for patients with SjD. It is important to remember that no therapy is explicitly approved for SjD disease modification. Rather, providers use therapies indicated for each symptom separately—and some off label (i.e., for a non-FDA-approved indication)—on a trial-and-error basis based on available evidence from small trials that sometimes include a subset of patients with SjD.

                           

                          Sicca

                          Glandular dysfunction—the cause of sicca symptoms—appears to be stable for long periods of time (up to 12 years) and has a chronic course in patients with pSjD.11 No therapeutic intervention can reverse or slow the progression of glandular dysfunction, so sicca symptoms cannot be cured. EULAR guidelines state that the first therapeutic approach to sicca symptoms should be symptomatic relief using topical therapies (e.g., saliva substitutes, artificial tears).11 This minimizes the risk of adverse effects (AEs) seen with systemic therapies.

                           

                          Finding the optimal lubrication is a matter of trial and error, so pharmacy staff should be prepared to set realistic expectations for patients seeking relief of sicca symptoms. They should also help patients recognize when it may be time to talk to their prescriber about stepping up to pharmacologic treatment.

                           

                          Oral Dryness

                          Treatment of oral dryness depends on the severity of salivary gland dysfunction (Figure 1).11 No evidence indicates any non-pharmacologic stimulant is better than another, so patients with mild glandular dysfunction should use a trial-and-error approach to find one that works for them. If these therapies don’t help or patients do not wish to use non-pharmacologic stimulants, providers should move on to pharmacologic stimulation. Muscarinic agonists’ main AE is excessive sweating.11 To avert this, EULAR recommends increasing the dose progressively up to 15 to 20 mg/day when possible.

                           

                          Figure 1. Treating Oral Dryness Based on Degree of Glandular Dysfunction11

                           

                          Cevimeline and pilocarpine are cholinergic agents, meaning they activate muscarinic receptors in the parasympathetic nervous system (which controls bodily functions when a person is at rest) to stimulate saliva production. Patients with SjD take cevimeline 30 mg by mouth three times daily or pilocarpine 5 mg by mouth four times daily to treat dry mouth.24,25 The most common AEs of cevimeline and pilocarpine are excessive sweating, nausea, rhinitis (stuffy nose), and diarrhea.

                           

                          The ideal saliva substitute will have a neutral pH mimicking natural saliva composition and contain fluoride and other electrolytes.11 Gel formulations are ideal for patients with acceptable salivary flow output, especially those with oral dryness at night. However, patients often dislike these formulations due to their sticky mouth-feel. Pharmacists can recommend that patients dilute oral gel formulations to reduce this phenomenon for better adherence. Thinner preparations are preferred for patients with better-preserved glandular function.11

                           

                          Some experts feel that all patients with oral dryness should use salivary substitutes regardless of the degree of glandular dysfunction.11 Whether patients use these formulations or not, all patients with salivary dysfunction should use a neutral pH sodium fluoride gel to prevent extensive caries (i.e., cavities).

                           

                          Ocular Dryness

                          Reflex tears are the tears we produce when we cry, while we produce basal tears continuously to lubricate the ocular surface (the surface layers of the eye, namely the cornea and conjunctiva).26 While tears may taste like salt water, their composition is more complex. Both types of tears contain water but they also contain mucin, lipids, proteins (lysozyme, lactoferrin, lipocalin, immunoglobulins, and peroxidase), electrolytes (sodium, potassium, chloride, bicarbonate, magnesium, and calcium), growth factors (epidermal growth factor), cytokines, and glucose.

                           

                          Artificial tears and ocular gels/ointments are first line therapies for volume replacement and lubrication for ocular dryness.11 While many people refer to over-the-counter (OTC) drops, gels, ointments, and lubricants as artificial tears, these products lack the biologically active components found in natural tears.27 Their primary role is to supplement the patient’s natural tear production and provide sufficient lubrication to avoid eye complications.

                           

                          Many artificial tear formulations are available, so patients may need assistance navigating the options. Table 2 lists common ingredients in artificial tears and their functions. A major difference between OTC products is the presence of chemical formulations that increase viscosity (thickness/stickiness) and adhesion and facilitate even distribution across the ocular surface.27 As a general rule, drops are the lowest viscosity products, ointments have the highest viscosity, and suspensions fall in between. Lubricants with a polymeric base or viscosity agent are preferred for patients with SjD to11

                          1. Add volume to the tear lake
                          2. Increase the time the lubricant remains on the ocular surface
                          3. Cushion the ocular surface to reduce friction between the eye and the eyelid

                           

                          Table 2. Artificial Tear Ingredients and Their Functions27-30

                          Ingredient Class Function Examples
                          Astringent Precipitate protein to clear mucus from outer eye surface zinc sulfate
                          Buffering agent Maintain normal tear film pH bicarbonate, phosphate
                          Demulcent Protect and lubricate mucous membrane surfaces carboxymethylcellulose sodium, dextran, gelatin, glycerin, hydroxyethyl cellulose, hypromellose, methylcellulose, polyethylene glycol, polysorbate, polyvinyl alcohol, povidone, propylene glycol
                          Lipid formulations Improve gland function and increase tear film stability castor oil, phospholipids, triglycerides
                          Preservatives Prevent bacterial contamination benzalkonium chloride (BAK), ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (EDTA), polyquaternium-1, sodium chlorite, sodium perborate

                           

                          Not all artificial tear products are equal, and different products work better for different patients. The optimal artificial tear offers long-lasting, effective symptom relief. It should also have low blur and be comfortable to administer.31 Surface tension, pH, viscosity, duration of action, and preservative presence or absence affect these factors.

                           

                          OTC eye drops commonly include preservatives to prevent bacterial contamination. Repeated use of preservative-containing eye drops is associated with ocular allergies and toxicities, which can lead to product nonadherence and worsening symptoms.27 Benzalkonium chloride (BAK)—the most common preservative used in eye formulations—is an epitheliotoxin and a toxic detergent.28,29 It attracts monocytes and lymphocytes to the conjunctiva, worsening inflammation and thickening the tissue. This effect is cumulative; the more the eye is exposed to BAK, the greater the negative effects.29 As a rule-of-thumb, pharmacists should always recommend products without BAK as a preservative.28

                           

                          EULAR recommends that all patients with SjD who present with ocular dryness use artificial tears containing methylcellulose or hyaluronate at least twice daily.11 They should increase frequency as symptoms reappear as often as hourly. Individuals who use artificial tears four or more times daily should always use preservative-free products. Patients who experience overnight dryness should consider ophthalmic ointments before bedtime, as they remain in the eye longer. These are not recommended for daytime use because they blur vision.

                           

                          Patients who are refractory to artificial tears and ointments—those who do not improve after maximum use—should see an ophthalmologist for prescription treatment. Short-term non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drug (NSAID) or corticosteroid eye drops are indicated for a maximum of two to four weeks.11 This is due to the potential for AEs with long-term use, including

                          • NSAIDs: corneal-scleral melts, perforation, ulceration, severe keratopathy
                          • corticosteroids: infections, increased intraocular pressure, cataract worsening or development

                           

                          Cyclosporine 0.05% is another therapeutic option for patients who are refractory to or do not tolerate artificial tears and ointments and those with severe ocular dryness requiring multiple courses of a glucocorticoid eye drop.11 Cyclosporine is a calcineurin inhibitor that prevents T cell maturation.32 This counteracts SjD’s vicious cycle of inflammation. Patients administer the drug in the eyes twice daily, and the most common AEs are eye burning, stinging, and irritation. Of note, a small trial investigating topical tacrolimus showed promising results, but larger trials are needed to confirm the role of this drug for SjD-associated ocular dryness. Some providers also use lifitegrast ophthalmic solution or varenicline nasal spray off-label to treat SjD-associated dry eye, but EULAR makes no recommendation for their use.

                           

                          Serum eye drops are blood-derived eye drops that may be autologous (uses the patient’s own blood) or allogenic (the blood comes from a donor).26 These are compounded; a specialized pharmacy collects the patient’s blood, then clots, centrifuges, and dilutes it with sterile saline. The serum drops also contain increased concentrations of proteins, growth factors, vitamins A and C, antioxidants, and electrolytes found in natural tears.26 This is meant to mimic natural basal tears’ biochemical properties to heal the cells of the ocular surface.

                           

                          Small uncontrolled studies have examined serum eye drops for SjD patients, and results are inconsistent.11 Nevertheless, ophthalmologists may use this option for patients with severe symptoms who are refractory to topical cyclosporine drops. When considering serum eye drops, individuals should consider storage needs, as they should be frozen until use (up to six months) and then refrigerated once opened for up to one week. Contamination during and after the compounding process is also possible.11

                           

                          Studies have investigated the utility of other therapies—hydroxychloroquine, immunosuppressive agents, and rituximab—for SjD-related ocular dryness, but EULAR does not recommend any of them for ocular dryness alone based on available clinical data.

                           

                          Fatigue and Pain

                          Patients with pSjD often present with general non-inflammatory joint/muscle pain and fatigue/weakness. After ruling out potential concomitant conditions (e.g., osteoarthritis, hypothyroidism, vitamin deficiencies, depression), providers should evaluate whether the patient is experiencing joint pain (arthralgia) or joint inflammation (arthritis, tenosynovitis).11 The ESSDAI score defines low articular activity level as arthralgia in the hands, wrists, ankles, and feet accompanied by morning stiffness longer than 30 minutes, always ruling out concomitant osteoarthritis.17 Objective inflammation (i.e., redness, heat, and swelling) in one or more joints is considered arthritis, and the ESSDAI score classifies arthritis severity based on the number of joints involved. Management of arthritis is covered under systemic disease treatment, and Table 3 outlines EULAR recommendations for non-arthritis musculoskeletal pain.

                           

                          Table 3. EULAR-Recommended Management of SjD-Associated Musculoskeletal Pain*11

                          Acute Pain Frequent Acute Pain Chronic, Daily Pain
                          · Acetaminophen or NSAIDs for symptomatic relief for up to 7 to 10 consecutive days

                          · Topical diclofenac may be effective for local pain with fewer adverse effects

                          · Consider hydroxychloroquine in patients with articular pain based on its evidence for use in other SAD

                          · Off-label use of biologics (even as rescue therapy) is not recommended

                          · Emphasize non-pharmacologic management (e.g., physical activity) before medications

                          · Goal is to avoid repeated use of NSAIDs or glucocorticoids

                          · Musculoskeletal: antidepressants and anticonvulsants

                          · Neuropathic: gabapentin, pregabalin, or amitriptyline

                          · Opioids are not recommended

                          *Providers must first rule out concomitant osteoarthritis (i.e., objective inflammation in 1 or more joints); NSAID = non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drug; SAD = systemic autoimmune diseases

                           

                          Systemic Disease

                          EULAR defines systemic SjD as disease involvement that affects or has affected any of the organs/systems included in the ESSDAI score (i.e., all domains except biological).11 Systemic disease is linked to autoimmune dysfunction that may eventually become irreversible. Providers should limit systemic therapies to patients with active systemic disease following careful evaluation of symptom severity and organ damage. Clinicians should consider systemic therapy on an individual basis, as not all patients with active systemic disease will require it.11

                           

                          EULAR makes a few general recommendations regarding systemic therapy11:

                          1. Consider systemic therapies for most patients presenting with at least moderate activity in one clinical domain, or with a global moderate disease activity score (i.e., greater than 5).
                          2. Therapeutic response is considered a reduction of 3 or more points in the global ESSDAI score.
                          3. Providers should follow a sequential (or combined) use of glucocorticoids, immunosuppressive agents, and biologics to treat organ-specific systemic manifestations.
                          4. Use glucocorticoids at the minimum dose and duration necessary to control active systemic disease.
                          5. Use synthetic immunosuppressive agents (e.g., azathioprine, cyclophosphamide, leflunomide, methotrexate, mycophenolate) mainly as glucocorticoid-sparing agents in patients requiring long-term glucocorticoid therapy (i.e., those with severe organ impairments).
                          6. Consider B-cell targeted therapies (e.g., belimumab, rituximab) in patients with severe, refractory systemic disease.

                           

                          Evidence regarding the use of glucocorticoids for SjD is weak and studies report high rates of AEs.11 Guidelines recommend administering pulses of methylprednisolone followed by doses of 0.5 mg/kg daily or less as induction therapy in patients with severe disease and lower doses in patients with less severe disease. The goal is to withdraw glucocorticoids in patients whose SjD becomes inactive as soon as possible or at least target a maintenance dose of 5 mg daily or less with the aid of steroid-sparing immunosuppressive agents.11 Studies of immunosuppressive agents are lacking, so EULAR does not recommend one agent over another, except in the case of patient characteristics or comorbidities. Dose, route of administration, and duration of treatment are not established given the lack of clinical data, so physicians should follow similar dosing schedules to other systemic autoimmune diseases.11

                           

                          EULAR guidelines also include algorithms for each ESSDAI domain based on available trial data and the clinical experience of the individuals on the EULAR task force.11 Figure 2 summarizes these recommendations, including standard of care, second line, and third line recommendations.

                           

                          Figure 2. EULAR Algorithms for Systemic Therapy Based on ESSDAI Domain11

                          ABA = abatacept 0, 2, 4 weeks and every 4 weeks; BLM = belimumab 10 mg/kg (0, 2 and 4 weeks and then every 4 weeks); CyC = cyclophosphamide pulses 0.5g/15 day (maximum six pulses); ESSDAI = EULAR Sjogren's syndrome disease activity index; GC = glucocorticoid (recommended dose in mg/kg/day), short-term course whenever possible, consider methylprednisolone pulses in severe cases; G-CSF = granulocyte-colony stimulating factor; Hb = hemoglobin; HCQ = hydroxychloroquine 200 mg/day; ID = immunosuppressive agents, no head-to-

                          head comparisons available; ivIG = intravenous immunoglobulins 0.4-2 g/kg 5 days; MP = methylprednisolone; NSAID = non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drug; Pex = plasma exchanges; RTX = rituximab 1 g/15 days (x2)

                           

                           

                          Considering Comorbidities

                          More than 20% of people with SjD are older than 65 years, making them more likely to have pulmonary, liver, kidney, or heart-related comorbidities.19 It is especially important to consider alternative causes of sicca in older patients since many conditions and drugs produce oral and ocular dryness. Older people are nearly twice as likely to suffer from dry eyes than younger individuals.19 Older age is also associated with decreased salivary flow rate. Dry mouth is more than a bothersome symptom. Addressing dry mouth in older adults is vital because worsening oral health increases risks of malnutrition, social isolation, care dependency, and frailty that tend to affect this population.19

                           

                          An estimated 45% to 80% of the older adult population reports some pain, most commonly musculoskeletal.19 Treatment plans for these patients should emphasize non-pharmacologic relief rather than medications as first-line therapy. Also, despite the lack of available evidence, experts suggest that topical NSAID formulations may be effective for local SjD-related pain in older adults with fewer AEs than oral NSAIDs.19

                           

                          Treating systemic symptoms in this population also requires special considerations. Older adults are more likely to experience AEs from glucocorticoids—including blood clots, osteoporosis, and bone fractures—than younger individuals.19 Pharmacists should also consider the greater frequency of hepatic and renal impairment in older patients. For example, renal function decline and decreased folate stores may increase methotrexate-related toxicity.19 Studies suggest that disease-modifying antirheumatic drugs (including some biologics) have similar effects on younger and older patients while maintaining favorable AE profiles.19 Older people, therefore, should not be excluded from the use of these agents for systemic disease where appropriate.

                           

                          Autoimmune conditions increase the risk of lymphoma, cancer stemming from the lymph nodes.33 More specifically, pSjD is the autoimmune disease associated with the highest risk of B-cell lymphoma, occurring in 5% to 10% of patients.33 This risk increases by 2.2% per year of age in this population.33 In patients with pSjD, chronic stimulation of autoimmune B cells leads to development of B-cell lymphoma. Screening for lymphoma is an important part of a comprehensive treatment plan given the increased risk. Similar to other autoimmune conditions, SjD also increases patients’ risk for atherosclerosis and coronary artery disease.22

                           

                          Research Continues

                          Researchers continue to define new therapeutic targets and investigate new treatments for SjD. Targeting B cells appears to be the most promising therapeutic approach for this condition.18 Studies are evaluating anti-CD20 antibodies and antibodies targeting the BAFF signaling pathway to target B cells and anti-CD40 antibodies to block the crosstalk between T cells and B cells.18 So far, two agents have met their primary outcome—improvement in systemic disease activity—in pSjD clinical trials: anti-BAFF receptor antibodies and anti-CD40 antibodies.

                           

                          BAFF receptors are exclusively expressed on B cells, so targeting these receptors effectively depletes B cells to blunt the autoimmune response in pSjD. Clinical trials have assessed an anti-BAFF receptor antibody, ianalumab (VAY736) in patients with pSjD with positive results.34,35 In the phase 2b study, patients experienced improved ESSDAI scores from baseline to week 24 and improvement in stimulated saliva flow rate.35 This is a promising option for a future disease-modifying pSjD treatment, and phase 3 trials are ongoing.

                           

                          The interaction between CD40 and the CD40 ligand (CD40L) is important for B cell development, antibody production, and optimal T cell-dependent antibody responses. Patients with pSjD have increased expression of CD40L compared to healthy individuals, which suggests that CD40-CD40L interactions could be a practical target for pSjD treatment.18 Phase 2 studies have shown promising results for iscalimab, an anti-CD40 antibody, to treat pSjD. However, the drug’s manufacturer discontinued development of iscalimab, citing a non-competitive risk/benefit profile to other agents.36 A phase 2 trial of another anti-CD40L antibody frexalimab (SAR441344) also shows promise for SjD, but the manufacturer is not currently pursuing this indication.37

                           

                          Additional therapeutic targets under investigation include18

                          • Bruton’s tyrosine kinase, an important molecule in B cell receptor signaling
                          • plasmacytoid dendritic cells, which secrete type 1 IFNs
                          • downstream type 1 and 2 IFN signaling (using Janus kinase inhibitors)
                          • IL-12 signaling pathway and induction of T helper 1 cell, which secrete type 2 IFNs (using ustekinumab)

                           

                          MULTIDISCIPLINARY TEAM CARE IS IDEAL

                          EULAR guidelines recommend a multidisciplinary approach to SjD treatment.11 This is the second strongest recommendation included in the 2020 guidelines, with only a recommendation for patients who develop B-cell lymphoma to receive individualized treatment receiving a stronger grade. SjD’s overall prevalence in the general population is low and the condition presents differently in every patient, making it difficult for any one provider to ensure in-depth expertise in managing it. At minimum, the SjD care team should include a primary care provider (PCP), a rheumatologist, a dentist, and an ophthalmologist. Pharmacy staff should understand the roles and responsibilities of each provider to better recognize their own place on the care team.

                           

                          Rheumatologist

                          Rheumatologists are usually the “lead” of the medical team for SjD and have the primary responsibility for managing it.38 The rheumatologist should verify the diagnosis, including looking for disease mimics and screening and monitoring for coexisting rheumatologic or autoimmune conditions. They should also screen for lymphoma risk factors and common comorbidities. They may collaborate with the patient’s PCP for comorbidity monitoring and management. Rheumatologists also provide treatment for systemic features of SjD.38

                           

                          Primary Care Provider

                          The PCP should provider routine, comprehensive health care addressing a wide range of issues, including patients’ mental health.38 They should collaborate with the patient’s rheumatologist to establish who is responsible for overlapping areas of practice (e.g., comorbidities, immunizations, nutrition concerns). Screening for comorbidities—including cardiovascular disease, osteoporosis, sinusitis, and others—is an important task for PCPs, but they may be unaware of the increased risk of these conditions in patients with SjD. Pharmacy teams should encourage patients to advocate for themselves, and direct patients to www.sjogrensadvocate.com for advice on how to do so effectively.38

                           

                          Ophthalmologist

                          Ophthalmologists are responsible for managing severe dry eye.38 Occasionally, the ophthalmologist is the first provider to suspect SjD and refers patients to rheumatology for general management. They perform diagnostic tests (e.g., Schirmer’s test, ocular staining score, tear breakup time) to determine the severity of SjD ocular symptoms and blood tests to screen for biologic signs of SjD. These clinicians also provide routine dry eye management, including prescription medications/drops and recommendations for OTC therapies.

                           

                          Dentist

                          Many patients with SjD require extensive dental care exceeding the recommended checkups every 6 months for otherwise healthy individuals.38 Preventative dental visit frequency depends on patients’ level of dryness and decay. At every checkup, dentists should examine the entire oral region, including palpating (i.e., feeling with the fingers) salivary glands, face, and neck for swelling and masses.38 They should also provide dental caries prevention, screening, and treatment.

                           

                          Where Pharmacy Fits In

                          Most often, pharmacy technicians will encounter patients with SjD at the pickup counter, so they should be prepared to refer patients to the pharmacist when appropriate. Sometimes, patients request assistance finding the eye care aisle for OTC drops. Before pointing them in the right direction, pharmacy technicians should refer patients to the pharmacist for counseling if they indicate they are new to using artificial tears (e.g., asking your opinion about product selection).

                           

                          Technicians can also help patients locate products based on pharmacist recommendations and provide informational handouts about proper administration technique (see Sidebar). While cost in an important factor in therapy adherence, consider recommending name brand products rather than store brand generics whenever feasible. While the active ingredients may be consistent across proprietary and store brand products, the concentration of these components is often less than 5% of each drop.39 The amount of inactive ingredients (i.e., “filler”) differs from brand to brand.

                           

                          Sidebar: Don’t Leave Patients High and Dry40,41

                          To provide maximum relief, patients must administer eye formulations correctly. Many patients struggle with this, especially older patients, and joint pain in SjD can make it even more difficult. Counseling patients on proper eye drop and ointment instillation is crucial to improving outcomes.

                           

                          Eye Drop Administration

                          1. Thoroughly wash hands and areas of the face around the eyes. Remove contact lenses, unless the product is specifically designed for use with contact lenses. If using a suspension, shake well.
                          2. Tilt head back, gently grasp the lower eyelid below lashes and pull away from the eye to create a pouch.
                          3. Look up, and administer a single drop into the pouch without touching the tip of the container to the eye.
                          4. As soon as the drop is instilled, release the eyelid slowly. Close eyes gently for 3 minutes and position the head downward (gravity pulls the drop onto the ocular surface). Minimize blinking or squeezing the eyelid.
                          5. Use a finger to gently apply pressure to the opening of the tear duct (inner corner of the eye) to prevent medication from draining through the tear duct and increase medication contact time in the eye.
                          6. If additional ophthalmic therapy is indicated, wait 5 to 10 minutes in between. Also, wait 5 to 10 minutes before reinserting contact lenses, if applicable.

                           

                          Pro-Tip: tell patients, “If you have a hard time deciphering whether you’ve successfully installed eye drops, refrigerate the solution before administration to more easily detect the drops on your eye’s surface. Do NOT use this trick with a suspension.”

                           

                          Eye Ointment Administration

                          1. Thoroughly wash hands and areas of the face around the eyes. Remove contact lenses, unless the product is designed for use with contact lenses specifically.
                          2. Tilt head back, gently grasp the lower eyelid below lashes, and pull away from the eye to create a pouch.
                          3. Look up, and with a sweeping motion, place a strip of ointment ¼ to ½ inch wide inside the lower eyelid by gently squeezing the tube (avoid touching the tube tip to any tissue surface).
                          4. Release the eyelid slowly and close eyes gently for 1 to 2 minutes.
                          5. Vision may blur temporarily, so avoid activities that require good visual acuity until vision improves. Also, wait 15 minutes before reinserting contact lenses, if applicable.

                           

                          Clearly, a medication expert needs to contribute to patient and provider education and oversee prescribed and OTC medications. Pharmacists can offer various clinical pearls to help patients with SjD avoid dry eyes, mouth, and skin.

                           

                          Lifestyle modifications42:

                          • Avoid windy or drafty environments and wear sunglasses outdoors
                          • Use a humidifier indoors to keep the air moist
                          • Practice good oral hygiene (e.g., chew sugarless gum, stay well hydrated, see a dentist three times a year)
                          • Consciously remember to blink when working at a computer or reading extensively
                          • Avoid wearing eye makeup
                          • Consider smoking cessation and avoid smoky environments
                          • After showering, pat dry gently and apply an emollient to damp skin within three minutes

                           

                          Separation and timing40,41:

                          • Separate administration of multiple eye drops by at least 5 minutes to ensure the first drop is not flushed away by the second and the second drop is not diluted by the first
                          • If using multiple products, use them in order of least viscous to most viscous to ensure efficacy of all treatments
                          • If using drops and ointment, administer drops at least 10 minutes before ointment so the ointment does not create a barrier to the drops’ absorption
                          • If using a suspension with another dosage form, use the suspension last because its retention time in the tear film is longer

                           

                          Pharmacists and pharmacy technicians should also be aware of medications that could worsen symptoms of dryness (Table 4). Technicians should refer patients with SjD to the pharmacist when they see these at the pick-up counter. They should also stay up to date on available eye care formulations and discuss new products with the pharmacist. Pharmacists should counsel patients with SjD about which OTC products to avoid and offer to contact prescribers to recommend prescription therapy changes.

                           

                          Table 4. Medications That Cause or Worsen Ocular Dryness19,25,28

                          Medication/Class Examples Rx/OTC Mechanism for Ocular Dryness
                          Anticholinergics benztropine

                          trihexyphenidyl

                          Rx Blocking acetylcholine blurs vision and stops the signals that normally tell the eyes to produce tears
                          Antihistamines (especially first-generation) cetirizine

                          chlorpheniramine

                          diphenhydramine

                          loratadine

                          OTC

                           

                          Dry secretions (including tears) and produce anticholinergic adverse effects
                          Beta-blockers atenolol

                          metoprolol

                          propranolol

                          Rx Cause the body to make less of a protein present in tears, and can lower pressure in the eyes, affecting the amount of water in the tears
                          Decongestants phenylephrine

                          pseudoephedrine

                          OTC Decrease nasal/mucosal mucus production (including the eyes), which decreases tear production
                          Diuretics furosemide

                          hydrochlorothiazide

                          Rx Help the body eliminate water and salt, which can alter tear composition
                          Hormones estrogen/progesterone and other hormones used for contraception, infertility, or hormone replacement Rx Unknown
                          Isotretinoin N/A Rx Lessens oil production by certain glands to treat acne, but some of those glands are in eyelids, decreasing oil in tears
                          Tricyclic antidepressants amitriptyline

                          amoxapine

                          clomipramine

                          imipramine

                          maprotiline

                          Rx Anticholinergic adverse effect stops the signals that normally tell the eyes to produce tears

                          OTC = over-the-counter; Rx = prescription only

                           

                          CONCLUSION

                          SjD is a complex, multifactorial condition that impacts patients’ quality of life substantially. Providing optimal care for this disease requires a multidisciplinary team, on which pharmacists and pharmacy technicians provide a link between all providers to ensure continuity of care. Recognizing patients with SjD in the pharmacy is crucial to prevent polypharmacy, ensure patients know how to use eye care formulations, assist patients in finding OTC products to address symptoms, and refer to other providers when necessary. This will improve care and outcomes for patients with SjD.

                           

                           

                           

                          PAUSE AND PONDER:

                          1. Why are patients with SjD so difficult to identify and diagnose?
                          2. How would your daily life change if you had SjD? What hardships might you face?
                          3. How often do you encounter patients asking for help choosing artificial tear products? What could you improve about your ability to assist them?

                           

                           

                          Pharmacist Post Test (for viewing only)

                          Sjogren’s Disease: How Dry Am I?

                          Pharmacist Post-test 25-050 H01 P

                          Upon completion of this activity, pharmacists will be able to
                          1. DISCUSS current theories postulating how Sjogren’s disease develops
                          2. IDENTIFY biomarkers used in diagnosis and patient classification
                          3. INTERPRET guidelines and evidence-based medicine to use best practices to manage Sjogren’s disease
                          4. USE elements of an integrated approach to care among specialists and other pharmacists

                          1. Which gene(s) shows the strongest association with primary SjD?
                          A. STAT4
                          B. IRF5
                          C. HLA

                          2. Which of the following is associated with SjD pathogenesis?
                          A. Interferon signature
                          B. T-cell activating factor
                          C. Epstein-Barr virus

                          3. Which sentence describes the potential role of BAFF in primary SjD development?
                          A. It is an unexplored and unreliable therapeutic target for SjD treatment
                          B. It proves that epithelial cells are passive victims of SjD autoimmunity
                          C. It serves as a link between the innate and adaptive immune systems

                          4. Which of the following biomarkers may be more accurate than traditional clinical tests for SjD detection?
                          A. TSAs
                          B. LACTO and LIPOC-1
                          C. S100A8/A9

                          5. Which is TRUE about the ESSDAI score?
                          A. A 14 is the highest score possible
                          B. It measures disease activity in 12 domains
                          C. It assesses patient-reported outcomes

                          6. A patient consults with you about her SjD-induced dry mouth symptoms. She has been using a gel saliva substitute for a week. It works well, but she finds it annoyingly sticky and is hoping to find an alternative. She tells you her rheumatologist says she has mild gland dysfunction and acceptable saliva output. What is the best recommendation for this patient?
                          A. Dilute the saliva substitute with water
                          B. Switch to xylitol-free chewing gum
                          C. Talk to your rheumatologist about trying cevimeline

                          7. A patient is using artificial tear drops for SjD-related ocular dryness, but he complains that he must use them every 2 hours because they wear off. Which of the following is the best recommendation for this patient?
                          A. Switch to an artificial tear suspension containing hyaluronate
                          B. Switch to an artificial tear ointment containing BAK
                          C. Talk to your ophthalmologist about prescription therapies

                          8. A patient with SjD complains of visible redness, considerable heat, and ample swelling in three of his joints. He brings acetaminophen and ibuprofen to your pharmacy counter and asks which one will work better. Which of the following is the best recommendation for this patient?
                          A. Ibuprofen is the better choice because it is anti-inflammatory
                          B. A topical NSAID like diclofenac is a better choice because it is locally-acting
                          C. Talk to your rheumatologist about systemic hydroxychloroquine with NSAIDs

                          9. A patient presents to your pharmacy to buy artificial tears. She mentions that her ophthalmologist recommended that she see a rheumatologist because she thinks the patient has SjD. She doesn’t understand why that’s necessary when she can just use OTC drops to lubricate her dry eyes, and she doesn’t plan to see another provider. Which of the following is the best response?
                          A. You can use OTC drops as long as you choose a product with methylcellulose and no benzalkonium chloride
                          B. SjD affects your whole body, not just your eyes, so you may need additional treatment from a rheumatologist
                          C. Your ophthalmologist can prescribe prescription therapies for your dry eye symptoms, so you don’t need to see a rheumatologist

                          10. A patient’s neurologist prescribed propranolol for migraine prevention. He presents to your pharmacy to pick up the prescription along with a facewash for acne and artificial tear drops for SjD. What should you do?
                          A. Offer to contact the patient’s neurologist for an alternative migraine prevention therapy
                          B. Recommend a suspension, not drops, to prevent blurred vision that could worsen his migraines
                          C. Advise him to avoid the acne facewash as it could worsen his SjD-related dry eye symptoms

                          Pharmacy Technician Post Test (for viewing only)

                          Sjogren’s Disease: How Dry Am I?

                          Pharmacy Technician Post-test 25-050 H01 T

                          Upon completion of this activity, pharmacy technicians will be able to
                          1. DESCRIBE Sjogren’s disease’s basic pathology and symptoms
                          2. OUTLINE prescription and non-prescription treatments used in Sjogren’s disease
                          3. IDENTIFY when to refer patients to the pharmacists for recommendations or referrals

                          1. Which is the most common symptom of SjD?
                          A. Arthralgia
                          B. Fatigue
                          C. Sicca

                          2. Which of the following sentences accurately describes SjD symptoms?
                          A. Symptoms are the same in every patient
                          B. Symptoms may cycle between mild and severe
                          C. Younger patients have worse symptoms than older patients

                          3. Which gene(s) shows the strongest association with primary SjD?
                          A. STAT4
                          B. IRF5
                          C. HLA

                          4. Which of the following should ALL patients with SjD-related dry mouth use?
                          A. Gel formulation saliva substitute
                          B. Prescription muscarinic agonists
                          C. Neutral pH sodium fluoride gel

                          5. Which of the following has the lowest viscosity?
                          A. Eye drops
                          B. Eye suspensions
                          C. Eye ointments

                          6. Which prescription therapy does EULAR recommend for SjD-related ocular dryness?
                          A. Hydroxychloroquine oral tablets
                          B. Cyclosporine ophthalmic solution
                          C. Lifitegrast ophthalmic solution

                          7. Which of the following is used to treat frequent acute SjD-associated articular pain?
                          A. Hydroxychloroquine
                          B. Biologics
                          C. Amitriptyline

                          8. Which of the following does EULAR recommend for patients with SjD who present with ocular dryness?
                          A. Use artificial tears containing methylcellulose of hyaluronate at least twice daily
                          B. Use artificial tears containing benzalkonium chloride at least four times daily
                          C. Use artificial tear ointments during the day because they last the longest in the eyes

                          9. A patient is picking up a pilocarpine prescription for SjD-induced dry eyes. She mentions that she has daily, throbbing pain in her back. She is also purchasing naproxen (an NSAID) that she hopes will help with the pain and OTC artificial tears for her dry eyes. Why should you refer this patient to the pharmacist?
                          A. Acetaminophen is a better choice for this patient’s pain
                          B. The patient should not use artificial tears with pilocarpine
                          C. This patient may require prescription treatment for her pain

                          10. Which of the following patients with SjD should you refer to the pharmacist?
                          A. A 74-year-old male purchasing topical diclofenac for local, acute pain
                          B. A 52-year-old female purchasing artificial tears, cevimeline, and phenylephrine
                          C. A 33-year-old female purchasing artificial tears and insulin for diabetes

                          References

                          Full List of References

                          1. Talal N. Sjögren's syndrome: historical overview and clinical spectrum of disease. Rheum Dis Clin North Am. 1992;18(3):507-515.
                          2. Ramos-Casals M, Baer AN, Brito-Zerón MDP, et al. 2023 International Rome consensus for the nomenclature of Sjögren disease. Nat Rev Rheumatol. 2025;21(7):426-437. doi:10.1038/s41584-025-01268-z
                          3. Sjogren’s syndrome. National Institute of Dental and Craniofacial Research. Updated July 2018. Accessed June 1, 2022. https://www.nidcr.nih.gov/health-info/sjogrens-syndrome
                          4. Kassan SS, Moutsopoulos HM. Clinical manifestations and early diagnosis of Sjögren syndrome. Arch Intern Med. 2004;164(12):1275-1284. doi:10.1001/archinte.164.12.1275
                          5. Helmick CG, Felson DT, Lawrence RC, et al. Estimates of the prevalence of arthritis and other rheumatic conditions in the United States. Part I. Arthritis Rheum. 2008;58(1):15-25. doi:10.1002/art.23177
                          6. Venus Williams stands up for Sjogren’s awareness. Sjogren’s Foundation. April 30, 2022. Accessed June 1, 2022. https://www.sjogrens.org/blog/2022/venus-williams-stands-up-for-sjogrens-awareness
                          7. Taylor T. Perseverance in pursuit: U.S.'s Boxx eyes World Cup title despite illness. June 5, 2015. Accessed June 1, 2022. https://www.si.com/soccer/2015/06/05/shannon-boxx-womens-world-cup-us-national-team
                          8. Ramirez CD. Carrie Ann Inaba announces leave of absence from The Talk to focus on her health. April 26, 2021. Accessed June 1, 2022. https://people.com/tv/carrie-ann-inaba-taking-leave-of-absence-from-the-talk-to-focus-on-health/
                          9. Zintzaras E, Voulgarelis M, Moutsopoulos HM. The risk of lymphoma development in autoimmune diseases: a metaanalysis. Arch Intern Med. 2005;165:2337-2344.
                          10. Lazarus, M.N.; Robinson, D.; Mak, V.; Møller, H.; Isenberg, D.A. Incidence of cancer in a cohort of patients with primary sjogren’s syndrome. Rheumatology. 2006;45:1012-1015.
                          11. Ramos-Casals M, Brito-Zerón P, Bombardieri S, et al. EULAR recommendations for the management of Sjögren's syndrome with topical and systemic therapies. Ann Rheum Dis. 2020;79(1):3-18. doi:10.1136/annrheumdis-2019-216114
                          12. Kittridge A, Routhouska SB, Korman NJ. Dermatologic manifestations of Sjögren syndrome. J Cutan Med Surg. 2011;15(1):8-14. doi:10.2310/7750.2010.09033
                          13. Engel GL. The clinical application of the biopsychosocial model. J Med Philos. 1981;6(2):101-123. doi:10.1093/jmp/6.2.101
                          14. Tzioufas AG, Voulgarelis M. Update on Sjögren's syndrome autoimmune epithelitis: from classification to increased neoplasias. Best Pract Res Clin Rheumatol. 2007;21(6):989-1010. doi:10.1016/j.berh.2007.09.001
                          15. Carsons SE, Patel BC. Sjogren Syndrome. In: StatPearls. Treasure Island (FL): StatPearls Publishing; November 2, 2021. https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/books/NBK431049/
                          16. Valtýsdóttir ST, Gudbjörnsson B, Lindqvist U, Hällgren R, Hetta J. Anxiety and depression in patients with primary Sjögren's syndrome. J Rheumatol. 2000;27(1):165-169.
                          17. Seror R, Bowman SJ, Brito-Zeron P, et al. EULAR Sjögren's syndrome disease activity index (ESSDAI): a user guide. RMD Open. 2015;1(1):e000022. Published 2015 Feb 20. doi:10.1136/rmdopen-2014-000022
                          18. Seror R, Nocturne G, Mariette X. Current and future therapies for primary Sjögren syndrome. Nat Rev Rheumatol. 2021;17(8):475-486. doi:10.1038/s41584-021-00634-x
                          19. Retamozo S, Baldini C, Bootsma H, et al. Therapeutic recommendations for the management of older adult patients with Sjögren's syndrome. Drugs Aging. 2021;38(4):265-284. doi:10.1007/s40266-021-00838-6
                          20. Jonsson R. Disease mechanisms in Sjögren's syndrome: What do we know? Scand J Immunol. 2022;95(3):e13145. doi:10.1111/sji.13145
                          21. Nocturne G, Mariette X. Advances in understanding the pathogenesis of primary Sjögren's syndrome. Nat Rev Rheumatol. 2013;9(9):544-556. doi:10.1038/nrrheum.2013.110
                          22. Skarlis C, Raftopoulou S, Mavragani CP. Sjogren's syndrome: recent updates. J Clin Med. 2022;11(2):399. doi:10.3390/jcm11020399
                          23. Cafaro G, Croia C, Argyropoulou OD, et al. One year in review 2019: Sjögren's syndrome. Clin Exp Rheumatol. 2019;37 Suppl 118(3):3-15.
                          24. Evoxac [prescribing information]. Daiichi Pharmaceutical Co.; 2006. https://www.accessdata.fda.gov/drugsatfda_docs/label/2006/020989s008lbl.pdf
                          25. Paulsen AJ, Cruickshanks KJ, Fischer ME, et al. Dry eye in the beaver dam offspring study: prevalence, risk factors, and health-related quality of life. Am J Ophthalmol. 2014;157(4):799-806. doi:10.1016/j.ajo.2013.12.023
                          26. Dang VT, Hoyle B. Autologous serum tears: an overlooked treatment for dry eye. Modern Optometry. July 2020. Accessed June 1, 2022. https://modernod.com/articles/2020-july-aug/autologous-serum-tears-an-overlooked-treatment-for-dry-eye?
                          27. Pucker AD, Ng SM, Nichols JJ. Over the counter (OTC) artificial tear drops for dry eye syndrome. Cochrane Database Syst Rev. 2016;2:CD009729. doi:10.1002/14651858.CD009729.pub2
                          28. Messmer EM. The pathophysiology, diagnosis, and treatment of dry eye disease. Dtsch Arztebl Int. 2015;112(5):71-82. doi:10.3238/arztebl.2015.0071
                          29. Benzalkonium chloride (BAK). Not a Dry Eye. Accessed June 13, 2022. https://www.notadryeye.org/all-about-dry-eye-syndrome/treatments-for-dry-eye-syndrome-and-related-conditions/lubricating-eye-drops/glaucoma-eyedrops-a-fresh-look-at-preservatives/
                          30. CFR—Code of Federal Regulations Title 21. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. Updated March 28, 2022. Accessed June 13, 2022. https://www.accessdata.fda.gov/scripts/cdrh/cfdocs/cfCFR/CFRSearch.cfm?CFRPart=349
                          31. Horton M, Horton M, Reinhard E. Master the maze of artificial tears. Review of Optometry. November 20, 2018. Accessed June 13, 2022. https://www.reviewofoptometry.com/article/master-the-maze-of-artificial-tears
                          32. Gupta PK, Asbell P, Sheppard J. Current and future pharmacological therapies for the management of dry eye. Eye Contact Lens. 2020;46 Suppl 2:S64-S69. doi:10.1097/ICL.0000000000000666
                          33. Nocturne G, Pontarini E, Bombardieri M, Mariette X. Lymphomas complicating primary Sjögren's syndrome: from autoimmunity to lymphoma. Rheumatology (Oxford). 2019;60(8):3513-3521. doi:10.1093/rheumatology/kez052
                          34. Dörner T, Posch MG, Li Y, et al. Treatment of primary Sjögren's syndrome with ianalumab (VAY736) targeting B cells by BAFF receptor blockade coupled with enhanced, antibody-dependent cellular cytotoxicity. Ann Rheum Dis. 2019;78(5):641-647. doi:10.1136/annrheumdis-2018-214720
                          35. Dörner T, Bowman SJ, Fox R, et al. Ianalumab (VAY736), a dual mode of action biologic combining BAFF receptor inhibition with B cell depletion, reaches primary endpoint for treatment of primary Sjogren’s syndrome [abstract OP0302]. Ann Rheum Dis. 79(Suppl 1);187-188 (2020).
                          36. Waldron J. Novartis gives up on anti-CD40 antibody to treat Sjögren's due to 'benefit/risk profile.' Fierce Biotech. January 31, 2025. Accessed July 14, 2025. https://www.fiercebiotech.com/biotech/novartis-gives-anti-cd40-antibody-treat-sjogrens-due-benefitrisk-profile
                          37. Fatima T, Mirza A, Fatima F, et al. Frexalimab (SAR441344) as a potential multiautoimmune disorder tackling mAB targeting the CD40-CD40L pathway undergoing clinical trials: a review. Ann Med Surg (Lond). 2024;86(12):7305-7313. Published 2024 Nov 12. doi:10.1097/MS9.0000000000002745
                          38. For the newly diagnosed. Sjogren’s Advocate. Updated June 10, 2022. Accessed June 13, 2022. https://www.sjogrensadvocate.com/newly-diagnosed
                          39. So many choices…what drops are best for my dry eyes? Summit Eye Center. March 5, 2019. Accessed June 13, 2022. https://www.summiteyekc.com/blog/eye-drop-overload-at-the-pharmacy
                          40. Evans K, Madden L. Recommended dry eye treatments in community pharmacy. The Pharmaceutical Journal. August 2, 2016. Accessed June 13, 2022. https://pharmaceutical-journal.com/article/ld/recommending-dry-eye-treatments-in-community-pharmacy
                          41. Fiscella RG, Jensen MK. Ophthalmic disorders. In: Krinsky DL, Ferreri SP, Hemstreet BA, Hume AL, Newton GD, Rollins CJ, Tietze KJ, eds. Handbook of Nonprescription Drugs. 19th ed. Washington, DC: APhA Publications;2018:545-566.
                          42. Wick JY. Sjogren’s syndrome: dry as a desert. Pharmacy Times. February 18, 2014. Accessed June 13, 2022. https://www.pharmacytimes.com/view/sjogrens-syndrome-dry-as-a-desert